Eternity1 V1 Software Manual

8/22/2019 Eternity1 V1 Software Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/eternity1-v1-software-manual 1/343

T E L E C O M S O L U T I O N S

ETERNITY

User’s Guide

Matrix Telecom Pvt. Ltd.

Corporate Office: Factory:394-GIDC, Makarpura, 39-GIDC, Waghodia-391 760 Vadodara-390 010, India Dist. Vadodara, IndiaPhone: +91 265 2630555 Phone: +91 2668 263172/73Fax: 2636598 Fax: 262631E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]: www.matrixtelesol.com

Version 1

August 2003



Documentation Information

This is a general documentation and it covers many models with different specifications. A particular productmay not support all the features and facilities described in the documentation.

Matrix Telecom reserves the right to revise information in this publication for any reason without prior

notice. Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Telecom makes nowarranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precautionhas been taken in preparation of this user’s guide, Matrix Telecom assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information containedherein.

Matrix Telecom reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of theequipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Neither Matrix Telecom nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or abuse of this product or unauthorized

modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly comply with Matrix Telecom’soperating and maintenance instructions.

All rights reserved. No part of this user’s guide may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any meanswithout the prior written consent of Matrix Telecom.



Matrix

Eternity User’s Guide Version 2 3

Welcome

Thanks for purchasing a Matrix product.

We want you to get the maximum performance from our product. If you run into technical difficulties, we arehere to help. But please consult this user’s guide first.

If you still can’t find the answer, gather all the information or questions that apply to your problem and, withthe product close to you, call your dealer. Matrix dealers are trained and ready to give you the support youneed to get the most from your Matrix product. In fact, most problems reported are minor and can be easilysolved over the phone.

In addition, technical consultation is available from Matrix engineers every business day. We are alwaysready to give advice on application requirements or specific information on installation and operation of our products.

Please note that the words ‘extension’ and ‘User’ are used synonymously.

The User’s guide is arranged alphabetically. We suggest the first time users to read this User’s guidein following sequence of topics.

• Introduction• Installation• Flexible Numbers• Demonstration of Tones• Distinctive Rings• Internal Call• External Call• Selective Trunk Access• Answering Calls• Receiving Incoming Calls• Call Pick Up• Call Transfer • Last Number Redial• Abbreviated Dialing• Call Splitting• Hold• Power Down Mode• Default the Configuration• Programming the System



Thanks !!



Matrix


Contents

Documentation InformationWelcome

Abbreviated Dialing........................................................................................................................................... 7 Access Codes ................................................................................................................................................... 11 Account Codes ................................................................................................................................................. 19 Alarms.............................................................................................................................................................. 20 Allowed and Denied Lists ................................................................................................................................ 25 Auto Call Back ................................................................................................................................................. 33 Auto Redial ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................................................... 37 Barge-In ........................................................................................................................................................... 38 Behind the PBX Applications .......................................................................................................................... 39 Boss Ring ......................................................................................................................................................... 41Call Budget ...................................................................................................................................................... 42

Call Cost Calculation (CCC) .......................................................................................................................... 46Call Duration Control ..................................................................................................................................... 59Call Duration Display ..................................................................................................................................... 66Call Forward ................................................................................................................................................... 67Call Park ......................................................................................................................................................... 70Call Pick Up .................................................................................................................................................... 71Call Progress Tones ......................................................................................................................................... 74Call Splitting.................................................................................................................................................... 78Call Transfer.................................................................................................................................................... 80Calling Line Identification (CLI) ..................................................................................................................... 83Cancel Station Features .................................................................................................................................. 88Class Of Service (COS) ................................................................................................................................... 89

Communication Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 98Conference-3 Party ........................................................................................................................................ 102Conference-Multi Party ................................................................................................................................. 105Configuration Reports ................................................................................................................................... 112Continued Dialing ......................................................................................................................................... 114Customer Name ............................................................................................................................................. 115 Department Call ............................................................................................................................................ 117 Digital Key Phone-Operation........................................................................................................................ 123 Digital Key Phone-Basic Parameters............................................................................................................ 134 Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming .................................................................................................. 139 Direct Inward dialing (DID).......................................................................................................................... 148 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)............................................................................................................. 154

Direct Station Selection Console (DSS-64) ................................................................................................... 163 Distinctive Rings ............................................................................................................................................ 166 Do Not Disturb (DND) .................................................................................................................................. 169 Dynamic Lock ................................................................................................................................................ 173 E&M Connectivity ......................................................................................................................................... 174 External Call ................................................................................................................................................. 181 External Call Forward (ECF) ....................................................................................................................... 182 External Music............................................................................................................................................... 184 Flash Timer.................................................................................................................................................... 185



Matrix

Eternity User’s Guide Version 26

Flexible Numbers........................................................................................................................................... 189 Follow Me ...................................................................................................................................................... 194 Help Reports .................................................................................................................................................. 195 Hold ............................................................................................................................................................... 196 Hotline ........................................................................................................................................................... 197 Internal Call .................................................................................................................................................. 199

Interrupt Request ........................................................................................................................................... 200 Last Caller Recall .......................................................................................................................................... 201 Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................................................... 202 Least Cost Routing (LCR).............................................................................................................................. 203 Maturity ......................................................................................................................................................... 213 Music on Hold ............................................................................................................................................... 215Operator ........................................................................................................................................................ 218Override ......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Paging ............................................................................................................................................................ 222 Printer Port ................................................................................................................................................... 227 Priority .......................................................................................................................................................... 228 Privacy ........................................................................................................................................................... 231

Programming the System............................................................................................................................... 235 Programming Using A Computer .................................................................................................................. 238 Programming Using Jeeves ........................................................................................................................... 240 Raid ................................................................................................................................................................ 242 Real Time Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 243 Remote Programming .................................................................................................................................... 244 Room Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 246 Selective Trunk Access ................................................................................................................................... 247 SLT Basic Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 248Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................................. 252Station Name ................................................................................................................................................. 267 Software Port and Hardware ID.................................................................................................................... 269

System Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 275System Security (Passwords) ......................................................................................................................... 277 Tenant Service................................................................................................................................................ 281Time Tables .................................................................................................................................................... 284Toll Control .................................................................................................................................................... 292Trunk Access Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 302Trunk Landing Group .................................................................................................................................... 312Trunk Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 320Trunk Reservation .......................................................................................................................................... 326 User Security (User Password) ..................................................................................................................... 327 Voice Help ...................................................................................................................................................... 328Voice Message Applications .......................................................................................................................... 329Walk-in Class Of Service ............................................................................................................................... 336 Wild Card Programming................................................................................................................................ 337

INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................... 339



Matrix


Abbreviated Dialing

What’s this?• Frequently called numbers can be stored in the system memory. These numbers can be dialed using

specific codes. This saves time while dialing such frequently used numbers. It is also known as MemoryDialing.

• An abbreviated number is accessed through its directory index.

The Eternity offers two types of abbreviated dialing: Personal Abbreviated Dialing and Global AbbreviatedDialing.

Personal Abbreviated Dialing• Each user can store up to 50 numbers of his choice in his personal memory.• User can change these numbers anytime from his station without consulting the System Administrator or

the System Engineer.• The location codes for Personal Abbreviated Dialing are 000-049.• Access to Personal Abbreviated Dialing is programmable. Please refer “Class Of Service” for more details• The system checks trunk access group and toll control Allowed List and Denied List before dialing the

Personal Abbreviated number. Hence for Personal Abbreviated Dialing; Trunk Access Group, Toll Controlallowed list & Toll Control denied list and Class Of Service should be programmed properly.

• A printout of SLT parameters or DKP parameters will show the telephone numbers programmed in the personal directory by the station user.

How to Program Personal Abbreviated Dialing?

In the above command:Location Code is from 000 to 049.Trunk Access Code is 0,5 or 61 to 68. (Selective trunk access is not allowed) Number is the telephone number, which is to be abbreviated.

How to use Personal Abbreviated Dialing?

Example:To program telephone number 0265-630555 at directory index 001 with trunk access code ‘63’, dial108-001-63-0265630555-#

Once this location is programmed with the number, dial 8001 to call the number.

Global Abbreviated Dialing• The memory space in which the telephone numbers are stored is called global directory.• Global directory can be programmed from the SE mode either by the System Administrator or the System

Engineer.• The global directory is common for all the users.• Maximum 900 numbers can be stored in the global directory. Location codes for global directory are from

100 to 999.

1 Lift the handset Dial tone

2 Dial 108-Locati on Code-Trunk Access Code-Number-# Confirmation tone

3 Replace the handset


2 Dial 8-Di rectory Index Number dialed out



Matrix


• Global Directory is divided into three parts i.e. Global Directory part 1, Global Directory part 2 and GlobalDirectory part 3.

• A user can dial these numbers irrespective of his Toll Control and Trunk Access Group. However thesenumbers can be dialed only if the user is allowed this feature from Class of Service.

• Telephone numbers of fire, police, branch offices or such other places can be stored in this memory so thatany user can access this facility.

• In case of long distance numbers, complete numbers with preceding codes should be entered.

How to Program Global Directory?Step 1: Make a list of telephone numbers to be stored in global directory.Step 2: Program the telephone numbers in appropriate part at various locations using command 2302 .Step 3: Assign the Global Directory parts to SLT or the DKP using COS commandsStep 4: Clear the numbers from a various locations if wrongly programmed using command 2301 Step 5: Take a printout of the Global Directory using command 2300 and hand it to relevant users.

CommandsStep 1Take a piece of paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.

Step 2Use following command to program a telephone number in Global Directory list:2302 –Location Code-Trunk Access group-Number-# Where,Location Code is from 100 to 999Global Directory part 1 is from 100 to 399Global Directory part 2 is from 400 to 699Global Directory part 3 is from 700 to 999Trunk Access Group is from 00 to 24 Number is the telephone number (maximum 24 digits)

Step 3Use the COS command to assign Global Directory part1/part 2/part 3 to SLT or DKP

Step 4Use following command to clear the number in a particular location:2301-1-Location Code-#

Use following command to clear the numbers in a range of locations:2301-2-Location Code- L ocation Code-#

Use following command to clear the numbers in all global directory indexes:2301-*-#

Step 5Use following command to print global directory configuration:2300 A sample printout for Global Directory (Part –I) is attached herewith on the next page. Likewise the printoutof Global Directory (Part-II and part –III) shall be printed along with Part – I.



Matrix


How to use Global Abbreviated Dialing?

Example:To Program telephone number of police i.e. 100 at location code 100 using trunk access group 60, dial

2302-100-60-100-#

To call police, station user should dial8100

The Eternity automatically inserts a pause after grabbing the trunk and dialing the first digit on the trunk line.This is known as Pause Timer and is programmable for each trunk. Refer ‘Trunk Parameters’ for moredetails.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Trunk Parameters


2 Dial 8-Location Code Number dialed out



Matrix


GLOBAL DIRECTORY (PART - I ) AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:30

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LOCATION TAG NUMBER LOCATION TAG NUMBER

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

100 101

102 103

104 105

106 107

108 109110 111

112 113

114 115

116 117

118 119

120 121

122 123

124 125

126 127

128 129

130 131

132 133

134 135

136 137

138 139140 141

142 143

144 145

146 147

148 149

150 151

152 153

154 155

156 157

158 159

160 161

162 163

164 165

166 167

168 169170 171

172 173

174 175

176 177

178 179

180 181

182 183

184 185

186 187

188 189

190 191

192 193

194 195

196 197

198 199-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Eternity V1R1 Page: 01

=X=X=



Matrix


Access Codes

What’s this?Access code is a string of digits dialed by a station to:• Call another Station• Grab a trunk line

• Turn on/off a Digital/Analog Port• Use a feature

Access codes can be classified broadly into three categories:• Station codes – Codes used to access stations viz. SLTs like 2001, 2002, etc., DKPs like 3001, 3002, etc.,

Analog Output Ports (For example, PAS) like 3921, 3922, etc.• Logical group codes - Codes assigned to call logical groups like Department Numbers- 3901, 3902, etc.,

Tenant Groups -2991,2992,etc. and access trunk groups – 60,61,etc.• Feature codes like ‘2’ for Auto Call Back, ‘5’ for Raid, etc.

Eternity allows changing these codes to codes of your choice. For example, by default to call operator, onehas to dial ‘9’. It is possible to change this code to ‘0’. Also, to dial on a trunk in group 1, one has to dial

‘61’. It is possible to change this code to ‘5’.

Please note that if you try to assign a number string that is already used to access a station or use a featurethen the system would not accept the command and shall give error tone. In such an event, one has to takethe printout of access codes, delete the conflicting access code and then assign the desired access code.

How it works?• A typical call passes through different phases or stages as shown below:

• Since no function is possible when the telephone is idle, it is obvious that no access code can be dialedfrom idle phase.

• Different access codes are making sense during different phases of a call. For example, call forwardfeature code makes sense from the dial tone, whereas, Auto Call Back (on busy) feature is meaningfulfrom busy tone.

• Please note that each access code in a single call-phase must be unique. For example, it is not possible tohave same access code for features like Call Forward and Redial since both these feature codes are used atdial tone.



Matrix


• However same access codes can be used for different features used during different phases, For example,One can have same access code say ‘8’ for Memory dial and Barge-in since both these feature codes areused during different phases of a call viz. Dial phase and Blocked phase.

• An access code can be of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.• In one phase, different access codes can be of different length. But all of them must be unique. For

Example, in blocked phase we can have following codes:

• Please note that station user cannot dial any code once he reaches the Denied phase.• Following table shows relevance of different features in different phases. Since no codes can be dialed

from Idle phase and Denied phase, these are not shown in the table.

Feature CodeAuto Call Back 2

Interrupt Request 31

Barge-In 33

Raid 411

Access Codes Dial Routing Blocked Placed Matured

Station Codes

SLT Station Number √DKP Station Number √

Logical Group Codes

Department Numbers √

Tenant Numbers √

Trunk Access-Group √

Trunk Access-Selective √

Feature Codes

Operator √

Call Pick Up √

Call Pick Up – Selective √

Redial √

Auto Redial √Memory Dial √

Call Forward √

Follow Me √

Do Not Disturb √

Hot Features (Hotline, Hot Outward Dialing,

Hot Outward Dialing with Number)

√

Dynamic Lock √Alarms √

Conference √

Walk-in Class of Service √

Trunk Reservation √Personal Memory Programming √

Last Caller Recall √

Voice Help √



Matrix


Station CodesSLT Station NumbersSLT station numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. Each SLT station number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details, please refer topic “Flexible Numbers”.

DKP Station NumbersDKP station numbers are the codes dialed from the dial phase by a station to call a DKP station. Each DKPstation number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase.For more details, please refer topic “Flexible Numbers”.

Logical Group codesDepartment NumbersEternity offers a facility of forming groups of stations and assigning a common access code calledDepartment Number to this group. For more details, please refer topic “ Department Call”.

Tenant NumbersEternity offers a facility of dividing the system in two or more sub-systems. This facility is known as TenantService. Fore more details, please refer topic “ Tenant Service”. Many times it is necessary to make callsfrom one tenant to another tenant.

Trunk Access-GroupThese are the codes dialed by a station user to grab a trunk line. Each of these codes relates to a group of trunks, which can be set differently for each station. For more details, please refer topic “ Trunk AccessGroups”.

Enter Programming Mode √

Cancel Auto Call Back √

Cancel All Features √Floor Service √

Room Clean √

DISA Login √Retrieve Parked Call √

Call Park √Override √

Auto Call Back √ √

Interrupt Request √

Barge-in √

Raid √

Toggle √3-Party Conference √

Back Ground Music √Selective Trunk Access √

Account Code √

Flashing on Trunk √Trunk to Trunk Transfer √



Matrix


Trunk Access-SelectiveThis is a code dialed by a station user to grab a particular trunk line. For more details, please refer topic “Trunk Access Groups”.

Features codesEternity supports programmable access codes for all the features. The feature codes are divided depending

upon the phase during which these codes are dialed viz. Dial phase feature code, Routing phase feature code,etc.

Dial Phase feature codesFollowing features are allowed from dial phase.

Feature Name Feature Access

Call Pick Up – General 0 4

Call Pick Up – Selective 1 12

Cancel Auto Call back 3 102

Redial 4 7

Auto Redial 5 17

Cancel Auto Redial 6 107

Personal Abbreviated Programming 7 108

Abbreviated Dialing 8 8

Operator Dialing 9 9

Call Forward/Call Follow Me 10 13

Dynamic Lock 11 14

Hot Line 12 15

Alarms 13 16

Do Not Disturb 14 18

24-Party Conference 22 19

Call Park 23 117

Retrieve Parked Call 24 118

Room Monitor 25 101

Last Caller Recall 26 112

Personal Alarm Message Record Code 27 116

Voice Help 28 110

Walk In Class of Service 29 111

Enter SE Mode 31 1091

Enter SA Mode 32 1092

Change User password 33 114Page Zone 34 103

DISA Log in Code 35 119

Floor Service Code 37 113

Room Clean Code 38 115

Cancel All Features 40 100

Direct Trunk Access Code 41 69

Flashing on Trunk 42 *



Matrix


Use following command to program the access code for dial phase features:4310-1-Featur e Number -Access Code -#

Where,Feature Number is a 3-digit number from 000 to 045.Access Code is a string of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Example 1: Let us interchange Call Pick Up-Selective and Redial codes4310-1-001-7-# (On giving this command, system gives error tone because ‘7’ is already used for redial. Hence before givingthis command, assign a dummy code for Call Pick Up-Selective. For example, assign code 2500 usingcommand 4310-1-001-2500 ) Now give following commands4310-1-001-7-# 4310-1-004-12-#

Example 2: Let us interchange Hot Line and Alarm codes4310-1-012-2501-# (dummy code is assigned)4310-1-012-16-# 4310-1-013-15-#

Routing phase featur es codes Following features are valid from the routing phase:

Please note that since only one feature is available from the routing phase, we can use any digit of our choice

as access code for this feature.

Use following command to program the access code for a routing phase feature:4310-1-Featur e Number -Access Code-# Where,Feature Number is a 3-digit number from 000 to 045.Access Code is a string of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Example: Let us change override access code to 2.4310-1-030 -2-#

Bl ocked phase feature codes Following features are valid from the blocked phase.

Change User Status 43 104

Account Code 44 106

Back Ground Music 45 1099

Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default)

Override 030 4


Auto Call Back (on busy) 002 2

Interrupt Request 015 3

Barige-In 016 4

Raid 017 5

Auto Call Back + Trunk Reservation 018 6



Matrix


Use following command to program the access code for a blocked phase feature:4310-1-Featur e Number -Access Code-# Where,Feature Number is a 3-digit number from 000 to 045.Access Code is a string of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Example: Let us change Barge-In access code to 9.4310-1-016-9-#.

Placed phase feature codes Following features are valid from the placed phase:

Please note that since only one feature is available from the placed phase, we can use any digit of our choiceas access code for this feature

Use following command to program the access code for a placed phase feature:

4310-1-Featur e Number -Access Code-# Where,Feature Number is a 3-digit number from 000 to 045.Access Code is a string of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Example: Let us change Auto Call Back access code to 14310-1-002-1-# Please note that the access code for Auto Call back-On Busy and Auto Call Back-On No Reply is same.

Matured phase feature codesFollowing features are valid from the matured phase:

Use following command to program the access code for a matured phase feature:4310-1-Featur e Number -Access Code-# Where,Feature Number is a 3-digit number from 000 to 045.Access Code is a string of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Example: Let us change Conference–3 Party access code to 5.4310-1-020-5-#

Use following command to take a print out of Access Codes:4300 (Please note that on giving this command all access codes including flexible numbers are printed. For simplicity, only the feature access codes are attached here. The printout of flexible numbers is attached with‘Flexible Numbers’).


Auto Call Back (No Reply) 002 2


Call Toggle 019 1

Conferece-3 Party 020 0

Trun to Trunk Transfer 021 8

Trunk Release Code in case of Trunk-

Trunk Speech036 #



Matrix


Use following command to clear the access code for a feature:4310-1-Feature Number-#

Use following command to clear the access code for a range of features:4310-2-Feature Number-Feature Number-#

Use following command to clear the access code for all features:4310-* -#

Use following command to assign default access codes for all features:4360-* -#

Relevant topic:1. Flexible Numbers



Matrix


=X=X=

FEATURE ACCESS CODES AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Feature Name Access Code

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Cancel All Features 100

Room Monitor 101

Cancel Auto Call Back 102

Page Zone 103

Call Forward/Follow Me 13Dynamic Lock 14

Hot Line 15

Alarms 16

Redial 7

Auto Redial 17

Cancel Auto Redial 107

Do Not Disturb 18

Conference 19

Personal Abbreviated Programming 108

Abbreviated Dialing 8

Enter Programming (System Engineer) 1#91

Enter Admin (System Administrator) 1#92

Voice Help 110

Walkin Class Of Service 111

Last Caller Recall 112Change User Password 114

Retrive Park Call 118

DISA Login 119

Selective Call Pickup 12

General Call Pickup 4

Operator Dialing 9

Floor Service 113

Room Clean 115

Room Status 105

Trunk Disconnection #

Call Park 117

Account Number 106

User Status 104

Back Ground Music 1099

Auto Call Back 2Interrupt Request 3

Barge-In 4

Raid 5

Trunk Reservation 6

Toggle 1

Three Party Conference 0

Trunk To Trunk Transfer 8

Override 4

Personal Alarm Message 116

Direct Trunk Access 69

Flashing On Trunk *

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Account Codes

What is this?Account Code is a unique number. This code can be assigned individually to each client. Maximum 10,000Account Codes are possible. Suppose an advertising firm is using Eternity. The firm has 50 clients. Firmmakes 1000 calls in a day, majority of which are for their clients only. These calls include calls made to other

parties for accomplishing the job of clients as well as to clients themselves. The firm wishes to find howmany calls it has made for or to Client X, Client Y and Client Z. Eternity helps the firm in analyzing this.

How to use it?Take a Paper Pad. Draw a table having two columns. Write down the names of all your clients in the firstcolumn and assign an account code to each of them in the second column. This code is of four digits from0000 to 9999. This list should be circulated to everybody in the organizations making outgoing calls for their clients.

Now when any user makes a call for client X or to client X, he should dial the account code for client X oncehe is in speech with client X. This is explained in steps below

If the caller has dialed a wrong account code, he can repeat the procedure. The system overwrites the lastaccount code.

The user can take the printout of the calls made for a particular client using this account code. The user should use filter command to get printout.

Relevant topic:1. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

=X=X=


2 Dial the outside telephone number Speech with called party

3 DialFlash Called party goes on hold. Caller gets feature tone

4 Dial 106-Account Code Speech with called party



Matrix


Alarms

The Eternity offers five different types of alarms satisfying most of the needs. They are:1. Duration Alarm2. Time Alarm3. Date and Time Alarm

4. Daily Alarm5. Remote Alarm

Duration AlarmWhat’s this?• You can ask the Eternity to remind you after some specific time.• On expiry of the set time, your station starts ringing.• When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message.

How to use it?

Minutes is from 01 to 99

Example:Dial 161-09 to set a reminder after 9 minutes.

Important points:• A station gets alarm ring for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer1 and is programmable.• If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Eternity gives ring to the operator station. The operator

station rings for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer2 and is programmable.• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for

this feature. Please refer “Voice Message Applications” for details.• Only one reminder can be set at a time on one station. The latest set alarm supersedes all the previous

timings.• All stations can set duration alarm for same duration simultaneously.• You can set all types of alarms simultaneously on the same station.• Time is in minutes from 01 to 99.• If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets ring when the station becomes free.• Please note that duration alarm may not be 100% accurate everytime.

Time AlarmWhat’s this?

• You can ask the Eternity to remind you at some specific time.• At the set time, your station starts ringing.• When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message.

How to use it?


2 Dial 161-Minutes Confirmation tone



2 Dial 162-Hours-Minutes Confirmation tone




Matrix


Example:Dial 162-1630 to set a reminder at 4.30 pm.

Important point:• A station gets alarm ring for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer1 and is programmable.• If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Eternity gives ring to the operator station. The operator

station rings for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer2 and is programmable.• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for this feature. Please refer “Voice Message Applications” for details.

• Only one time alarm can be set at a time on one station.• All stations can set time alarm for same time simultaneously.• You can set all types of alarms simultaneously.• Time is in 24-hour format i.e. 4.30 p.m. is 1630 hrs.• If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets alarm when it becomes free.

Daily AlarmWhat’s this?• You can ask the Eternity to remind you daily at some specific time.

• At the set time, your station starts ringing.• When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message.

How to use it?

Example:Dial 163-1230 to set a daily reminder for lunch at 12.30 pm.

Important points:

• A station gets alarm ring for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer1 and is programmable.• If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Eternity gives ring to the operator station. The operator

station rings for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer2 and is programmable.• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for

this feature. Please refer “Voice Message Applications” for details.• Only one daily alarm can be set at a time on one station. The latest set alarm supersedes the previous one.• All stations can set daily alarm for same time simultaneously.• Time is in has 24-hour format i.e. 6:30pm is 1830 hrs.• If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets alarm when the station becomes free.

Date and Time AlarmWhat’s this?• You can ask the Eternity to remind you on a specific date at a specific time.• At the set date and time, your station starts ringing.• When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message.

How to use it?


2 Dial 163-Hours-Minutes Confirmation tone



2 Dial 164-Date-Month-Year-Hour-Minute Confirmation tone




Matrix


Example:Dial 164-01-04-2002-11-00 to set a date and time reminder on 1st April at 11:00 am.

Important points:• A station gets alarm ring for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer1 and is programmable.• If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Eternity gives ring to the operator station. The operator

station rings for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer2 and is programmable.• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for this feature. Please refer “Voice Message Applications” for details.

• Only one date and time alarm can be set on one station. The latest set alarm supersedes the previous one.• All stations can set daily alarm for same time simultaneously.• Time is in has 24-hour format i.e. 6:30 pm is 1830 hrs. Date is from 01 to 31, Month is from 01 to 12 and

year is from 0000 to 9999.• If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets alarm when the station becomes free.

Remote AlarmWhat’s this?• You can set alarm for some other station from your station.

• At the set time, the station starts ringing.• When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message.

How to use it?

Example:To set a daily wake up alarm at 5.30 am on station 23 from station 26, dial 165-23-3-0530 from station 26

Important points:• A station gets alarm ring for 45 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer and is programmable.• If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Eternity gives ring to the operator station. The operator

station rings for 45 seconds. This is called Return Alarm Ring Timer and is programmable.• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for

this feature. Please “Voice Message Applications” for details.• Only one time alarm/duration alarm/daily alarm can be set at a time on one station. The last set alarm

supersedes all the previous timings.• You can set all types of alarms on a station simultaneously from any station.• Receptionists can use this feature to wake up their guests in hotels.• The return alarm ring will go to the operator and not on the station from where the alarm is set.• To cancel remote alarm for any station, dial 165-Station-0 . Station refers to the station on which remote

alarm was earlier set.• This feature can be used only if allowed from Class of Service.


2

Dial 165-Stati on-1-Minutes for duration alarm or

Dial 165-Stati on-2-Hours-Minutes for time alarm or

Dial 165-Stati on-3-Hours-Minutes for dail y alarm or

Dial 165-Stai on-4-Date-Month-Yesr-Hours-Mi nutes for date and time alarm

Dial 165-Stati on-0 (To cancel remote alarm)

Confirmation tone




Matrix


Record Message for AlarmsWhat’s this?• You can record a personal alarm voice message.• The system will play this message when you answer the alarm ring.• If no voice message is recorded, the Eternity plays music.

How to use it?

Example:Let us assume you have a lunch meeting with Bill Clinton on 1 st April 2002 at 1:00 pm. You have already setthe date and time alarm for this. You can record a message to remind you for what this alarm was set.Dial 116 , wait for the beeps to get over. Speak “Lunch meeting with Bill Clinton”. Replace the handset. On1st April 2002 you will get alarm ring. On replying the call, you will hear the message “ Lunch meeting with

Bill Clinton”

Important points:• A message can be recorded only if this feature is allowed from the Class Of Service (COS) programming.

Please refer topic “Class Of Service” for details.• A voice module must be spared for this application. Refer topic “Voice Message Applications” for more

details.

Cancel AlarmsWhat’s this?• You can ask the Eternity to cancel all the pending alarms.

How to use it?

Example:To cancel the alarms set on station 26, dial 160 from station 26.To cancel remote alarm set on station 26 from station 23, dial 165-26-0 from station 23.

Important points:• Dialing 160 from the station will cancel all the alarms set on that station. Suppose time alarm, duration

alarm and daily alarm all are set on station 23. Now, if you dial 160 from the station, all the alarms will becancelled.

Timers of relevance:Alarm Ring Timer1 – Time for which the station gets alarm ring.Command: 2801-Seconds Default: 45 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds


2 Dial 116 Confirmation tone for 2 seconds

3 Record your message after the beeps

4 Replace the handset on completion of message

1 Lift the handset on which the alarm is set Dial tone

2 Dial 160 Confirmation tone

3 Reaplce the handset



Matrix


Alarm Ring Timer2 – Time for which the operator station rings if alarm ring on the original station was notanswered.Command: 2802-Seconds Default: 45 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to enable Remote Alarm access to a user.

It is possible to get the Alarm Status Display and a printout of the Alarm Status for all the stations. For moredetails, please refer Eternity Hotel Software Manual.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Voice Message Applications3. Eternity Hotel Software Manual

=X=X=



Matrix


Allowed and Denied Lists

What’s this?Allowed list and Denied list is a group of number strings. Eternity uses these lists to support four differentfeatures viz. Toll Control, Dynamic Lock, Call Budget and Call Duration Control.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Toll Control:When the number is dialed from a station, the Eternity compares the dialed number string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Dynamic Lock:If the user locks the station and thereafter dials a number from his station, the Eternity compares the dialednumber string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list for the locked status.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Call Budget:If the call budget of the station exhausts and thereafter the station dials a number, the Eternity compares thedialed number string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list for the call budget exhaustedstatus.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Call Duration Control:If Call Duration Control feature is set on a station, the Eternity compares the dialed number string with the

number strings in allowed list and denied list for Call Duration Control (CDC) condition. The Eternitydisconnects the call if the number string dialed by the station matches with the denied list for CDC condition.

How it works?• Maximum 25 allowed lists could be formed.• Maximum 25 denied lists could be formed.• Maximum 16 entries (i.e. number strings) can be programmed in one allowed or one denied list.• Each entry (i.e. one number string) can have maximum of 16 digits.• Number string can be a complete telephone number, area code or few initial digits of a telephone number.



Matrix


• An allowed and a denied list should be assigned to each station depending upon the feature and therequirement.

• A completed allowed list would look as below:

• A completed denied list would look as below:

• Default Allowed Lists look as below:

• Default Denied Lists look as below:

Allowed list Number string Number string 1 ………… Number string 15

0 Max 16 digits Max 16 digits ………… Max 16 digits


2 Max 16 digits Max 16 digits ………… Max 16 digits … .

… .

… . …………

… .


Denied list Number string Number string 1 ………… Number string 15



2 Max 16 digits Max 16 digits ………… Max 16 digits … .

… .

… . …………

… .


0 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B B B B B B

2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B B B B B B

3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B B B

4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B B B5 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

.. B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

.. B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

24 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

Loc.

List12 13 144 5 6 70 1 2 3 158 9 10 11

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B * #

1 0 95 B B B B B B B B B B B B * #2 0 B B B B B B B B B B B B B * #

3 0 B B B B B B B B B B B B B * #

4 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B * #

5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B * #

.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B * #

.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B * #

24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B B B B * #

2 3 158 9 10 11Loc.

List12 13 144 5 6 70 1



Matrix


How to Program?Step 1: Take a pen and a paper and decide which number strings are to be programmed in allowed list and

the denied list.Step 2: Program the number strings in the allowed list using command 6301 .Step 3: Program the number strings in the denied list using command 6302 .Step 4: Print allowed list and denied list using 6300 .

Default Allowed Lists and Denied Lists are attached herewith for ready reference.

Step 1 Take a pen and a paper. Decide which of the above-mentioned four features are to be used. Make theallowed and denied lists accordingly.

Step 2Use following command to program numbers in the allowed list:6301-1- A ll owed L ist -Location I ndex-Number-# WhereAllowed list is from 00 to 24.Location Index is from 00 to 15. Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.

Step 3Use following command to program numbers in the denied list:6302-1-Denied L ist-Location I ndex-Number-# WhereDenied list is from 00 to 24.Location Index is from 00 to 15. Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.

Step 4Use following command to take a printout of allowed list and denied list:6300

Example1:Program Allowed List and Denied List for following constraints:Station 201 (software port number 000)1. Allow all local numbers and numbers starting with ‘95’ and ‘0’.2. Lock the station when the call budget gets exhausted. Only local calls should be allowed.3. Only local calls should be allowed in dynamic lock condition.4. All calls starting with ‘95’ and ‘0’ should get disconnected after 180 seconds

Solution:First examine the default lists.1. This condition can be fulfilled using default denied list 032. This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 013. This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 014. This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 01Since all the constraints can be satisfied with default lists then there is no need to program these lists.

Example2:Program Allowed List and Denied List for following constraints:Station 201 (software port number 000)



Matrix


1. Allow all local numbers and numbers starting with ‘95’ and ‘0’.2. Lock the station when the call budget gets exhausted. Only local calls should be allowed.3. Only local calls should be allowed in dynamic lock condition.4. Disconnect all calls starting with ‘0’ after 180 seconds except calls starting with ‘022’.

Solution:

First examine the default lists.1. This condition can be fulfilled using default denied list 032. This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 013. This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 014. In this case default allowed list 02 could be used (since it contains 0). However an allowed list should be

programmed to program 022 in allowed list.

Use following command to program 022 in allowed list 046301-1-04-00-022-#

Wild CardsRange commands

Default commands

Relevant topics:1. Toll Control2. Dynamic Lock 3. Call Budget4. Call Duration Control

Program the number string in an allowed list 6301-1-Al l owed Li st-L ocati on Index

–Number-#

Program the same number string in a range of allowed list 6301-2-Al l owed L ist-A l lowed L ist-Location

Index-Number-#

Program the same number string in all the allowed lists 6301-* -Locati on Index-Number-#

Program the number string in a denied list 6302-1-Denied List-L ocation I ndex

–Number-#

Program the same number string in a range of denied list 6302-2-Denied Li st-Deni ed L ist-Location

Index-Number-#

Program the same number string in all the denied lists 6302-* -Locati on Index-Number-#

Default all numbers in an allowed list. 1901-1- Al lowed L ist-#

Default all numbers in range of allowed lists. 1901-2- Al lowed L ist-Al l owed L ist-#

Default all numbers in all allowed lists. 1901-* -#

Default all numbers in a denied list. 1951-1-Denied L ist-#

Default all numbers in range of denied lists. 1951-2-Deni ed L ist-Deni ed L i st-#

Default all numbers in all denied lists. 1951-* -#



Matrix


TOLL CONTROL ALLOWED LISTS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List Index Numbers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

01 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,404-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 , , ,

12-15: , , ,

02 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 , , ,

12-15: , , ,

03 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , , ,

04 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , , ,05 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

06 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

07 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

08 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,12-15: , , ,

09 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

10 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

11 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

12 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


TOLL CONTROL ALLOWED LISTS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List Index Numbers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

13 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

14 00-03: , , ,04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

15 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

16 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

17 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,18 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

19 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

20 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

21 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,12-15: , , ,

22 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

23 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

24 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , , ,

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


TOLL CONTROL DENIED LISTS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List Index Numbers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

01 00-03: 0 ,95 , ,04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

02 00-03: 0 , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

03 00-03: 00 , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

04 00-03: , , ,

04-07: , , ,

08-11: , , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#05 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

06 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

07 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

08 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,12-15: , ,* ,#

09 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

10 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

11 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

12 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,808-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


TOLL CONTROL DENIED LISTS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List Index Numbers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

13 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

14 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,404-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

15 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

16 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

17 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#18 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

19 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

20 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

21 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,12-15: , ,* ,#

22 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

23 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

24 00-03: 1 ,2 ,3 ,4

04-07: 5 ,6 ,7 ,8

08-11: 9 ,0 , ,

12-15: , ,* ,#

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Auto Call Back

Auto Call Back - On BusyWhat’s this?• You need not keep dialing busy station repeatedly.• You can request Auto Call Back by dialing ‘2’ when you get busy tone.

• When the requested station becomes free it rings. Simultaneously your station also starts ringing.• Whosoever answers first gets ring-back tone. The other end keeps ringing.• Once the ring is answered, ring-back tone stops and speech is established.• You can request Auto Call Back on busy SLT or DKP.• You can also request Auto Call Back on busy trunk. As soon as the trunk becomes free you get ring. When

you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone and you can start dialing desired number.

How to use it?

If you don’t answer the Auto Call Back ring, it stops after 30 seconds and Auto Call Back request getscleared. This is called Auto Call Back Ring Timer and is programmable.

Cancel Auto Call Back – On Busy

Example:Station 23 is busy. To enable Auto Call Back, dial 2.If you have wrongly dialed 23 and disable Auto Call Back, dial 102 to cancel it.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Call Back-On Busy to a user.

Important points:• Only one ACB – On Busy request is entertained at a time.• ACB – On Busy and ACB – On No Reply (explained below) can be used simultaneously.• The last ACB request supersedes all other previous ACB requests.

Auto Call Back - On No ReplyWhat’s this?• You need not keep trying “no-reply” station repeatedly.• You can ask the Eternity to inform you whenever the requested person returns to his desk and lifts his

handset.• You will get ring as if he has dialed your station and that station will get ring back tone. Once you answer

the ring, speech is established.


2 DialNumber Busy tone

3 Dial2 Confirmation tone







Matrix


How to use it?

Cancel Auto Call Back – No Reply

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Call Back-On No Reply to a user.

Important points:• Only one ACB – On No Reply request is entertained at a time.• ACB – On Busy and ACB – On No Reply (explained above) can be used simultaneously.• The last ACB request supersedes all other previous ACB requests.

Timer of relevance:Auto Call Back Ring Timer – Time after which the Auto Call Back ring on the station stops.Command: 3001-Seconds Default: 30 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

Relevant topic:1. Class Of Service (COS)

=X=X=


2 DialNumber Ring back tone






Matrix


Auto Redial

What’s this?• The Eternity helps you to get through a busy external number by dialing the number repeatedly.• Many times when we make a call, we find that the called person is busy. Hence we have to try the same

number again and again to contact him. This is very frustrating and time-consuming. Auto Redial rescues

us from this sheer wastage of time. You need not keep trying busy number repeatedly. You can ask theEternity to keep trying the number. The Eternity will give you ring when the call goes through.

How to use it?

Example:Dialed number 0265-630555 is busy. To use auto redial feature, disconnect and dial 17 .

Important points:• Two types of auto redial are possible - Low priority and High priority.• Generally the system should be programmed in such a manner that in low priority type the number of trials

made by the system (count) is less and the time gap between two trials (timer) is more.• Whereas, in high priority type the number of trials (count) is more and the time gap between two trials

(timer) is less.• Only one number can be requested for Auto Redial at a time from one station.• More than one station can attempt auto redial simultaneously.• If the system detects busy tone it releases the trunk and redials the number after some time.• If the system does not detect ring-back tone for 60 seconds, it releases the trunk and tries after some time.

This is known as Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer and is programmable.• If the system detects ring-back tone, it gives ring on your station. When you lift the handset, you get

connected with the desired party.• The system uses the same trunk access group you used. If you dialed the number on group code 60, the

system takes one of the free trunks from group code 60 for auto redial.• If the number was dialed using selective trunk access at the first time then system will use the same trunk

while executing Auto Redial.• Auto-redial will suspend if there is any activity (ringing/ speech/ dialing) on your station. It resumes as

soon as your station becomes free.

CAUTIONAuto-Redial does not work in following cases:• The trunk lines do not support standard tones. Frequency and timings are critical for Auto Redial to work.• Trunk condition is poor and various tones cannot be detected properly.• Called party lifts within 3 seconds after the ring starts on his phone.


2 Dial Trunk Access Code Trunk dial tone


4 Disconnect






Matrix


To cancel Auto Redial

Example:

Dialed number 0265-630555 was busy. Auto Redial was requested. Meanwhile, the person for whom you setAuto Redial calls you. Now you do not want to talk to him again. Dial 107 from your station.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Redial to a user. It is possible to assign low priority or high priority to the user.

Low Priority Auto RedialUse following command to program time duration between two trials:2204-Seconds Default time is 45 seconds. This time could be set from 000 to 255 secondsUse following command to program the number of trials:

2205-Count Default count is 5. Count could be set from 000 to 255.

High Priority Auto RedialUse following command to program time duration between two trials:2206-Seconds Default time is 20 seconds. This time could be set from 000 to 255 secondsUse following command to program the number of trials:2207-Count Default count is 20. Count could be set from 000 to 255.

Timers of relevance:

Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer – Time for which Eternity waits to sense the dial tone from the PSTN.Command: 2201-Seconds Default: 3 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer – Time for which Eternity waits to sense RBT from the PSTN after dialingthe requested number.Command: 2202-Seconds Default: 60 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

Auto Redial Ring Timer – Time for which the station that has requested Auto Redial rings in case of Autoredial call.Command: 2203-Seconds Default: 45 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds


=X=X=






Matrix


Background Music (BGM)

What’s this?The stations having DKP can listen to sweet background music.

How to use it?

To deactivate Back Ground Music

Important points:• The volume of back ground music can be controlled using the Volume key of the DKP.• Internal Music of either of the four types or external music to be played can be selected.

• When an incoming calls comes on the station the background music automatically stops and the DKPrings.

• While making an outgoing call, when the user presses speaker key or goes off-hook the background stopsand the user gets system dial tone.

• When any activity is done on the DKP the Back Ground Music stops. When the station user goes on-hook,the Back Ground Music starts again.

How to program?Refer ‘Music on Hold’ for more details.

Relevant topic:1. Music on Hold (MOH)

=X=X=

1 Dial1099 Confirmation tone2 Press 'SPK' key Background Music

1 Dial1099 Confirnation tone

2 Press 'SPK' key Background Music stops



Matrix


Barge-In

What’s this?• When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his

conversation after intimating him.• While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for 10 seconds. This timer is called

Barge-In timer. This timer is programmable.• During the beeps, the called person can dial ‘Flash ’ to answer your call.• If the called party does not respond during these 10 seconds, caller forcefully gets connected with the

called person. The third party is put on hold, gets music, and hence cannot listen to your conversation.• Disconnect once your talk is over. This will automatically restore the original talk of the called person with

the held-up party.

How to use it?

Important points:• Barge-In can be used only if it is allowed in the user’s Class Of Service (COS).• Barge-In works even when the destination is talking on the trunk line.• Barge-In works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.• Barge-In is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Barge-In.• Barge-In can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a

busy station after putting the calling party in hold and barging-in on the busy destination to inform himabout his call. This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Barge-In to a user.

Timer of relevance:Barge-In Timer – Time after which the caller gets connected to the called party.Command: 3003-Seconds Default: 10 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Privacy

=X=X=



3 Dial4 Ring back tone.

The called person gets beeps

4The system connects you to the destination after

10 seconds. Start talking after the music stops

5 Replace the handset on completion of talk



Matrix


Behind the PBX Applications

What’s this?Many times, small and medium range PBX systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Suchapplications are used mainly to expand the existing capacity of the big PBX already in use. Stations (SLT)coming from the big PBX are used as trunks of the small PBX. There could also be some PSTN trunks

coming directly on the smaller PBX. Such configurations are known as ‘Behind the PBX’ application.

In such situations, it is not easy to implement toll control restrictions.Consider a simple eventStation 21 of PBX B in the figure above is not given long distance dialing facility. It has access to all thetrunks. Now when he wants to use T4, T5 or T6, which are directly coming from PSTN, he dials ‘0’. He getsPSTN dial tone and dials the number.But when he does similar procedure on T1, T2 or T3, he gets error tone. Because, in this case when station21 grabs T1 by dialing a code, he gets dial tone of the PBX A. Now when he again dials ‘0’ to grab PSTNdial tone, PBX understands it to be a long distance call and since station 21 is not allowed long distancecalls, the system rejects dialing on trunk and gives error tone to station A.

Hence now if station 21 of PBX B is to be allowed external dialing through T1, T2 and T3, he should begiven long distance dialing access. If this is done then station 21 may make long distance calls on T4, T5 andT6.

The Eternity solves this problem by providing programmable PBX Expansion count for each trunk. Thiscount is the number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is begun. The PBX Expansion count issame as the number of PBX connected between the main the PBX and the last subscriber.In the figure shown, the PBX Expansion count of T1, T2 and T3 should be kept 1 and for T4, T5 and T6, itshould be kept ‘0’.



Matrix


CAUTIONFor all normal applications, keep this PBX Expansion count to 0 for all the trunks. Otherwise, outsidedialing may be hampered. LCR and SMDR will also be affected.

The Eternity supports PBX Expansion count for each trunk.

How to program?Use following command to program PBX Expansion Count for a trunk:

5001-1-Trunk-PEC Count Where,Trunk = Trunk software port number from 000 to 127PEC Count = PBX Expansion Count from 0 to 9Default count for all trunks is 0.

Example:Program PBX Expansion Count = 1 for trunk port 015.5001-1-015-1


Default commands

(Default PEC count is 0)

=X=X=

Trunk Port PBX Expansion count

0 01 0

2 0

… …

… …

… …

127 0

Program PBX Expansion Count for a trunk 5001-1-Trunk-PEC Count

Program PBX Expansion Count for a range of trunks 5001-2-Trunk-Trunk-PEC Count

Program PBX Expansion Count for all trunks 5001-* -PEC Count

Program PBX Expansion Count for a trunk 5001-1-Trunk-#

Program PBX Expansion Count for a range of trunks 5001-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Program PBX Expansion Count for all trunks 5001-* -#



Matrix


Boss Ring

What’s this?This feature helps the user to identify the caller. Eternity offers 10 different types of rings. Hence it is possible to identify a class of caller by assigning him a different type of ringing pattern.

The system engineer can program the system to give triple ring, when a station with higher priority calls astation with lower priority. In an organization a person with higher hierarchical level should be given higher priority and appropriate ring type should be defined for him.

Relevant topic:1. Distinctive Rings

=X=X=



Matrix


Call Budget

What’s this?The total cost of calls made by a station can be controlled using this facility.

To prevent misuse of long distance dialing facility, Eternity provides Toll control facility and Class Of

Service (COS) programming for different time zones. But, sometimes you cannot simply defy long distancedialing for people who need to make such calls as part of their job. It makes more sense to limit their bill to acertain fixed limit. It is desirable that this limit is in terms of amount. The system allows the user to makecalls freely as long as he does not cross his limit. Once he crosses his limit, his station is locked by thesystem. This facility is called Call Budget.

How it works?The flow chart given below explains the Call Budget logic.

Start

Station makes an

outgoing calls

Is call budgeting

enabled on the

station ?System goes on

the next process

End

Is current call budget

amount of the station greater

then or equal to alloted call

budget amount for the at

station

No

Yes

System allows the station to make

calls as per the call budget allowed

and denied lists assigned to it

End

System allows the station to

make calls as per the toll

control allowed and denied list

On completion of the call

system adds the call amount to

the station's account

End



Matrix


How to program?Step 1: Enable Call Budget on a station using COS commandStep 2: Assign Call Budget amount to desired SLTsStep 3: Assign Call Budget amount to desired DKPsStep 4: Assign Allowed List to SLTStep 5: Assign Denied List to SLT

Step 6: Assign Allowed List to DKPStep 7: Assign Denied List to DKP

Step 1Use COS commands to enable Call Budget

Step 2Use following command to assign Call Budget to the SLT station:3901-1-SLT-Amount Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255Amount is the Call Budget in rupees. Amount can be from 0000 to 9999.

Step 3Use following command to assign Call Budget to the DKP station:3902-1-DKP-Amount Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127Amount is the Call Budget in rupees. Amount can be from 0001 to 9999.

Step 4Use following command to assign Allowed List to the SLT station:3903-1-SLT-Al lowed li st Where,

SLT is the software port number of the SLT User.Allowed list is the toll control to be assigned to the station once the budget amount gets exhausted.

Step 5Use following command to assign Denied List to the SLT station:3904-1-SLT-Denied L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT User.Denied list is the toll control to be assigned to the station once the budget amount gets exhausted.

Step 6Use following command to assign Allowed List to the DKP station:3905-1-DKP-A ll owed li st Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP User.Allowed list is the toll control to be assigned to the station once the budget amount gets exhausted.

Step 7Use following command to assign Denied List to the DKP station:3906-1-DKP-Denied L ist Where,



Matrix


DKP is the software port number of the DKP User.Denied list is the toll control to be assigned to the station once the budget amount gets exhausted.

Example:Let us assign a call budget of Rs.5000/- to DKP station 2001 (S/w port 008). Once the station user crossesthe limit, his Allowed list should be 00 and Denied List should be 02

Allow Call Budget from COS group3902-1-008-5000 3905-1-008-00 3906-1-008-02

Important points:• Call Budget can be enabled on all the stations as well as on selected stations.• By default, Call Budget is disabled on all the stations.• Each station can be assigned different amount depending on the requirement.• The assigned budget is for one month.• If the budget exceeds anytime during the month, the system locks the station till month end.• Once locked, the station user depending on its toll control group can make calls, till 1st of the next month.

• From the 1st

of the next month, the system allows the station user to make calls.• It is also possible to increase the budget amount before the amount is exceeded. Now, new calls will be

allowed till fresh budget gets exhausted.• Call Budget facility is based on cost of each call. Hence the system must be programmed properly with all

the SMDR parameters and long distance codes. Errors in calculation of call cost can lead to malfunction of Call Budget.

• A current call does not get disconnected if the budget gets exhausted during the call. However, station user cannot make calls thereafter.

• The cost of the call is added to the station’s account on completion of the call.


Assign Call Budget to a SLT 3901-1-SLT-Amount

Assign Call Budget to a range of SLTs 3901-2-SLT-SLT -Amount

Assign Call Budget to all SLTs 3901-* -Amount

Assign Call Budget to a DKP 3902-1-DKP-Amount

Assign Call Budget to a range of DKPs 3902-2-DKP-DKP -Amount

Assign Call Budget to all DKPs 3902-* -Amount

Assign Allowed list to a SLT 3903-1-SLT-A l lowed li st

Assign Allowed list to a range of SLTs 3903-2-SLT-SLT -A l l owed li st

Assign Allowed list to all SLTs 3903-* -Al l owed l ist

Assign Denied list to a SLT 3904-1-SLT-Deni ed L i st

Assign Denied list to a range of SLTs 3904-2-SLT-SLT -Denied L ist Assign Denied list to all SLTs 3904-* -Deni ed Li st

Assign Allowed list to a DKP 3905-1-DKP-Al lowed l i st

Assign Allowed list to a range of DKPs 3905-2-DKP-DKP -Al l owed l i st

Assign Allowed list to all DKPs 3905-* -Al l owed l ist

Assign Denied list to a DKP 3906-1-DKP –Deni ed L ist

Assign Denied list to a range of DKPs 3906-2-DKP-DKP -Deni ed L ist

Assign Denied list to all DKPs 3906-* -Deni ed Li st



Matrix


Default commands

Relevant topics:1. Allowed Lists and Denied Lists2. SMDR 3. Class of Service

=X=X=

Assign default Call Budget amount to a SLT 3901-1-SLT-#

Assign default Call Budget to a range of SLTs 3901-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default Call Budget to all SLTs 3901-* -#

Assign default Call Budget amount to a DKP 3902-1-DKP-#

Assign default Call Budget to a range of DKPs 3902-2-DKP-DKP -# Assign default Call Budget to all DKPs 3902-* -#

Assign default Allowed list to a SLT 3903-1-SLT-#

Assign default Allowed list to a range of SLTs 3903-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default Allowed list to all SLTs 3903-* -#

Assign default Denied list to a SLT 3904-1-SLT-#

Assign default Denied list to a range of SLTs 3904-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default Denied list to all SLTs 3904-* -#

Assign default Allowed list to a DKP 3905-1-DKP-#

Assign default Allowed list to a range of DKPs 3905-2-DKP-DKP -#

Assign default Allowed list to all DKPs 3905-* -# Assign default Denied list to a DKP 3906-1-DKP-#

Assign default Denied list to a range of DKPs 3906-2-DKP-DKP -#

Assign default Denied list to all DKPs 3906-* -#



Matrix


Call Cost Calculation (CCC)

What’s this?The Eternity can calculate the actual cost in amount for the calls made by the station. The cost calculation isdone at the time of printing of reports. The cost is not calculated and stored at the time of the call. The costof a call depends on:

1. Number dialed i.e. local, long distance, international etc.2. Time and day when the call was made i.e. daytime, nighttime, holiday etc.3. Duration of the call.

How it works?Few parameters should be programmed to get the exact cost of the call.Cost of call = (Unit charge X Call Units) + Service charge.

How to program CCC parameters?Step 1: Program the Unit charge using command 3801.Step 2: Program the Service charge type using command 3802 Step 3: Program the Service charge using command 3803.

Step 4: Program the percentage if percentage wise service charge is selected using command 3804.Step 5: Take a pen and a piece of paper and make a timetable of the day depending upon the pulse rates

provided by your service provider. Program the timings of these time zones using command 3805.Step 6: Program the pulse rates for normal days as well as holidays using command 3806 and 3807.Step 7: Program the area code table with corresponding pulse rates using command 3808.Step 8: Delete a wrong entry in the area code table using command 3809.Step 9: Delete complete area code table using command 3810.Step 10: Program the days and the date when holiday rates are to be used using command 3811 and 3812.Step 11: Take print out of area code table using command 3800-2.Step 12: Take print out of all the CCC parameters using command 3800-1.

CommandsStep 1Unit ChargeThis is a programmable parameter and hence can be set at desired value.Use following command to program the unit charge:3801-RRRR Where,RRRR is the unit charge amount in XX.XX format in any currency.By defaul t, unit charge to Rs.1.10.

Example1:Let us program unit charge to Rs.1.50.

3801-0150

Example2:Let us program unit charge to US$0.75.3801-0075

Step 2Service ChargeThere are three options for service charges:



Matrix


1. Fixed Service Charge: A fixed amount is added as service charge to each call regardless of the cost of thatcall. This service charge amount is programmable.

2. Unit wise Service charge: Service charge is added to each unit of the call. Suppose a call worth 10 unitswas made then the service charge will also be charged 10 times instead of once as it is done in case of fixed service charge.

3. Percentage wise service charge: A percent of the cost of the call can be added as a service charge for that

call. This percent is programmable.

Use following command to select service charge type:3802-Service charge Type Where,

By default, f ixed service charge is the service charge type

Step 3Use following command to program service charge:3803-RRRR Where,RRRR is the service charge amount in XX.XX format in any currency.By default , Service charge is Rs.2.00.

Example1Let us program the service charge to Rs.2.00.3803-0200

Example2

Let us program the service charge to US$1.75.3803-0175

Step 4Use following command to set the percentage if the service charge is selected based on the percentage:3804-PPP Where,PPP is the percentage from 000 to 100.By default , percentage is 005

Example:Let us set the percentage to 10% of the cost of each call.3804-010

Call UnitsThis variable is derived from the pulse rate and duration of the call as follows:Units = (Call Duration in seconds) / (Pulse rate in seconds)

System finds the call duration with the help of in-built RTC and pulse rates from the pulse rate table programmed by the SE.

Service Charge Type Meaning

0 Fixed Service Charge

1 Unit wise Service Charge

2 Percentage wise Service Charge



Matrix


Pulse rate is determined from the time in which the call (time zone table) and the area where the call is made(area code table)

Step 5Time ZonesSince different pulse rates are applicable during different time of the day, time zones should be programmed.

There are maximum 10 time zones possible for call cost calculation (CCC). Different pulse rates can be programmed for each time zone. Time zone tables look like:

CCC Time Zone Table

Use following command to program a time zone in the CCC Time Zone Table:3805-Time Zone I ndex-Start Time-End Time Where,Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9.Start Time and End Time are to be specified in hours and minutes in the 24-hour format.

Use following command to set the time zone table to default timings:

3805-#

Default time zones are given in the following table:

To program time zone table properly, please do the following:• Find the time zones for long distance national calls• Find the time zones for international calls

Time Zone Index Start Time End Time

0 HH:MM HH:MM

2 HH:MM HH:MM

3 HH:MM HH:MM

4 HH:MM HH:MM

5 HH:MM HH:MM

6 HH:MM HH:MM

7 HH:MM HH:MM

8 HH:MM HH:MM

9 HH:MM HH:MM


0 00:00 06:00

1 06:00 08:00

2 08:00 09:00

3 09:00 11:00

4 11:00 18:00

5 18:00 19:00

6 19:00 20:007 20:00 22:00

8 22:00 00:00

9 00:00 00:00



Matrix


• Divide the day according to above time zones• For example, we have two time zones for long distance national calls viz. 09.00 to 20.00 and 20.00 to

09.00. One of the timings for international time zones is 06.00 to 09.00, 09.00 to 11.00, 11.00 to 18.00,18.00 to 23.00 and 23.00 to 06.00. Now we can divide the day as per these timings.Time Zone 1: 06.00 to 09.00Time Zone 2: 09.00 to 11.00

Time Zone 3: 11.00 to 18.00Time Zone 4: 18.00 to 20.00Time Zone 5: 20.00 to 23.00Time Zone 6: 23.00 to 06.00

• Now program the table as per these timings.Use following commands to program time zones in the time zone table:3805-0-0600-0900 3805-1-0900-1100 3805-2-1100-1800 3805-3-1800-2000 3805-4-2000-2300 3805-5-2300-0600

Completed time zone table would look as below:

Example:Let us program following time zones in the time zone tableCCC Time Zone Table

Zone Start Time End Time

0 06:00 09:00

1 09:00 11:00

2 11:00 18:00

3 18:00 20:00

4 20:00 23:00

5 23:00 06:00

6 00:00 00:00

7 00:00 00:008 00:00 00:00

9 00:00 00:00

Zone Start Time End Time

0 06:00 20:00

1 20:00 06:00

2 08:00 18:003 18:00 08:00

4 -- --

5 -- --

6 -- --

7 -- --

8 -- --

9 -- --



Matrix


Use following commands:3805-0-0600-2000 3805-1-2000-0600 3805-2-0800-1800 3805-3-1800-0800

Step 6Pulse Rate TablesThis table gives pulse rates for different time zones. Pulse rate is in four-digit XXX.X format. The decimal point is implicit and assumed after the first three digits. This table looks like:

Normal Pulse Rate Table

Use following command to program a pulse-rate type for normal days:3806-Pul se rate type-Time Zone I ndex-Pulse rate Where,Pulse Rate Type is from 00 to 15.Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9.Pulse Rate is in XXX.X format.

Use following command to load default normal pulse rate table:3806-#

Default normal pulse rate table is shown below:

Pulse Rate Type Time Zone 0 Time Zone 1 …… Time Zone 9

00 RRRR RRRR …… RRRR




04 RRRR RRRR …… RRRR 05 RRRR RRRR …… RRRR













Matrix


Separate pulse rate table is used for holidays. This allows total Flexibility of rates for holidays.

Holiday Pulse Rate Table

Use following command to program a pulse-rate type for holidays:3807-Pul se rate type-Time Zone I ndex-Pulse rate Where,Pulse rate type is from 00 to 15Time Zone Index from 0 to 9.Pulse rate is in XXX.X format.

PRT TZ0 TZ1 TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 TZ5 TZ6 TZ7 TZ8 TZ9

00 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0

01 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0

02 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0

03 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0

04 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.005 30.0 30.0 30.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

06 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

07 3.3 3.3 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

08 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1

09 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

10 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1

11 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

12 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

13 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

14 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

15 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0















13 RRRR RRRR …… RRRR 14 RRRR RRRR …… RRRR




Matrix


Example:Let us program following pulse rate types for different time zones for a normal day.

Use following command to load default holiday pulse rate table:3807-#

Default holiday pulse rate table is shown below:


00 180 180 …… --

01 72 72 …… --

02 48 72 …… --03 36 72 …… --

04 24 48 …… --

05 …… --

06 …… --

07 …… --

08 …… --

09 …… --

10 …… --

11 …… --

12 …… --13 …… --

14 …… --

15 …… --

PRT TZ0 TZ1 TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 TZ5 TZ6 TZ7 TZ8 TZ9

00 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.001 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0

02 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0

03 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0

04 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

05 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

06 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

07 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

08 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1

09 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

10 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.111 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

12 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

13 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

14 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

15 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0



Matrix


Use following commands:3807-00-0-1800 3807-00-1-1800 3807-01-0-0720 3807-01-1-0720 3807-02-0-0480

3807-02-1-0720 3807-03-0-0360 3807-03-1-0720 3807-04-0-0240 3807-04-1-0480

Area Code TableThe pulse rate of a call depends on the destination number dialed. Generally, pulse rate varies depending onthe distance. Different destination locations can have different pulse rates depending on the distance from thecaller. Hence pulses rates can vary with different area codes.

The Eternity supports programming of pulse rates for different area codes. This table is known as Area Code

table and looks like:

Maximum 500 entries are provided in the area code table.

At the time of calculating cost of a call, the Eternity performs following steps:1. Search for the best fitting area code2. Get pulse rate type from the area code table.3. Get the applicable pulse rate using the pulse rate type, day & time of the call.4. Calculate the cost of the call using the pulse rate and durations.In case the dialed number does not match with any of the area code table entries, pulse rate type 00 is used asa default.

This pulse rate table is retained even during power failure conditions. The Area Code table can be printed or can be downloaded on a computer for reference.

Destination Location Area Code Pulse Rate Type

USA 001 15

Japan 0071 14

Singapore 00 13

Sri Lanka 0 12

Kolkata and Estern region 03 08

New Delhi 011 08

Southern Region 04 08

Mumbai 022 06

Rajkot 0281 05Waghodia 952668 04

Halol 95 03

Surat 95261 04

Ahmedabad 9579 00



Matrix


How to Compress Area codes?To program the area code table, we need all the area codes with applicable pulse rates. This information can be obtained from the local PSTN service provider. Many telephone directions also publish this information.Once you have all the area codes with pulse rates, follow given steps to compress this information so that itfits the area code table provided in the system:• Sort the area codes in increasing order. Write applicable rates codes against each area code.

• Select area codes having common digits (2,3, 4 or more) with same pulse rate.• Select this group of codes and find out maximum common digits.• Use this truncated area code as a common area code for all the area codes in the group.• Program this common area code with the common pulse rate for the whole group.• Repeat this procedure to find out other such groups with common pulse rates.• The codes, which do not belong to any group, should be entered individually as separate entries.• Usually, area codes of places in the remote area from your city can be compressed in one common code.

Example 1:Assume following entries in the sorted, uncompressed area code table.

Note that all the above area codes have some pulse rates. Hence it is possible to compress them to one code:011. You can program this code with the common pulse rate 3-6-9-12. Thus, one entry in the system areacode table will cover 10 entries.

Example 2:

Area Code Pulse Rate

0111 3-6-9-12

0112 3-6-9-12

0113 3-6-9-12

0114 3-6-9-12

0115 3-6-9-12

0116 3-6-9-12

0117 3-6-9-12

0118 3-6-9-12

0119 3-6-9-12

0110 3-6-9-12


0131 3-6-9-12

0132 3-6-9-12

0133 3-6-9-12

0134 3-6-9-12

0135 3-6-9-120136 3-6-9-12

01372 3-6-9-12

01374 2-4-6-8

01376 2-4-6-8

0138 3-6-9-12

0139 3-6-9-12



Matrix


In the above table, two pulse rates are different from others. You can program a common entry for area code013. And the exceptions can be entered separately as under:

Step 7How to Program Area codes?Use following command to program a pulse rate for an area code:3808-Ar ea Code -Pul se Rate Type-# Where,Area code is a number string of maximum 7 digits.Pulse rate type is from 00 to 15

Example:Program Mumbai area code 022 with pulse rate type 05.

3808-022-05-#

Step 8Use following command to delete a single entry from the table:3809-Area Code-#

Example:To delete the area code for Mumbai, user following command:3809-022-#

Step 9Use following command to delete the complete Area Code Table:

3810-Reverse SE password

Example:To delete the area code table use command:3810-4321

Holidays, Weekly offs and special datesStep 10Use following command to program a weekly off:3811-Day-Code Where,Day is as per following table


013 3-6-9-12

01374 2-4-6-8

01376 2-4-6-8

Holiday Index Day

1 Sunday

2 Monday

3 Tuesday

4 Wednesday

5 Thursday

6 Friday

7 Saturday



Matrix


If Sunday is programmed as holiday then holiday pulse rates will be applicable.By defaul t, Sunday is programmed as hol iday.

Use following command to program a special date:3812-Holidate index-Date-Month Where,Index is from 0 to 4 (Five dates can be programmed)Date is from 01 to 31Month is from 01 to 12If no date is to be programmed then use command 3812- index-#.By default three dates viz. 26 th January, 15 th August and 2 nd October are programmed.

Example:To program 1st May as use following command:

3812-1-01-05

Step 11Use following command to take the printout of the area code table and file it for future reference:3800-2

Step 12Use following command to take a printout of all CCC parameters:3800-1

Code Meaning

0 Not a Holiday

1 Holiday



Matrix


AREA CODE TABLE AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SR. CODE TYPE SR. CODE TYPE SR. CODE TYPE SR. CODE TYPE

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


CALL COST CALCULATION PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:02

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time Zone 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

START TIME 00:00 06:00 08:00 09:00 11:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 22:00 00:00

END TIME 06:00 08:00 09:00 11:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 22:00 23:59 00:00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Type PULSE RATES FOR NORMAL DAYS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------00 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0

01 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0

02 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0

03 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0

04 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

05 30.0 30.0 30.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

06 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

07 3.3 3.3 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

08 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1

09 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

10 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1

11 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

12 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

13 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

14 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.015 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PULSE RATES FOR HOLIDAYS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0

01 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0 300.0

02 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0 90.0

03 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0

04 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

05 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

06 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

07 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

08 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1

09 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

10 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.111 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

12 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

13 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

14 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

15 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Holiday Rate On/Off Week Days Wise : Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Holiday Dates : 1 2 3 4 5

26-01-2002 15-08-2002 02-10-2002 - -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Unit Charge Amount : 1.10 Service Charge Amount : 2.00

Service Charge Type : Fixed Service Charge

Percentage : --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Eternity V1R1 Page :01

=X=X=



Matrix


Call Duration Control

What’s this?Call Duration Control (CDC) helps the customer to restrict the duration of the calls whether internal,incoming or outgoing external calls. This feature disconnects internal, incoming or outgoing external callsafter a set time.

People tend to talk about sports, movies, politics and such other subjects over telephone. Now, these topicsare generally not related to business. Moreover, such topics tend to take more time than the business talk for which the call was originally made. If duration of each call can be restricted, people will talk to the point andnot drift to other unproductive talk. There are many advantages:• Reduction in telephone bills.• Trunks will be easily available for other outgoing calls. More business calls can be made during working

hours leading to more business.• Your trunks remain free for incoming calls. More customers can call.• People spend more time on the actual job on hand rather than on telephone. This means increased

productivity.

How it works?

• Eternity uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature.• When a call is made, the Eternity compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings

in Allowed List and Denied List.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Eternity

treats CDC to be OFF and does not disconnect the call.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Eternity

treats CDC to be ON and disconnects the call after CDC timer (Provided CDC Disconnection flag isenabled)

• If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list thenallowed list is given priority and Eternity treats CDC to be OFF.

• The Eternity gives warning beep to the user on expiry of the CDC timer. The call continues for another 20seconds after the beep and gets disconnected if the disconnection flag is enabled. This timer is fixed.

• If the disconnection flag is disabled then the system does not disconnect the call but reloads the CDC timeragain. The system gives warning beeps every time the CDC timer is matured. This helps the user to knowthe duration for which he has been talking.

How to use it?• Call Duration Control can be set for each station.• Call Duration Control for Internal calls can be enabled/disabled.• Call Duration Control for Incoming calls can be enabled/disabled.• Call Duration Control for External Outgoing calls can be enabled/disabled.• Enabling CDC for different types of calls, defining the CDC timer, assigning allowed and denied lists, etc

forms a table called CDC Table.



Matrix


• Each CDC Table looks like:

• Maximum eight CDC tables can be programmed.• One such table can be assigned to the SLT or the DKP user.• Four CDC tables are available by default, which satisfies most of the requirements. Hence these tables can

be directly assigned to the stations.• By default,

• However for special types of requirements, customized Allowed Lists and Denied Lists should be

programmed and should be assigned to a CDC table. Then after this CDC table should be assigned to astation. Please refer “Allowed Lists and Denied Lists” for more details.

• For example, to disconnect all calls starting with ‘0’ except those starting with ‘022’, program an allowedlist with string ‘022’ and denied list with string ‘0’ and assign these lists to the CDC table.

• By default, CDC table 0 is assigned to each station.

How to program?Step 1: Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the types of Call Duration Controls to be programmed for each

station.Step 2: If the requirement can be met by using default CDC tables, assign a default CDC table to a SLT

using command 6210 and to a DKP using command 6220.Step 3: If the requirement cannot be met by default CDC tables then program all the parameters of a CDC

table like Enable CDC for Outgoing call/Incoming call/Internal call, disconnection flag, CDC timer,etc. This programs one complete CDC table. Program remaining seven CDC tables likewise, if required.

Step 4: Assign this CDC table to SLT using command 6210 and to DKP using command 6220.Step 5: Take printout of the CDC tables for future reference.

By defaul t, all stations are assigned CDC table 0.

Parameter Value

Internal Call Control Yes/No

Incoming Call Control Yes/No

Outgoing Call Control Yes/No

Allowed List List Number from 00 to 24Denied List List Number from 00 to 24

CDC Timer 000-999 seconds

CDC Disconnection Flag Yes/No

CDC Table Meaning

0 CDC OFF for all calls

1 CDC ON for Outgoing ISD calls

2 CDC ON for Outgoing STD and ISD calls

3 CDC ON for Outgoing 95, STD and ISD calls

4 CDC ON for all Outgoing calls






Matrix


CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the type of calls viz. Outgoing, Incoming or Internal for which CDC is to be enabled.

Step 2

Use following command to assign a CDC table to a SLT user:6210-1-SLT-CDC table

Use following command to assign a CDC table to a DKP user:6220-1-DKP-CDC table

Step 3Use following command to enable CDC for Outgoing Call:6202-1-CDC Table-Code Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7

Use following command to enable CDC for Incoming Call:6203-1-CDC Table-Code Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7

Use following command to enable CDC for Internal Call:6204-1-CDC Table-Code Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7

Use following command to assign Allowed List to a table:6205-1-CDC Table-Al lowed List Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7Allowed List is from 00 to 24

Use following command to assign Denied List to a table:6206-1-CDC Table-Denied L ist Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7Allowed List is from 00 to 24

Code Meaning

0 CDC for Outoging call is to be enabled1 CDC for Outoging call is to be disabled

Code Meaning

0 CDC for Incoming call is to be enabled

1 CDC for Incoming call is to be disabled

Code Meaning

0 CDC for Internal call is to be enabled

1 CDC for Internal call is to be disabled



Matrix


Use following command to assign CDC timer:6207-1-CDC Table-CDC timer Where,CDC table is from 0 to 7CDC timer is from 001 to 999 seconds

Use following command to assign disconnection flag:6208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection F lag Where,CDC Table is from 0 to 7

Step 4Go to step 2 above.

Step 5Use following command to take printout of the CDC tables:6200

Example 1:Program SLT 201 (software port number 000) for following constraints:Disconnect all calls starting with ‘0’ after 180 seconds.

Solution:Assign default CDC table 2 to SLT 2016210-1-000-2

Since default CDC timer is 255 seconds, define CDC timer of 160 seconds (not 180 seconds because 20seconds are added to CDC timer for actual disconnection)6207-1-2-160

Example 2:Program SLT 202 (software port number 001) for following constraints:Disconnect all calls starting with ‘0’ after 180 seconds except calls starting with ‘022’.

Solution:As observed this type of requirement cannot be met by default CDC table. Also it is not advisable to disturbany default CDC table because these might be assigned to other stations. Hence customize CDC table 5 andassign it to station 201.

Enable CDC for Outgoing call6202-1-5-1

Program the number ‘0’ in denied list 04 and ‘022’ in allowed list 04. (This step is necessary because defaultallowed and denied lists does not contain such an option whereby 022 is available in allowed list and 0 isavailable in denied list)6301-1-04-00-022-# 6302-1-04-00-0-#

Disconnection Flag Meaning

0 Call is not disconnected

1 Call is disconneced



Matrix


Assign this allowed list and denied list to CDC table 56205-1-5-04 6206-1-5-04

Assign CDC timer of 160 seconds (not 180 seconds because 20 seconds are added to CDC timer for actualdisconnection)

6207-1-5-160

Enable CDC disconnection flag in CDC table 56208-1-5-1

Assign CDC table 5 to SLT 2026210-1-001-5

Important points:• In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the transferred station.• It is possible to disconnect specific outgoing calls. For example it is possible to disconnect all calls to

022-8765432 after 180 seconds.

Wild CardsRange commandsEnable CDC for Outgoing Call in one CDC table 6202-1-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Outgoing Call in range of CDC tables 6202-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Outgoing Call in all CDC tables 6202-* -Code

Enable CDC for Incoming Call in one CDC table 6203-1-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Incoming Call in range of CDC tables 6203-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Incoming Call in all CDC tables 6203-* -Code

Enable CDC for Internal Call in one CDC table 6204-1-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Internal Call in range of CDC tables 6204-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code

Enable CDC for Internal Call in all CDC tables 6204-* -Code Assign allowed list to a CDC table 6205-1-CDC Table-Al l owed L ist

Assign allowed list to a range of CDC tables 6205-2-CDC Table-CDC table-Al l owed L ist

Assign allowed list to all the tables 6205-* -Al lowed L ist

Assign denied list to a CDC table 6206-1-CDC Table-Deni ed L ist

Assign denied list to a range of CDC tables 6206-2-CDC Table-CDC table-Denied L ist

Assign denied list to all the tables 6206-* -Deni ed L ist

Assign CDC timer to a CDC table 6207-1-CDC table-CDC timer

Assign CDC timer to a range of CDC tables 6207-2-CDC table-CDC table-CDC timer

Assign CDC timer to all CDC tables 6207-* -CDC timer

Assign CDC disconnection flag to a CDC table 6208-1-CDC table-disconnecti on fl ag

Assign CDC disconnection flag to range of CDC tables 6208-2-CDC table-CDC table-disconnecti on fl ag

Assign CDC disconnection flag to all CDC tables 6208-* -disconnecti on fl ag

Assign CDC table to a SLT 6210-1-SLT-CDC Table

Assign CDC table to range of SLTs 6210-2-SLT-SLT-CDC Table

Assign CDC table to all SLTs 6210-* -CDC Table

Assign CDC table to a DKP 6220-1-DKP-CDC Table

Assign CDC table to range of DKPs 6220-2-DKP-DKP-CDC Table

Assign CDC table to all DKPs 6220-* -CDC Table



Matrix


Default commands

Relevant topic:1. Allowed and Denied Lists

Default a CDC table 6201-1-CDC Tabl e-#

Default a range of CDC tables 6201-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-#

Default all the CDC tables 6201-* -#

Assign default CDC table to a SLT 6210-1-SLT-#

Assign default CDC table to a range of SLTs 6210-2-SLT-SLT-# Assign default CDC table to all SLTs 6210-* -#

Assign default CDC table to a DKP 6220-1-DKP-#

Assign default CDC table to a range of DKPs 6220-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default CDC table to all DKPs 6220-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

CALL DURATION CONTROL AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tab No OG Type IG Type INT Type AL List Dn List Timer DiscF

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 OFF OFF OFF 00 00 255 OFF

1 ON OFF OFF 00 03 255 OFF



4 ON OFF OFF 00 00 255 OFF5 OFF OFF OFF 00 00 255 OFF



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Call Duration Display

What’s this?The Eternity helps the user to know the duration of the present call instantly. The system displays theduration of the call on the LCD of the Digital Key Phone.

How it works?When the DKP user goes off-hook, the duration timer on the DKP turns ON.

Important point:• Only DKP users will be able to use this feature.

=X=X=



Matrix


Call Forward

What’s this?In an organization people move from one place to another during typical workday. They do not sit at fixed places. A user might go to his colleague’s desk to work on a project they are doing jointly. A manager mightgo on the production floor or remain in conference room for few hours. In such situations, a user cannot

afford to miss his calls. He would like to attend his calls from his new location. To fulfill this requirement,Eternity offers a facility called “Call Forward”.

Many times the user shuttles between two places frequently. In such cases it is cumbersome to forward thecall, cancel it, and repeat this activity frequently. Eternity offers flexibility to allow the user to attend the callat either place.

Access to Call Forward is programmable and hence can be allowed or denied to a user. Please refer section“Class Of Service” section for details on how to enable this feature on a particular station.

How it works?The following flow chart explains the logic:

Start

Station A calls station B

Has station

B forwarded his

calls?

System routes the call to new

station where calls are forwarded

Is the

new station

free?

System places the call on new station. New

station et rin . Station A ets rin back tone.

End

System checks for other features

End

System blocks the call.

Station gets A busy tone.

End

No

Yes

No

Yes



Matrix


How to use it?1. Call Forward – All calls to another Station.One can forward all the calls to his station to another station where he might be temporarily shifted.

Example: If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24 .

2. Call Forward – All calls to external numberOne can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.

Example: If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61, he should dial131-61-630555-#.

3. Call Forward - If BusyOne can forward all the calls to his station if he is busy with some other station when the call arrives.

Example: If station 23 wants to forward all his calls to station 24 when he is busy, he should dial 132-24.

4. Call Forward – If Busy - All calls to external numberOne can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.


5. Call Forward - If No ReplyOne can forward all the calls if he does not answer the call within 30 seconds. This timer is called Ring back timer: Transfer on no-reply. This timer is programmable.

Example: Station User 23 wants that if he does not answer the calls within 30 seconds the calls should go toStation 24 (his colleague), he should dial 133-24.

6. Call Forward – If No Reply - All calls to external numberOne can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.


2 Dial 131-Station Confirmation tone



2 Dial 131-Trunk Access Code-Desti nati on Number-# Confirmation tone






2 Dial 132-Trunk Access Code-Desti nt i on Nuber-# Confirmation tone






2 Dial 133-Trunk Access Code-Desti nt i on Nuber-# Confirmation tone




Matrix



7. Cancel Call Forward

Call Forward – Dual RingThis feature enables the user to attend the call on either station viz. user’s station or the forwarded station.

On enabling this command:If the user uses Call Forward – All Calls then both the stations would ring simultaneously and the user can

answer the call from either station.If the user uses Call Forward – If Busy then all the calls will be forwarded to the forwarded station when theuser is busy with other call.If the user uses Call Forward – If No Reply then the station on which the call is forwarded will ring for Ring back timer: Transfer on no-reply and then after both the stations will ring.

Example: If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24 . If the user also dials1351 then both the stations 23 and 24 will ring simultaneously and the user can answer the call from either station.

Disable Call Forward – Dual Ring

On using this command Call Forward feature would work normally as explained above.

Please note that Call Forward - Dual Ring would work only for in ternal Call F orward.

How to program?Call forward is a programmable feature and it can be allowed or denied from a station. Please refer ‘Class of Service’ for more details.

Timer of relevance:Ring back timer: transfer on no-reply – Time after which the call gets forwarded.Command: 2601-Seconds Default: 30 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds.

Relevant topic:1. Class of Service (COS)

=X=X=












Matrix


Call Park

What’s this?• You can park the current call and attend to another call.• The parked person gets music.• While a call is parked, you are totally freed from the call.

• You may use other system features like Call Pick Up, Call Follow Me etc.• After completing the current call, retrieve the parked call.• System hunts your station for 3 times (programmable) after every 45 seconds (programmable). If you are

free the call lands on your station else the call is terminated by the system.

How to use it?To Park a call

To retrieve the Parked call

Important points:• If you don’t retrieve the call within 45 seconds, the call comes back to you automatically. Your station

starts ringing. This timer is called Call Park Timer and is programmable.• If you are busy for longer period of time then the parked call comes back to you once you get free.• Multiple calls can be parked simultaneously.• The LED of the parked station keeps on flickering on the DKP of the user who has parked the call thereby

giving visual indication of call park status.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Call Park to a user.

Timers of relevance:Call Park timer - Time after which the call comes back to the station that has parked the call.Command: 4201-Seconds Default: 45 secondsRange: 000 to 255 seconds

Call Park Count - Number of times the system checks your station to find whether you are free.

Command: 4202-Count Default: 3Range: 000 to 255.


=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk (or station)

2 DialFlash Feature tone

3 Dial 117 Call parked


2 Dial 118 Speech



Matrix


Call Pick Up

Eternity offers two types of call pick up facility viz. Call Pick Up - group and Call Pick Up – selective.

Call Pick Up - GroupWhat’s this?

• You can answer calls of your colleague or co-worker without physically going to his station. You can usethis feature to answer even trunk calls ringing on other stations.

How to use it?

Important points:• To pick up a call, the ringing stations should be in the same Pick Up Group.• In case of more stations ringing, the station with the least port number will be picked up first.• It is possible to program the type of calls, which can be picked up. Accordingly, it is possible to program

the Eternity in such a way that any station can pick up calls of only High Priority, Equal priority and Trunk

calls. By Default, all internal calls and trunk calls can be picked up.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of Call Pick Up groups to be formedStep 2: Assign a call pick up group to individual SLT as per the requirement using the command 2501 Step 3: Assign a call pick up group to individual DKP as per the requirement using the command 2502 Step 4: Program the type of calls that can be picked up using command 2503.Step 5: Assign a COS group allowing Call Pick up to the user.Use wild cards to assign same Call Pick Up group to more numbers of SLTs or DKPs

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a piece of paper and list the stations to be grouped in one call pick up group. Make suchgroups as per the need.

Step 2Use following command to program Call Pick Up Group for SLT user:2501-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group Where,SLT is the Software port number of the SLT user from 000-255.Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 24.

Step 3

Use following command to program Call Pick Up Group for DKP users:2502-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group Where,DKP is the software number of the DKP User from 000-127.Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.

Step 4Use following command to program the type of calls that can be picked by a station:2503-Cal l type-Code Where,


2 Dial 4 Speech



Matrix


Step 5Please ensure that COS group with enabled call pick up group has been assigned to the station

Please note that it is possible to have few SLTs and Few DKPs in one Call Pickup group.


Default commands

Call Pick Up - SelectiveWhat’s this?• Answer call of a particular ringing station.• Useful when more than one stations are ringing and you want to answer one of them selectively.

How to use it?

Code Meaning

0 Internal call from Low Priority station

1 Internal call from Equal Priority station

2 Internal call from High Priority station

3 Trunk call

4 Alarm call5 Auto call back call

6 Auto redial call

7 Message wait

Code Meaning

0 Non Pickable

1 Pickable

Assign default Call Pick Up group to a SLT. 2501 –1-SLT- #

Assign default Call Pick Up group to range of SLTs. 2501 –2- SLT-SLT- #

Assign default Call Pick Up group to all SLTs. 2501 –* - #

Assign default Call Pick Up group to a DKP. 2502 –1-DKP- #

Assign default Call Pick Up group to range of DKPs. 2502 –2- DKP-DKP- #

Assign default Call Pick Up group to all DKPs. 2502 –* - #

Assign default state to a call type. 2503 – Cal l type -#

Assign default state to all the call types 2502 –* - #

Command to program call pick up group for a SLT 2501-1- SLT- Cal l Pi ck Up Group

Command to program range of SLTs in same call pick up group 2501-2- SLT-SLT- Call Pick Up Group

Command to program all SLTs in same call pick up group 2501-* - Cal l Pi ck Up Group

Command to program call pick up group for a DKP 2502-1- DKP-Call Pick Up Group

Command to program range of DKPs in same call pick up group 2502-2- DKP-DKP- Call Pick Up Group

Command to program all DKPs in same call pick up group 2502-* - Cal l Pi ck Up Group


2 Dial 12 – Stati on Speech



Matrix


How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Call Pickup – Selective to a user.

Important point:• To pick up selective calls, the ringing station need not be in the same call pick up group.


=X=X=



Matrix


Call Progress Tones

What’s this?The Eternity gives various tones in different situations. This is how the Eternity responds to dialing of codesand commands.

Dial ToneWhen you lift the handset you get dial tone. Dial tone stays for 7 seconds. This Dial Tone Timer is programmable. After that error tone starts.• Sound: Toooooooooooo

Use following command to program the Dial Tone Timer:5211-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds

Eternity supports two types of dial tones.Use following command to select dial tone type:

5230-Tone Type

By defaul t, Di al Tone Type is 0

Ring Back ToneWhen you dial internal number and if that number is free, you will get the ring back tone. The ring back tonecontinues for 45 seconds. This Ring Back Tone Timer is programmable.• Sound: Turroo... Turrroo

Use following command to program the Ring Back Tone Timer:5212-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 045 seconds

Eternity supports two types of Ring back tones.Use following command to select ring back tone type:5231-RBT Type

By defaul t, Ring Back Tone Type is 0

Busy Tone (Engage Tone)High pitch beeps with equal on and off periods. When you dial any station that is busy, you get busy tone.Busy tone continues for 7 seconds. This Busy Tone Timer is programmable.• Sound: Tooooooo.........Toooooooo

Tone Type Meaning

0 Dial Tone Type 1 (American Standard)

1 Dial Tone Type 2 (European Standard)

RBT Type Meaning

0 Ring Back Tone Type 1 (American Standard)

1 Ring Back Tone Type 2 (European Standard)



Matrix


Use following command to program the Busy Tone timer:5213-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds

Error Tone

The Error Tone is made of fast beeps. When you perform some wrong operation or try using a featurewithout access, you get error tone.• Sound: Too…Too…Too…Too

Internal Call Waiting ToneShort beep followed by longer off duration repeated every second. This is also known as intrusion tone. Busyuser gets this tone over his speech when some other station attempts interrupt request/barge-in.• Sound: Beep.…………BeepThe user gets this tone till the Interrupt request timer or the barge in timer

External Call Waiting ToneThis tone is of two ticks followed by a longer off time of approximately 3 seconds. Busy programmed

destination station gets this tone when there is a fresh TELCO call.• Sound: Beep...Beep………....Beep...BeepThis tone continuous for transfer-On busy timer.

Feature ToneShort beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The feature tone is given to the user when he has activated a feature like Call Forward, Do Not Disturb etc. Feature tone continues for 7 seconds.• Sound: Beep… Beep

Use following command to program the Feature Tone Timer:5216-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 seconds

Default = 007 seconds

Hold ToneShort beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The hold tone is given when you put a person on hold. Hold tone continues for 7 seconds. This timer is same as Dial Tone Timer.

Feature Confirmation ToneThis tone is continuous, fast beeps. The Eternity confirms successful usage of features with this tone. Theconfirmation tone remains for 7 seconds. This is called Feature Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.• Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep

Use following command to program the Feature Confirmation Tone Timer:5215-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds

Programming ToneThis is exactly same as the feature tone. Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second.The Eternity prompts you to enter fresh commands during programming with this tone. Programming toneremains for time 7 seconds. This Programming Tone Timer is programmable.



Matrix


• Sound: Beep.............Beep

Use following command to program the Programming Tone Timer:5217-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds

Programming Confirmation ToneThis is exactly same as the feature confirmation tone. This tone is continuous, fast beeps. During programming, this tone indicates that valid command is received by the system and it has taken necessaryaction. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This is called Programming Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.• Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep

Use following command to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer:5219-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 003 seconds

Programming Error ToneThis tone is exactly same as the Error Tone. This tone is given when some wrong programming command isdialed. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This Programming Error Tone timer is programmable.• Sound: Too…Too…Too…Too

Use following command to program the Programming Error Tone Timer:5218-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 003 seconds

Tone Specifications

Demonstration of TonesIt is possible to demonstrate these tones. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to get acquainted withdifferent types of tones given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these tones, he would not understandtheir meaning.

Name Frequency Cadence

Dial Tone 1 440Hz Continuous

Dial Tone 2 440Hz + 350Hz Continuous

Ring Back Tone 1 440Hz 1000ms on, 2000ms off

Ring Back Tone 2 440Hz + 350Hz 400ms on, 200ms off, 400ms on, 2000ms off

Busy Tone 440Hz 750ms on, 750ms off

Confirmation Tone 440Hz + 350Hz 50ms on, 50ms off

Programming Tone 440Hz 100ms on, 900ms off

Error Tone 440Hz 250ms on, 250ms off

Internal Call Waiting Tone 440Hz 100ms on, 2900ms off Trunk Call Waiting Tone 440Hz + 350Hz 100ms on, 100ms off, 100ms on, 2700ms off



Matrix


How to use it?Use following commands to hear different types of tones:

It is advisable to use a hands free telephone instrument if a group of people wants to listen to these tones.

Timer of relevance:Demonstration Timer - Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring/music to the user.Command: 5202-Seconds Default: 30 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

=X=X=

Sr. Tone Command

1 Dial tone 5201-01

2 Ring back tone 5201-02

3 Feature tone 5201-03

4 Busy tone 5201-04

5 Error tone 5201-05

6 Programming tone 5201-06

7 Routing tone 5201-07

8 Confirmation tone 5201-08

9 External Call waiting tone 5201-09

10 Intrusion tone 5201-10



Matrix


Call Splitting

What’s this?• This feature enables you to talk to two persons alternately.• Call Splitting is also known as Hold-Consult or Hold-Toggle.

How to use it?Call Splitting can be used in any of the following three combinations:1. Two stations2. One station and one trunk 3. Two trunks

Call Splitting between two stations from SLT

Call Splitting between a station and a trunk from SLT

Call Splitting between two trunks from SLT

Call Splitting between two stations from DKP

1 Speech with station


3 Dial another Station Ring back tone

4 Speech with the station when the call is answered

5 DialFlash-1 Speech with help party

1 Speech with trunk


3 Dial another Station Ring back tone

4 Speech with the station when the call is answered

5 DialFlash-1 Speech with help party

1 Speech with trunk

2 DialFlash Feature tone, Trunk goes on hold

3 Dial8 Feature tone

4 Dial0 to grab another trunk Trunk dial tone

5 DialTelephone Number Ring back tone

6 Speech with called party when the call is answered

7 DialFlash-1 Speech with hepd party

1 Speech with station

2 Dial another Station Ring back tone. First station goes on hold

3 Speech with second station when call is answered

4 DialFlash-1 Speech with held station (first station)

5 DialFlash-1 Speech with station (second station)



Matrix


Call Splitting between a station and a trunk from DKP

Call Splitting between two trunks from DKP

Important points:• Only one of the two persons will be in conversation with you at a time. The third person is on hold. He

gets music and cannot hear your conversation.• When in speech with a station and getting external call waiting tone, you can dial Flash to answer the

trunk call. The station is put on hold and gets music. Now, you can split between the two persons.• Interrupting station can also be answered very much in the same way as described above. Your current call

is put on hold and speech with the interrupting station is established. Once again, you can split between thetwo persons.

• From SLT, 3-Party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by dialing Flash-0

• From DKP, 3-party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by pressing Conf erence key or Flash-0.

• You can also transfer the active person (one who is in conversation with you) to the third person.• You can also park the current person.• Access to Call Splitting is programmable.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call splitting to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Conference-3 Party2. Call Transfer 3. Call Park 4. Class Of Service (COS)

=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk

2 DialStation Ring back tone. First station goes on hold

3 Speech with second station when call is answered

4 DialFlash-1 Speech with held station (first station)

5 DialFlash-1 Speech with station (second station)

1 Speech with trunk

2 DialFlash Feature tone. Trunk goes on hold

3 Dial8 Feature tone

4 Dial0 to grab another trunk Dial tone of trunk

5 DialTelephone Number Ring back tone

6 Speech with called party when the call is answered

7 DialFlash-1 Speech with held trunk (second station)

8 DialFlash-1 Speech with second trunk



Matrix


Call Transfer

Eternity offers four types of call transfer:Call transfer – ScreenedCall transfer – While ringingCall transfer – On busy

Call transfer – Trunk to Trunk

Call Transfer – ScreenedWhat’s this?• This is normal call transfer and the most widely used.• Operators can use this method to transfer incoming calls.

How to use it?

Important points:• Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.• While waiting for the station to answer, you can abandon the transfer by dialing Flash . The ring on the

station is stopped and you get connected to the person on hold.

Call Transfer - While RingingWhat’s this?• Transfer a call without waiting for the destination to answer.• An operator can use this feature when there are other calls pending and she cannot wait for the station to

respond to intimate the call.• This is also known as “Wait For Ring Transfer”.

How to use it?

Important points:

• Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.• If the called station does not respond to the ring within 30 seconds, the call comes back to the station thattransferred the call. This is known as Transfer - While Ringing Timer and is programmable.Use following command to program this timer:4101-Seconds Default = 30 secondsValid Range = 000 to 255 seconds

• If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets ring.• If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer

then the caller gets busy tone.

1 Speech with trunk


3 DialStation Ring back tone

4 Wait for the station to answer Speech with ring answered5 Replace the handset Call is transferred

1 Speech with calling or called party


3 DialStation Ring back tone




Matrix


• If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer thenthe system waits for the station to become free. The caller gets ring back tone.

Call Transfer - On BusyWhat’s this?• Transfer a call on a station already in speech with some other person.

• Operators can transfer calls without even checking for the status of the destination station.• This is also known as “Blind Transfer”.• The busy destination station gets intrusion tone.• He can speak to the calling person by dialing ‘Flash ’

How to use it?

Important points:• Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.• A call can be transferred on busy station only if he is not programmed with call privacy from intrusion

tone.• If the called station does not respond to the intrusion tone within 30 seconds, the call comes back to you.

This is known as Transfer On Busy Timer and is programmable. Use following command to program thistimer:4102-Seconds Default = 30 secondsValid Range = 000 to 255 seconds

• If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets ring.• If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer

then the caller gets busy tone.• If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer then

the system waits for the station to become free. The caller gets ring back tone.

Call Transfer – Trunk To Trunk What’s this?• An external call can be transferred on another trunk line.• The operator need not remain in speech. Two external persons can speak through the Eternity.

How to use it?

Important points:• In case a colleague has not come to the office, his incoming calls can be transferred on his residence’s

phone line or on his mobile.• In case a remote colleague is not having long distance or international dialing facility from his present

location. He can dial his office and request the operator to connect him to the desired number.

1 Speech with trunk


3 DialStation Busy tone

4 Disconnect Call wiil be transferred on the busy station and it will get intrusion tone

1 3-way mode as described in call splitting


3 Dial8 Station disconnects. Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 remain in speech



Matrix


• A warning tone is given after Trunk-to-Trunk inactivity timer. To extend the call, either of the persons hasto dial a digit in tone (DTMF). Dialing of ‘##’ terminates the call and both the trunks are released.

How to use Call Transfer from DKP?

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call transfer to a user.

Timer of relevance:Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer-The system disconnects the call after this time.Command: 4103-Seconds Default: 90 Seconds

Valid Range: 000 to 255 Seconds

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Privacy3. Conference-3 Party4. Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

=X=X=

1 Speech with calling or called party

2 DialStation Ring back tone/Busy tone

3 Wait for the station to answer, consult and/or Press' trf/f l ' key




Matrix


Calling Line Identification (CLI)

What’s this?The Eternity identifies the caller. Caller’s name or his telephone number is displayed on the LCD of the DKP.This enables the user to prepare him before answering the call. The Caller’s telephone number is stored inthe Incoming SMDR buffer of the system. The Eternity also provides a facility to route selected incoming

calls to particular stations.

How does it work?If CLI storage is enabled on a trunk then the Eternity senses the digits sent by PSTN during the ringing phase. It sends this information to the landing station/operator along with the ringing signal. If the name for a particular telephone number is assigned then the name of the caller is displayed on the LCD else thetelephone number is displayed on the LCD. Also, the system stores this information in its memory. When theoperator transfers the call to a station, the system sends this information to the transferred station.

The incoming telephone number is stored in the Incoming SMDR buffer also. This telephone number appears in the Incoming SMDR buffer in the space provided.

On arrival of an incoming call, the system identifies the calling party’s number and compares it with thenumbers in the CLI table. (The CLI table is constructed by the system internally when the programming isdone). If the number is present in the CLI table, the call is routed according to CLI programming or thenumber is routed according to normal trunk landing group programming.

How to program?The telephone numbers of all the incoming calls will be displayed; no programming is required for it.However if it is required to land the calls from a particular telephone number on a particular station or stations then the system needs to be programmed. Also name of the caller can be programmed, if desired.

Step 1: Enable CLI storage on the desired trunk using command 1609.Step 2: Program the telephone numbers to be routed directly to the stations using command 6101.Step 3: Program the trunk landing groups for these telephone numbers using command 6102.Step 4: Program the name of the calling party corresponding to his telephone number using command 6103 Step 5: Take a printout of the Caller line Identification parameters using command 6100.

Step 1Use following command to enable/disable CLI storage and CLI Display on a trunk:1609-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk is the software port number from 000 to 127.

Use following commands to enable/disable CLI storage and CLI Display on a range of trunks:1609-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Use following commands to enable/disable CLI storage and CLI Display on all the trunks:1609-* -Code

Code Meaning

0 Disable CLI storage

1 Enable CLI storage



Matrix


Step 2Use following command to program the incoming telephone number in a CLI table:6101-1-I ndex-Telephone Number-# Where,Index is from 000 to 199.Telephone Number is the calling party’s telephone number (Maximum 16 digits). Terminate the command

with #.

Use following command to clear a telephone number from the CLI table:6101-1-Index-#

Use following command to clear all the telephone numbers from the CLI table:6101-*-#

Step 3Use following command to assign trunk-landing group for the incoming telephone number in the CLI table:6102-1-Index-Trunk Landing Group Where,

Index is from 000 to 199.Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to clear a trunk-landing group for an incoming telephone number in the CLI table:6102-1-Index-#

Use following command to clear trunk-landing group for all the incoming telephone numbers in the CLItable:6102-*-# On using these commands, the incoming calls will be routed according to the trunk landing groups definedfor a trunk.

Step 4Use following command to program name of calling party (this corresponds to the calling party’s telephonenumber):6103-1-I ndex-Name-<H old Key> Where,Index is from 000 to 199. Name can maximum be of 10 characters.

Use following command to clear a name for an incoming telephone number:6103-1-Index-<H old Key>

Use following command to clear names of all the telephone numbers:6103-*-#

On doing the above programming, a CLI table shown below is constructed by the system internally.



Matrix


Step 5Use following command to take a printout of the calling line identification parameters:6100

Example:Calls from Rakesh (033-5656565) should land on DKP 2001 whereas calls from Mahesh (022-8787878)should land on DKP 2005.

Solution:

Since two incoming numbers have to be landed on specific stations, these two stations should be programmed along with their names and landing groups.

Make two trunk-landing groups 10 and 11, group 10 containing station 2001 and group 11 containing station2005.

Use following commands:6101-1-00-0335656565-# 6102-1-00-10 6103-1-00-Rakesh-<Press Hold Key> 6101-1-01-656565-# 6102-1-01-11

6103-1-01-Mahesh-<Press Hold Key>

Relevant topics:1. Digital Key Phone-Operation2. Customer Name (For Name programming)

IndexTrunk Landing

Group

Caller's Telephone

NumberCaller's Name

000 00 022-8585858 Raju

001 01 011-7878787 Kalpana

… . .

… . .

… . .

… . .

199 05 033-5656565 Tanvi



Matrix


CALLER IDENTIFICATION PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Index TLG Caller Number Caller Name Index TLG Caller Number Caller Name

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 - 001 -

002 - 003 -

004 - 005 -

006 - 007 -

008 - 009 -010 - 011 -

012 - 013 -

014 - 015 -

016 - 017 -

018 - 019 -

020 - 021 -

022 - 023 -

024 - 025 -

026 - 027 -

028 - 029 -

030 - 031 -

032 - 033 -

034 - 035 -

036 - 037 -

038 - 039 -040 - 041 -

042 - 043 -

044 - 045 -

046 - 047 -

048 - 049 -

050 - 051 -

052 - 053 -

054 - 055 -

056 - 057 -

058 - 059 -

060 - 061 -

062 - 063 -

064 - 065 -

066 - 067 -

068 - 069 -070 - 071 -

072 - 073 -

074 - 075 -

076 - 077 -

078 - 079 -

080 - 081 -

082 - 083 -

084 - 085 -

086 - 087 -

088 - 089 -

090 - 091 -

092 - 093 -

094 - 095 -

096 - 097 -

098 - 099 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


CALLER IDENTIFICATION PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Index TLG Caller Number Caller Name Index TLG Caller Number Caller Name

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

100 - 101 -

102 - 103 -

104 - 105 -

106 - 107 -

108 - 109 -110 - 111 -

112 - 113 -

114 - 115 -

116 - 117 -

118 - 119 -

120 - 121 -

122 - 123 -

124 - 125 -

126 - 127 -

128 - 129 -

130 - 131 -

132 - 133 -

134 - 135 -

136 - 137 -

138 - 139 -140 - 141 -

142 - 143 -

144 - 145 -

146 - 147 -

148 - 149 -

150 - 151 -

152 - 153 -

154 - 155 -

156 - 157 -

158 - 159 -

160 - 161 -

162 - 163 -

164 - 165 -

166 - 167 -

168 - 169 -170 - 171 -

172 - 173 -

174 - 175 -

176 - 177 -

178 - 179 -

180 - 181 -

182 - 183 -

184 - 185 -

186 - 187 -

188 - 189 -

190 - 191 -

192 - 193 -

194 - 195 -

196 - 197 -

198 - 199 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Cancel Station Features

What’s this?• Features like Alarms (except daily alarm), Auto Call Back, Call Follow-Me, Call Forward, Hot Line, Hot

Outward Dialing and Walk in Class Of Service can be cancelled from the station.• The Eternity supports separate cancellation code for each feature. But it is desirable to have a master

command to cancel all the features with a single command.

How to use it?

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow this feature to a user.

=X=X=






Matrix


Class Of Service (COS)

What’s this?All users in an organization are not equal. Some users are important and their time is more valuable. Further,their nature of job also differs. Keeping this diversity in mind, it is imperative that the features they needfrom a system differ from person to person.

The feature requirements can also vary from time to time. For example, the features required during workinghours and during lunch/non-working hours need not be the same.

It is the system’s responsibility to allow or deny a feature access to a user depending on his needs. Thesystem should support flexible allocation of features to different users. This accessibility of different featuresfor a user is known as his Class Of Service (COS).

How it works?The Eternity supports very flexible COS programming. Each user can be assigned different COS dependingon his and the organization’s needs. All the features supported by the system are presented in the form of alist.

Each feature in the list is identified with a 2–digit number. Following table lists all the features with featurenumber to be used during programming:

Feature Number Feature Name

0 Internal Call

1 Call Hold

2 Call Toggle (Call Split)

3 Call Transfer

4 Call Pick up

5 Auto Call Back-Busy

6 Auto Call Back-No Reply7 Operator dialing

8 Redial

9 Auto Redial

10 Auto Redial Type

11 Personal Memory Dialing

12 Global Directory Part One Dialing

13 Global Directory Part Two Dialing

14 Global Directory Part Three Dialing

15 Call Forward

16 Do not Disturb

17 Dynamic Lock

18 Remote Alarm Access

19 Department Call

20 Conference

21 Interrupt Request

22 Barge-In



Matrix


Relevant features from this list can be selected and put in a group. One can make few feature access groupsdepending upon the requirement. First group may contain none of the features. Second group may containvery common features like Call Forward, Call Transfer, Internal Dialing etc. Third group may contain move-advanced features and so on. Fifth group may contain all the features. Once programmed, COS groups may

look like:

By default, in first 10 COS groups a set of features is allowed whereas in rest 40 COS groups all the featuresare denied. Default COS groups chart is attached herewith

23 Raid

24 Call Budget

25 Paging

26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

27 Override

28 Call Park 29 Privacy – Interrupt Request and Barge-In

30 Privacy – Raid

31 Privacy - Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls

32 Privacy – Trunk Call Waiting Beeps

33 Call Chaining

34 Inter Tenant Call

35 Trunk Reservation

36 Analog Input Port (AIP)

37 Analog Output Port (AOP)

38 Room Monitor

39 Personal Alarm Message

40 Direct Trunk Access

41 Trunk to Trunk Transfer

42 Flashing on Trunk

43 Account Code

Group 0 1 2 3 4 … 41 42 43

0 N N N N N … N N N

1 N N Y Y N … N Y N

2 Y N N Y Y … Y Y Y

3 N N N Y Y … N N N

4 Y Y Y N Y … N Y N

… … … … … … … … … …

… … … … … … … … … …

10 Y Y Y N Y … Y Y N

… … … … … … … … … …

… … … … … … … … … …

48 Y Y Y Y Y … Y Y Y

49 Y Y Y Y Y … Y Y Y



Matrix


Now, these groups can be allocated to the users depending upon the hierarchy of the user in the organization.A user can be assigned three different COS groups for three time zones. Once these groups are assigned tousers, the user COS table looks like:

Following points are relevant:• Maximum 25 nos. feature access groups can be formed (00-24).• Each feature can be enabled or disabled in each group.

• 00th

group is the default COS group.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of COS groups to be formed.Step 2: Prepare list of the features required in each COS group and program it using command 1701 Step 3: Assign COS group to each SLT using command 1711, 1712 and 1713.Step 4: Assign COS group to each DKP using command 1721, 1722 and 1723.Step 5: Take printout of the COS configuration using command 1700.

The following flowchart elaborates this procedure.

Station number COS group for

Working hours

COS group for

Lunch hours

COS group for Non-

working hours

0 1 2 8

1 8 10 15

2 11 12 13

3 20 20 5

4 0 9 11

… … … …

… … … …



Matrix


Step 1Take a pen and a paper pad and decide the number of groups to be formed and what all features are to beassigned to each group.

Step 2Use following command to enable or disable a feature in a COS group:1701-1-COS group-Feature Number-Code Where,COS group = group number from 00 to 49Feature Number = Feature number from 00 to 43

Start

Read the list of the features

offerred by name system

Prepare a list of all stations

Write features needed for all tine

zones for each individual station

against his name in the list of stations

You will notice that features needed

by many stations are identical.

Hence feature variety gets reduced

Each variety is called a COS group.

Assign a group number to it.

This way prepare all COS groups

Assign COS groups to all the stations

Generate configuration reportsand verify the programming

Test the programming by checking

features from every station

End



Matrix


(Please note that default COS groups meet most of the requirements and hence this command is seldomused.)

Step 3Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during working hours:1711-1-SLT-COS Group Where,SLT = Software port of SLT User form 000 to 255COS Group is from 00 to 49

Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during lunch hours:1712-1-SLT-COS Group Where,SLT = Software port of SLT User from 000 to 255

COS Group is from 00 to 49

Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during non-working hours:1713-1-SLT-COS Group Where,SLT = Software port of SLT User from 000 to 255COS Group is from 00 to 49

Step 4Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during working hours:1721-1-DKP -COS Group Where,

DKP = Software port of DKP User from 000 to 127COS Group is from 00 to 49

Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during lunch hours:1722-1-DKP-COS Group Where,DKP = Software port of DKP User from 000 to 127COS Group is from 00 to 49

Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during non-working hours:1723-1-DKP-COS Group Where,DKP = Software port of DKP User from 000 to 127COS Group is from 00 to 49

Step 5Use following command to take the printouts of the COS configuration:1700

Example:Make a COS group ‘10’ having features like internal dialing, call hold, call transfer, call pick up, DND,

Code Meaning

0 Feature disabled

1 Feature enabled



Matrix


conference and call park. Assign it to SLT 201 and 202 (ports 007 and 008 respectively) for all the timezones.1701-1-10-00-1 1701-1-10-01-1 1701-1-10-03-1 1701-1-10-04-1

1701-1-10-16-1 1701-1-10-20-1 1701-1-10-28-1

1711-2-007-008-10 1712-2-007-008-10 1713-2-007-008-10


Enable or disable a feature in a COS group 1701-1-COS group-Feature Number-Code

Enable or disable a feature in for a range of COS groups 1701-2-COS group-COS group-Feature

Number-Code

Enable or disable a feature in all COS groups 1701-* -F eature Number-Code

Assign a COS group to a SLT user during working hours 1711-1- SLT-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of SLT users during working

hours

1711-2-SLT-SLT -COS Group

Assign same COS group to all SLT users during working hours 1711-* -COS Group

Assign a COS group to a SLT user during lunch hours 1711-1-SLT-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of SLT users during lunch

hours


Assign same COS group to all SLT users during lunch hours 1712-* -COS Group Assign a COS group to a SLT user during non-working hours 1713-1-SLT-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of SLT users during non-

working hours


Assign same COS group to all SLT users during non-working

hours

1713-* -COS Group

Assign a COS group to a DKP user during working hours 1721-1-DKP-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of DKP users during working

hours

1721-2-DKP-DKP-COS Group

Assign same COS group to all DKP users during working

hours

1721-* -COS Group

Assign a COS group to a DKP user during lunch hours 1722-1-DKP-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of DKP users during lunch

hours


Assign same COS group to all DKP users during lunch hours 1722-* -COS Group

Assign a COS group to a DKP user during non-working hours 1723-1-DKP-COS Group

Assign same COS group to range of DKP users during non-

working hours


Assign same COS group to all DKP users during non-working

hours

1723-* -COS Group



Matrix


Default commands02nd COS group is the default COS group

Default COS groups are shown in the COS configuration report attached herewith

Relevant topics:1. Time Tables

Default a COS group 1701-1-COS group-#

Default range of COS groups 1701-2-COS group-COS group-#

Default all COS groups 1701-* -#

Assign default COS group to a SLT user during working hours 1711-1-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to range of SLT users during

working hours

1711-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to all SLT users during working

hours

1711-* -#

Assign default COS group to a SLT user during lunch hours 1712-1-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to range of SLT users during lunch

hours

1712-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to all SLT users during lunch hours 1712-* -#

Assign default COS group to a SLT user during non-working

hours

1713-1-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to range of SLT users during non-

working hours

1713-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default COS group to all SLT users during non-working

hours

1713-* -#

Assign default COS group to a DKP user during working hours 1721-1-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to range of DKP users during

working hours

1721-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to all DKP users during workinghours

1721-* -#

Assign default COS group to a DKP user during lunch hours 1722-1-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to range of DKP users during lunch

hours

1722-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to all DKP users during lunch hours 1722-* -#

Assign default COS group to a DKP user during non-working

hours

1723-1-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to range of DKP users during non-

working hours

1723-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default COS group to all DKP users during non-

working hours

1723-* -#



Matrix


CLASS OF SERVICE GROUPS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Group Features

No. 0/0123456789 1/0123456789 2/0123456789 3/0123456789 4/0123

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNN

01 YYYYNNNYYN NNYNNNNNNN NNNNNYNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNN

02 YYYYYYYYYN NNYNNYNNNN NYNNNYNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNN

03 YYYYYYYYYN NNYYNYNYNY NYNNNYNNYN NNNNNNYYNN NNNN04 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY NYYNNYNNYN NNNYYNYYNN YNYN

05 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY NYYNNYNNYN NNNYYNYYNN YYYN

06 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY YYYYNYNNYN NNYYYNYYNN YNYN

07 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY YYYYNYNNYY NYYYYNYYNN YNYN

08 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY YYYYNYYNYY NYYYYYYYNN YNYY

09 YYYYYYYYYY YYYYYYYYYY YYYYNYYYYY YYYYYYYYNY YNYY









18 NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNN19 NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN NNNN





























-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


FEATURE NUMBERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Feature

No. Feature Name

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 Internal Call

01 Call Hold

02 Call Toggle (Call Split)

03 Call Transfer04 Call Pick Up

05 Auto Call Back-Busy

06 Auto Call Back-No Reply

07 Operator Dialing

08 Redial

09 Auto Redial

10 Auto Redial Type

11 Personal Abbreviated Dialing

12 Global Directory Part One Dialing

13 Global Directory Part Two Dialing

14 Global Directory Part Three Dialing

15 Call Forward

16 Do Not Disturb

17 Dynamic Lock

18 Remote Alarm Access19 Department Call

20 Conference

21 Interrupt Request

22 Barge-In

23 Raid

24 Call Budget

25 Paging

26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

27 Do Not Disturb Override

28 Call Park

29 Others Can Interrupt Request and BargeIn Me

30 Others Can Raid Me

31 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Call Land On Me

32 Trunk Call Waiting Beeps Allowed On Me

33 Call Chaining34 Inter Tenent Call

35 Trunk Reservation

36 Analog Input Port (AIP)

37 Analog Output Port (AOP)

38 Room Monitor

39 Personal Alarm Message

40 Direct Trunk Access

41 Trunk To Trunk Transfer

42 Flashing on Trunk

43 Account Code Access

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Communication Ports

The Eternity supports two communication ports. They are called COM1 and COM2. Each communication port is of serial, asynchronous and RS232C type.

Both these communication ports are provided on the master card of the system. The connectors (DB-9 male)

are provided on the front panel of the master card. For more details on the pin-out of these ports, please refer the Eternity-Installation Manual.

Following facilities of Eternity need a comm. port:1. PMS Interface2. Programming using a PC

Following facilities of the Eternity can use a comm. Port:1. SMDR Reports2. Configuration Reports3. Online SMDR Transfer

For more details on individual application, please refer respective section in this manual.

As there are two communication ports available at a time, two applications can be activated simultaneously.

A communication port has following programmable attributes:1. Speed in bps.2. Number of data bits3. Number of stop bits.4. Parity

These attributes of a comm. port have to be set keeping in mind the application for which the communication port is used. Each application can use its own settings.

How to program a Communication Port?Use following command to set data transfer rate (speed) of a comm. port:4501-Port-Speed

SMDR Report

Config Reports

Online SMDR Transfer

PMS Interface

Programming using a PC

COMM 1

COMM 2

Applications

Resources

Port Meaning

0 COM 1

1 COM 2



Matrix


Please note that maximum speed of the comm. port allowed in two-way communication like while programming through computer, programming through the Jeeves is 2400 bps only.

Use following command to set data-bits of a comm. port:4502-Port-Data Bi ts

Use following command to set the parity of a comm. port:4503-Port-Parity Parity Meaning

Use following command to set stop-bits a comm. port:4504-Port-Stop Bi ts

Use following command to set the flow-control a comm. port:4505-Port-Flow-Control

Example 1:Let us program COM1 with following parameters:

Speed Meaning

0 1200 bps

1 2400 bps

2 4800 bps

3 9600 bps

4 19200 bps5 38400 bps

6 57600 bps

7 11500 bps

Data Bits Meaning

0 7 data bits1 8 data bits

Parity Meaning

0 None

1 Odd

2 Even

3 Mark 4 Space

Stop Bits Meaning

0 1 stop bit

1 2 stop bits

Flow Control Meaning

0 None

1 Hardware (RTS/CTS)

2 Software (XON/XOFF)



Matrix


Speed = 9600 bpsData bits = 8 bitsParity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow control = None

Use following commands:4501-1-4 4502-1-1 4503-1-0 4504-1-0 4505-1-0

Example 2:Let us program COM2 with following parametersSpeed = 2400 bpsData bits = 7 bitsParity = Even

Stop bits = 2Flow control = Hardware (RTS/CTS)

Use following commands:4501-2-2 4502-2-0 4503-2-2 4504-2-1 4505-2-1

Following parameters for communication ports are recommended for computer connectivity or programmingthrough computer:

Speed = 9600 bpsData bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow control = None

How to Connect the Eternity with a Computer?The Eternity is capable of interfacing itself with a computer through RS232C ports. All PCs havecommunication ports called COM1 and COM2. The Eternity can communicate with the PC through COM1or COM2. Matrix provides optional communication cable for this purpose. Please contact matrix dealer or the company for the same. This communication cable is provided with DB-9 female connectors on bothends. You may connect any end to the Eternity and the other end to PC. If the PC comm. port is on DB-25connector, you have to use DB-25 to DB-9 converter. Such converters are easily available in the market.

Following diagram shows how Eternity is connected to a computer.



Matrix


Following diagram shows how two communication port applications can work simultaneously on the samecomputer.

Following table gives the pin-out details of the comm. ports.

Relevant topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)2. Configuration Reports3. PMS Interface in Eternity Hotel Manual4. Programming Using a Computer

=X=X=

COM 1

COM 2

Eternity

COM 1

Computer

RS-232

Communication

Cable

COM 1(PMS Interface)

COM 2 (OnlineSMDR Transfer)

Eternity

COM 1

Computer

RS-232

Communication

Cable

RS-232

Communication

Cable

COM 2

Pin No. Signal Name

1 Data carrier Detect (DTD)

2 Receive Data (RXD)

3 Transmit Date (TXD)

4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

5 Ground (GND)

6 Data Set Ready (DSR)

7 Request To Send (RTS)

8 Clear To Send (CTS)

9 Ring Indicator (IR)



Matrix


Conference-3 Party

What’s this?The Eternity allows two methods for conducting conferences:1. 3- party conference2. Multi-party conference.

3- Party conference is an easier and faster way to set up a conference. It does not allow more than 3 parties to be included in the conference. Whereas, multi party conference allows up to 24 parties in a conference.Please refer section “Conference-Multi Party” for more details.

3- Party conference can be conducted at a spur of the moment without much prior planning. If a user istalking to some one and he feels he should include a third person in his present talk and have a conference,he can do so without disconnecting his present talk. All he has to do is to hold present person, dial the third person and then dial conference code.

Following three combinations are allowed in 3-party conference• All three stations

• Two stations and one trunk • One station and two trunks

How it works?Flow chart on the next page explains these steps

How to program?Access of Conference is programmable. Hence it can be allowed or denied to each user. Please refer section“Class Of Service “for details on programming this feature.

How to use it?

1 3-way mode as described in call splitting2 DialFlash-0 3-way speech



Matrix


Start

Station A is speaking to Station B

They need to include Station C in their talk.

Station A puts Station B on hold. Staion A

gets feature tone. Station B gets music

Station A dials Station C

Station C answers the call. Station A and

Station C are in speech. This is a normal

situation occuring during a call transfer.

Station A dials flash-0 to activate

3-party conference

Station A, Station B and Station

C are in speech

Any station

disconnects ?

Remaining two station in

normal 2-way speech

Once again they can conduct a

conference with a new staion

End

Station A

dials flash ?

No

Yes

Station C goes on hold and gets music.

Station A and Station B remain in speech

Yes

No

This is normal situation occuring

during a call transfer

End



Matrix


It is possible to have Conference - UnsupervisedThis feature enables the operator to connect two trunks through the system and getting herself free from thediscussion. This feature is used quite often nowadays to connect two local lines which otherwise if try to talk would be charged at STD rates.Suppose I am at city A. My two colleagues are at city B and city C. City B and City C is charged at STDrates from each other. City B and City C are charged at local rates from city A. Now using this feature, I

being at City A can make conference with City B and City C and once in conversation, if I disconnect thenCity B and City C can talk at local rates.

How to use it?

For more details, please refer DISA. For more details, please refer “Call Splitting” and “Call Transfer”.

Relevant topics:1. Conference – Multi Party2. Class Of Service(COS)3. DISA

=X=X=

1 3-way mode as described in call splitting

2 DialFlash-0 3-way speech

3 Flash One of the trunks goes on hold. Operator is in speech with other trunk

4 Flash-8 Trunk1-Trunk2 speech



Matrix


Conference-Multi Party

What’s this?Telephonic conference is a useful facility because it saves time. It allows internal and external users to meetover the telephone without physically traveling to remote areas.

There are total 8 conferencing circuits in the system. The Eternity supports maximum of 24-party conference.As it employs digital conferencing circuits, the number of parties involved in a conference does not affect thespeech level.

How it works?For each conference, there is a master. This master is responsible for conducting the conference. He can

initiate a conference, include participants, disconnect participants and terminate the conference.

The master calls up a participant and informs him about the scheduled conference. Then master dials ‘flash’to put the participant on hold. The participant starts hearing music. Now, master dials conference inclusioncode. This way, the master contacts and includes all the participants. A participant can be an internal or external party.

Once all the participants are ready and waiting for the conference to begin, the master dials conferenceactivation code. With this, the master and all the participants are connected in speech mode. They can nowconverse among themselves.

The master can disconnect an internal participant any time by dialing disconnection code followed by thestation number from dial tone. But, he cannot disconnect an external participant mid-way. All the external participants can be disconnected only at the end of conference.

The master can terminate a conference by dialing termination code from dial tone. All the participants arereleased from the conference and the resources are freed for other users to conduct new conferences. Theinternal participants get error tone. Where as, the external trunks are released -whether incoming or outgoing.

Following flow chart high lights the conference logic.

Maximum conference participants 24

Maximum simultaneous conferences

(If all the conferences involve 3 parties)8

Maximum parties involve in conference

(If all 24 parties in a single conference)24



Matrix


Start

Master decides to hold

a tele-conference

He prepare a list of all the participants

to be included in the conference

Master contacts a participants

He informs the participants

about the planned conference

He dials flash. Participant gets music

Master dials conference inclusion

code. Master gets confirmation tone

The master goes on hook(idle) and then

off hook or waits for completion of

confirmation tone. Master gets dial tone.

Any more

participant to be

included ?

Yes

No

The master dials conference

activation code

Conference is activated. All can converse

The master decides to

involve a new participant

A

Conference

Initiation

Conference

Activation



Matrix


A

The master goes on-hook(idle). All

the persent praticipants get music.

The master contact the new praticipant

He informs the participant about the conference

He dials the Flash. New

participant also gets music.

Master dials conference inclusion code.

The master gets confirmatin tone

The master dials

conference activation code

Conference is once again activatred. All can

converse including the new participant.

The master decides to disconnect a participant

The master informs the participants

about the planned disconnection

The master goes on-hook(idle). All

the participants get music.

The master dials the conference

diaconnection code followed by the

internal participant's number

The master gets confirmation tone

and waits for completion of

confirmation tone or goes on-hook

The master dials conference is activation code

Once again the conference is activated.

All remaing participants can converse.

B

Include

a new

participant

Disconneting

a participant



Matrix


How to program?Access to Multiparty Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user.Refer section “Class Of Service” for details on programming of this feature.

How to use it?Suppose we want to make conference between Station A, Station B, Station C and Station D

The default conference inclusion code is 192The default conference activation code is 191The default conference termination code is 190The default conference exclusion code is 193-Station Flexible Number These codes are programmable. For more details, please refer “Access Codes”.

B

The master decides to

terminate the conference

Peaticipants exchange

"Good bye"

The master goes on-hook (idle)

All the participant get music

The master dials conference termination

code. He gets confrimation tone.

The master goes on-hook(idle)

End

Conference

Termination

1 Lift the handset (From Station A) Dial tone

2 DialStati on B Ring Back tone, Speech.

3 DialFlash Feature tone, Station B gets music

4 Dial192 Dial tone

5 DialStati on C Ring Back tone, Speech.

6 DialFlash Feature tone, Station C gets music

7 Dial192 Dial tone

8 DialStati on D Ring Back tone, Speech.

9 DialFlash Feature tone, Station D gets music

10 Dial192 Dial tone

11 Dial191 All in speech



Matrix


Timer of relevance:Conference Inclusion Wait Timer – Time after which the held up participant will get disconnected if notincluded by the Master.Command: 4001-Timer Range: 000 to 255 secondsDefault: 180 seconds

Few possible cases1. Multiparty conference among few stations.

2. Several MP conference among few Stations simultaneously.



Matrix


3. Multi party conferences between one trunk and few stations

4. Multiple conferences between few trunks and few stations.

5. Multiparty Conference between few trunks and one station



Matrix


6. Multiparty conference between few trunks and few stations only simultaneously.

Important points:• Any participant in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting the telephone.• If the master forgets to dial conference termination code at the end of the conference and disconnects the

phone then all the participants gets music. This music comes for conference inclusion wait timer. If a participant wants to exclude from this mode then he can simply disconnect the phone.

• It is possible to have Multiparty conference from a remote location also. Suppose you want to haveconference with your friends at Mumbai and Delhi but since it is a Sunday the office is closed. All youhave to do is:• Dial your office on a DISA enabled trunk. Call your Mumbai friend. Put him on hold by dialing “# -1”.

Please note that you do not dial ‘Flash’ to put the participant on hold, else the call will get disconnectedsince you are in DISA mode. Mumbai participant gets music. Dial conference inclusion code. You get

confirmation tone.Go on-hook (Dial # #)Go off-hook (Dial # *)Call your Delhi friend and include him in conference mode. Dial conference activation code. All canconverse. Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.

• During conference if Master decides to include station A in conference and dials station A and if station Ais busy then master can used Raid, Barge in or interrupt request feature and inform station A to disconnecthis existing call.

Relevant topics:1. Conference-3 Party2. Class of Service (COS)3. Access Codes

=X=X=



Matrix


Configuration Reports

What’s this?The Eternity supports printing of the systems’ configuration done through programming. The printing is donein the form of various reports. These reports are useful for:1. Verifying that the programming done is correct.

2. Storing them for future reference.

How it works?1. A configuration report can either be generated on standard printer or a computer.2. Configuration reports can be generated only after entering SA mode or the SE mode.3. There is a separate command for each configuration report.4. A configuration report can be of one or more pages.5. If a computer is selected as the reports’ destination, the reports can be archieved, printed or mailed.6. Pure ASCII text format is used for reports.7. No graphics are used.

How to use it?

Use following commands to assign a port where these reports are to be generated:4601-Port

Use following commands to take individual printouts:

Port Meaning

0 Null Port

1 COM 1

2 COM 2

3 Printer

Name Command

Print System parameters 5500

Print SMDR configuration 3600 Print CCC parameters 3800-1

Print Area Code Table 3800-2

Print Access Codes 4300

Print Help reports 4700

Print E&M parameters 5100

Print Time tables 1100

Print Hardware port configuration 1200

Print SLT parameters 1300-*

Print DKP parameters 1400-*

Print Trunk parameters 1600-*

Print Trunk access groups 1800

Print Allowed List and Denied List 6300

Print Trunk landing groups 2000

Print Global directory 2300

Print Voice message, DID and DISA parameters 3500

Print Floor service groups 5400



Matrix


Sample print outs of all above reports are attached in respective sections

=X=X=

Print Class of service groups 1700

Print Least Cost Routing groups 4800

Print paging zone 3100

Print Department groups 2400

Print DND list 2700

Print Ring Parameters 5800 Print CDC tables 6200

Print Calling Line Identification parameters 6100

Print Room Status Report 5450

Print Alarm Status Report 5440



Matrix


Continued Dialing

What’s this?• Continued Dialing allows a station to dial the desired external number, wait for the called party to answer

and then dial additional digits.• This helps users to access services like Auto Attendant, Voice Mail and Interactive Voice Response (IVR).

• This also helps in using Telco features like Call Waiting.

How to use it?

Important point:• Access to Continued Dialing is programmable. Please refer Class Of Service (COS) for details.

Example:To use Call Waiting facility of Telco exchange from any station, perform following steps:

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow continued dialing to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Flash Timer

=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk


3 Dial '#' Feature tone stopped

4 DialDesi red code

1 DialFlash-* This informs the system to pass following code

2 DialF lash - 2 Speech with second call


4 Dial F lash - 1 Speech with first call


6 DialF lash - 2 Speech with second call



Matrix


Customer Name

What is this?Customer’s name can be programmed. It appears on the Configuration/SMDR reports.A customer’s name can be of maximum 80 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuationmarks and spaces.

How to program?Customer name can be programmed from the DKP or using the JeevesUse following command to program the customer name:4408-Customer Name-Press <hold> key on the DKP Where,Customer name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 80).Use first 25 keys (DSS-64 Keys) and the ‘Hold’ key to enter the name. The alphabets are mapped to the keysas shown below:

Example:Program the customer name ‘Holiday Inn’4408-Holi day I nn (Now press ‘hold’ key of the DKP)

Use following command to clear the customer name:4407-#

If Tenant groups are formed then each tenant can be given its nameTenant name can be programmed from the DKP or using the Jeeves.Use following command to program the tenant name:4410-Tenant-Name Where,Tenant is from 0 to 7

Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 8).Use first 25 keys and the ‘Hold’ key to enter the name.

Example: Two companies ABC and XYZ share the same Eternity. Program their names.ABC is tenant 1 and XYZ is tenant 2.4410-1-ABC 4410-2-XYZ

A B C D E

F G H I J

K L M N O

P Q R S T

U V W X Y

1 2 3 Z

4 5 6 ‘Space’

7 8 9 ‘.’

* 0 # ‘Enter’

Not Used ‘&’ ‘-’ ‘,’



Matrix


Use following command to clear the tenant name:4409-Tenant-# Please note that if name programming is done from DKP then only in upper case letters will be used whereasif Jeeves is used then name can be either in either case.

Relevant topic:

1. Configuration Reports

=X=X=



Matrix


Department Call

What’s this?Many times it is required to call any one of the persons in a department (group). It is not important to talk toa particular person. The caller just wants any member of the group. Eternity offers flexibility to groupstations belonging to a particular department. This group is called department group. The call made to this

group using a code is called Department Call. The access code used to make such call is called Department Number. Hence now the caller has to dial only the Department Number. However the caller can accessindividual station of the group also by dialing the station number.

Department Call is allowed through DID call also. Hence if the caller is making a call to you for the firsttime and wants some information about your company then he may dial the Information Department insteadof dialing any particular station or waiting for the operator.

How it works?• Maximum 16 department groups can be formed. Groups are given numbers from 00 to 15.• Maximum 8 stations can be programmed in each department group.• Each station can either be a SLT or a DKP.

• The time for which each station rings can be programmed.• The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.• The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed.• Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station

continues ringing even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called “Continuous” ringingand can be programmed for each station.

• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from thefirst station once again.

• A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station or from the final station of the previous call. Thismethod is called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the freshcall will land on the destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equaldistribution of incoming calls to all the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled,the fresh call will always land on first station of the department group.

• Any station can answer the call.

How to use it?

Example:To access any of the free stations in a group 00, dial 3901.

How to program?

Step 1: Decide the number of department groups to be formed, define the station type of each station anddecide the sequence in which the stations should ring. Program these parameters using command 2402.

Step 2: Define ring timer for which each station should ring using command 2403.Step 3: Decide whether the station should get continuous ring and program it using command 2404.Step 4: Program the rotation type for the department group using command 2405.Step 5: Take the print out of the department group configuration using command 2400.Step 6: It is possible to default a department using command 2401.Step 7: Assign an access code to the department group using command


2 Dial Department Number Ring back tone (The call lands on the programmed station within the department group)



Matrix


Each group entry in the department group table looks like:

Commands:Step 1Use following command to program a department group:2402-1-Department Group-Destination I ndex-Station Type-Station Where,Department Group is from 00 to 15Destination Index is from 0 to 7Station Type and Station are

Step 2Use following command to program the time for which each destination in the group should ring:2403-1-Department Group-Destination I ndex-Seconds Where,Department Group is from 00 to 15Destination Index is from 0 to 7Seconds is 000 to 255

Step 3Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring for a destination in the group:2404-1-Department Group-Destination Index-Continuous Ring Where,Department Group is from 00 to 15Destination Index is from 0 to 7

Step 4Use following command to program rotation method of a department group:2405-1-Department Group-Rotation method Where,Department Group is from 00 to 15

Dest1 Dest2 Dest3 Dest4 Dest5 Dest6 Dest7 Dest8

Station Type

Station Number

Ring Timer

Latched Ring Flag

Remember Last Destination

Station Type Meaning Staiton

00 Null Port --01 SLT Port 000-255

02 DKP Port 000-127

Continuous Ring Meaning

0 The station rings for the time set

1 The station rings till the call matures

Rotation Method Meaning

0 Fresh call lands on the first station within the group

1 Fresh call lands following the rotation method



Matrix


Step 5Use following command to take the print out of the Department Group configuration:2400

Step 6Use following command to assign default stations to a department groups:

2401-1-Department Group-# Where,Department Group is from 00 to 15

Step 7How to assign an access code of your choice to Department group?Department number is an access code dialed from the dial phase to call a department group. There aremaximum 16 department groups. Each department group access code must be unique and should not matchwith either SLT station number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial phase.

A typical table for default access codes for the department groups looks like:

Use following command to program the access code for a department number:4304-1-Department Group Index-F lexible code-# Where,Department Group Index is a 3-digit number from 000 to 015.Access Code is of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the access code for a department group:4304-1-Department Group Index-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for a range of department groups:4304-2-Depar tment Group I ndex-Department Group I ndex-#

Department Group Index Access Codes

000 3901

001 3902

002 3903

003 3904

004 3905

005 3906

006 3907

007 3908

008 3909

009 3910010 3911

011 3912

012 3913

013 3914

014 3915

015 3916



Matrix


Use following command to clear the access code for all department groups:4304-*-#

Use following command to assign default access codes for all department groups:4354-*-# It is recommended to use default codes.

Example:Program the system for following constraints.• Marketing department in a company has four stations viz. 201, 202, 203 and 204 (S/w ports (000, 001, 002

and 003).• 201 and 202 are SLTs whereas 203 and 204 are DKPs.• The stations should ring in a sequence viz. 201, 202, 203, 204.• First 201 should ring for 20 seconds.• If no reply, 201 should continue and 202 should ring for 10 seconds.• If still no reply, 201 should continue and 203 should ring for 15 seconds.• If still no reply, 201 should continue and 204 should ring for 20 seconds.• Call traffic should be distributed equally on all four destinations.

• Assign access code 51 to access this group.

Use following commands:2402-1-01-1-01-000 2402-1-01-2-01-001 2402-1-01-3-02-002 2402-1-01-4-02-003 2403-1-01-1-020.2403-1-01-2-010 2403-1-01-3-015 2403-1-01-4-020

2404-1-01-1-1 2404-1-01-2-0 2404-1-01-3-0 2404-1-01-4-0

2405-1-01-1

4304-1-51-#


Program a station in a department group 2402-1-Department Group-Desti nati on Index- Stati on Type-Stat ion

Program same stations for a range of department groups 2402-2-Department Group-Department Group-

Desti nati on I ndex-Stati on Type-Stati on

Program same stations for all department groups 2402-* -Desti nati on I ndex-Stati on Type-Stati on

Program the ring timer for a station in the department group 2403-1-Department group-Desti nati on Index-

Seconds



Matrix


Default commands

Relevant topics:1. Trunk Landing Groups2. Time Tables

3. DISA

Program continuous or non-continuous ring for station with

same destination index in all the Department groups

2404-* -Desti nati on Index-Conti nuous Ring

Program rotation method for station with same destination

index in all the Department groups

2405-* -Desti nati on Index-Rotati on

Program rotation method for a station in a department

group.

2405-1-Department group-Desti nati on Index-

Rotation

Program rotation method for station with same destination

index in a range of Department group.

2405-2-Department group-Department group-

Desti nati on Index-Rotati on

Program continuous or non-continuous ring for station in a

Department group.

2404-1-Department group-Desti nati on Index-

Continuous Rin g Program continuous or non-continuous ring for station with

same destination index in a range of Department group.


Desti nati on I ndex-Conti nuous Ring

Program the ring timer for station with same destination

index for all the Department group.

2403-* -Desti nati on Index-Seconds

Program the ring timer for stations with same destination

index in a range of Department group


Desti nat i on Index-Seconds

Assign default stations to a department group 2401-1-Department Group-#

Assign default stations to a range of department groups 2401-2-Department Group-Department Group-#

Assign default stations to all department groups 2401-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

DEPARTMENT GROUPS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:30

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Destinations (Type-Port) Rot

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Group 00: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010

Cont. Ring OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Group 01: - - - - - - - - OFFRing Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 02: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 03: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 04: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 05: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010




Group 07: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 08: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 09: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 10: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010




Group 12: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 13: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 14: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


Group 15: - - - - - - - - OFF

Ring Timer 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Eternity V1R1 Page: 01



Matrix


Digital Key Phone-Operation

What’s this?Matrix offers Eon-45, a digital key phone (DKP). Eon-45 is a feature-rich, easy to use station with followingcharacteristics:1. 2-line X 16 character LCD

2. Total 45 Keys3. Total 20 direct station selection (DSS) Keys.4. Total 13 Feature keys.5. Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green Led gives the status for called station ringing (Green LED

blinks), in speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). Red Led indicates variousstatuses like going off-hook, internal dialing, dialing on trunk, on hold, Other two stations in speech, etc.

6. Hands free operation7. Adjustable ringer type and level8. Adjustable speech levels.

As shown below, maximum of 128 Eon-45 can be connected to the Eternity.

For more operating details on the Eon-45, please refer “Eon-45 user’s card”. Eon-45 user card is suppliedwith each Eon-45.

Please note that DKP and Eon-45 are synonymous and are used interchangeably.



Matrix


Sketch of Eon-45

Direct Station Selection Console (DSS-64) is an easy to use console with following characteristics:1. Total 64 Keys, which can be used for direct station selection or for using any feature.2. Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green Led gives the status for called station ringing (Green LED

blinks), in speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). Red Led indicates variousstatuses like going off-hook, internal dialing, dialing on trunk, on hold, Other two stations in speech, etc.

The Eternity treats the DSS-64 as one of the station types as it does in case of SLT. For more details, pleaserefer “Direct Station Selection Console”.

The Eternity treats the DKP/Console as one of the station types as it does in case of SLT. All the features areavailable from DKP. In fact, DKP being a more powerful station, it supports many additional features, whichare not supported by a SLT. Few of them are:1. LCD Messages2. Status of other ports3. Feature keys4. Ringer type selection5. Speech level controls6. Paging



Matrix


Hence, DKP features are superset of SLT features as shown in the following diagram.

How to use it?Maximum 128 DKPs can be connected to the Eternity. One DLC (Digital Line Card) can accommodatemaximum of 08 DKPs. Hence 16 DLCs should be used if all 128 DKPs are to be connected.The Eternity supports 4 built-in DKP ports viz. DKP1, DKP2, DKP3 and DKP4. These ports are located onthe switch card and the connectors for these ports are available on the front facial panel of the switch card.For more details on switch card, please refer “Eternity-Installation Manual”.

Hence if it is required to connect less number of DKPs then one may use the In-built DKP ports only.Please note that if four In-built ports are used then maximum of 124 DKPs can be connected using DLC ports. Remaining four ports in last DLC will remain vacant.

How to program?Step1: Assign a hardware ID to the DKP software ports using command 1202.Step2: Assign the Flexible numbers to access these DKPs using command 4302 .Step3: Program the call loops for a DKP port using command 1401 .Step4: Program ringer tone, ringer volume, ringer mode and ringer auto acknowledge using commands 1402,

1403,1404 and 1406.Step5: Program the transmit and receive volume of the handset using commands 1408 and 1409 .Step6: Program the transmit and receive volume of the speaker and the microphone using commands 1410

and 1411.Step7: Program the personal settings for each DKP. Train each DKP user on how to change the personal

settings and how to use DKP.Step8: Use command 5704 to make DKP Absent/Present.Step9: Use command 5703 to lock/unlock DKP keypad.Step10: Use command 1420 to assign default setting to a DKP.Step11: Use command 1421 to copy parameters of one DKP to other DKP/DKPs

Step 1Please refer “Software Port and Hardware ID” for details.Use following command if In-built DKP ports are to be used:1202-1-DKP-32-Port Off set DKP is any software port number from 000-127.32 is the Slot Number (Fixed) of the switch card.Port Offset is from 00-03 on the card.Hence,For DKP1 use command 1202-1-DKP-32-00For DKP2 use command 1202-1-DKP-32-01For DKP3 use command 1202-1-DKP-32-02For DKP4 use command 1202-1-DKP-32-03



Matrix


Step 2Please refer “Flexible Numbers” to know how to assign a Flexible number to the DKP.

Step 3Call LoopsA DKP can handle more than one call at a time. This is useful for operator stations where many calls can

land simultaneously. Executives who use their telephones extensively need to manage more callssimultaneously. The Call Loop logic is elaborated in following points:

If call loop = 1, only one call can land at a time. The second caller will get busy tone. This is similar to SLToperation.If call loop = 2, the second caller also lands successfully and gets ring back tone. The user can use the loopkeys to attend to both the callers alternately.

A DKP must be assigned loop keys equal to the number of call loops.An operator can be assigned optimum number of loops depending on the traffic.

Following table gives recommended loops for different configurations:

Generally, an operator should not be loaded with more than 8 simultaneous calls. The Eternity supportsmaximum of 10 loops.

Use following command to program Call Loops for DKP stations:1401-1-DKP-Loops Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationLoops = Number of Call Loops from 01 to 10

Step 4Ringer ToneThe Eternity supports programmable ringer tones. Each DKP user can select ringer tone of his choice. Thereare 10 different ringer tones to choose from.Use following commands to set the ringer tone:1402-1-DKP-Tone Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationTone = Tone Number from 0 to 9

Ringer VolumeThe Eternity supports programmable ringer volume. Each DKP user can select ringer volume of his choice.There are 10 different ringer volume levels to choose from.



Matrix


Use following commands to set the ringer tone:1403-1-DKP-Volume Level Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationVolume Level = Ringer Volume Level from 0 to 9

Ringer ModeThe Eternity supports programmable ringer mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP should start.There are four options:1. Ring immediately as soon as a fresh calls lands on the DKP2. Ring only if the DKP is idle and not doing some activity3. Ring after a delay if the call is still not answered4. Ring always off (Silence mode)Each DKP user can select ringer mode of his choice.

Use following commands to program the ringer mode:1404-1-DKP-Ringer Mode Where,

DKP = Software port number of the DKP station

Ringer Delay TimerIf delayed ringer mode is selected for a DKP, the Eternity supports programmable timer. This is calledDelayed Ring Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice. This timer is programmable inthe range from 00 to 99 seconds.

Use following commands to program the ringer timer:1405-1-DKP-Ri nger Timer Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationTimer = Delayed Ring Timer from 000 to 255 seconds

Ringer Auto AcknowledgeThe Eternity supports programmable ringer acknowledge mode. This mode decides when the ring on theDKP should stop. There are two options:1. Stop only when the call is answered or manually acknowledged2. Stop after delayEach DKP user can select ringer acknowledge mode of his choice.

Use following commands to program the acknowledge mode:1406-1-DKP-Acknowledge Mode Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP station

Ringer Mode Meaning

0 Ring immediately

1 Ring if idle

2 Ring after delay

3 Ring off

Mode Meaning

0 Auto Acknowledge Off

1 Auto Acknowledge On



Matrix


Ringer Auto Acknowledge TimerIf Auto Acknowledge mode is selected for a DKP, the Eternity supports programmable timer. This is calledAuto Acknowledge Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice. This timer is programmable in the range from 00 to 99 seconds.Use following commands to program the acknowledge timer:1407-1-DKP-Acknowledge Timer

Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationTimer = Auto Acknowledge Timer from 00 to 99 seconds

Step 5Handset volumeIt is possible to vary the handset volume (transmit speech and receive speech) level.Use following command to set the handset transmit volume level:1408-1-DKP-Handset Transmit Speech Volume level Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationHandset Transmit Volume Level is from 0 to 9

Use following command to set the handset receive volume level:1409-1-DKP-Handset Receive Speech Volume level Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationHandset Receive Volume Level is from 0 to 9

Step 6Hands-free speaker/microphone settingsIt is possible to change the speaker volume level.Use following command to set handsfree microphone transmit speech volume level:1410-1-DKP-H andsfr ee Microphone Transmit Speech Volume level

Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationHandsfree Microphone Transmit Speech Volume Level is from 0 to 9

Use following command to set the handsfree speaker receive speech volume level:1411-1-DKP-Handsfree Speaker Receive Speech Volume level Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP stationHandsfree Speaker Receive Speech Volume Level is from 0 to 9

Step 7DKP Personal SettingsEach DKP user can have his personal settings of his choice. The user can program these settings to suit hisneeds and taste. There is a menu provided from the DKP for changing these settings.



Matrix


User StatusUser PresentUser Absent

Ringer ControlsRinger type (0-9)Ringer volume (0-9)

Ringer modeRing ImmediateRing if IdleRing After Delay (00-99 Seconds)Ring off

Ringer AcknowledgeAcknowledge on (00-99 seconds)Acknowledge off Speech Controls

Handset Receive Speech Volume Level (0-9)Handset Transmit Speech Volume Level (0-9)Handsfree Speaker Receive Speech Volume Level (0-9)

Handsfree Microphone Transmit Speech Volume Level (0-9)

SecurityKeypad

-lock -open

Change Password

To Change DKP personal settings, you need to navigate through the menu. Three keys are used for navigation.• ‘Func’ key is used to go one-step back. It is analogous to ‘ESC’ of the computer keyboard.• ‘Vol’ key has two in–built keys. Left side of the key is used to decrement values (we call it ‘Dec’) and

right side of the key is used to increment values (we call it ‘inc’). It is analogous to ‘down arrow’ and ‘uparrow’ key of the computer keyboard.

• ‘Hold’ key is used to enter a submenu. It is analogous to enter key of computer keyboard.

Please note that navigation is protected by user password. Hence only authorized person can change the DKP personal settings. However, it is mandatory to change default user password to navigate through the DKP.Default user password does not allow navigation through DKP.

Step 8DKP Absent/PresentIt is possible to make a DKP present/absent from SA/SE modeUse following command to make DKP Absent/Present:5704-1-DKP-Code

Step 9DKP Keypad Unlock/Lock It is possible to lock/unlock the DKP keypad from SA/SE mode

Code Meaning

0 DKP Absent

1 DKP Present



Matrix


Use following command to lock/unlock the DKP keypad:5703-1-DKP-lock/unlock

Step 10Use following command to assign default settings to the DKP:1420-1-DKP-#

Step 11Use following command to copy parameters of one DKP to other DKP:1421-1-Sour ce DKP-Destination DKP

Wild cardsRange commandsCall Loops

Ringer Tones

Ringer Volume

Ringer Mode

Ringer Delay Timer

Code Meaning

0 DKP Keypad Unlock

1 DKP Keypad Lock

Program Call Loops for one DKP port 1401-1-DKP-Loops Program Call Loops for a range of DKP ports 1401-2-DKP-DKP-Loops

Program Call Loops for all DKP ports 1401-* -Loops

Program Ringer Tone for one DKP port 1402-1-DKP-Tone

Program Ringer Tone for a range of DKP ports 1402-2-DKP-DKP-Tone

Program Ringer Tone for all DKP ports 1402 -* -Tone

Program Ringer Volume for one DKP port 1403-1-DKP-Level

Program Ringer Volume for a range of DKP ports 1403-2-DKP-DKP-Level

Program Ringer Volume for all DKP ports 1403-* -Level

Program Ringer Mode for one DKP port 1404-1-DKP-Mode

Program Ringer Mode for a range of DKP ports 1404-2-DKP-DKP-Mode

Program Ringer Mode for all DKP ports 1404-* - Mode

Ringer Delay Timer for one DKP port 1405-1-DKP-Timer

Ringer Delay Timer for a range of DKP ports 1405-2-DKP-DKP-Timer

Ringer Delay Timer for all DKP ports 1405-* -Timer



Matrix


Acknowledge Mode for one DKP port 1406-1-DKP-Mode

Acknowledge Mode for a range of DKP ports 1406-2-DKP-DKP-Mode

Acknowledge Mode for all DKP ports 1406-*-DKP-Mode

Auto Acknowledge Timer for one DKP port 1407-1-DKP-Timer

Auto Acknowledge Timer for a range of DKP ports 1407-2-DKP-DKP-Timer

Auto Acknowledge Timer for all DKP ports 1407-* -Timer

Handset transmit volume level for a DKP 1408-1-DKP-level

Handset transmit volume level for range of DKPs 1408-2-DKP-DKP-level

Handset transmit volume level for all DKPs 1408-* -l evel

Handset receive volume level for a DKP 1409-1-DKP-level

Handset receive volume level for a range of DKPs 1409-2-DKP-DKP-level

Handset receive volume level for all DKPs 1409-* -l evel

Speaker transmit volume level for a DKP 1410-1-DKP-level

Speaker transmit volume level for a range of DKPs 1410-2-DKP-DKP-level

Speaker transmit volume level for all DKPs 1410-* -l evel

Microphone receive volume level for a DKP 1411-1-DKP-level

Microphone receive volume level for a range of DKPs 1411-2-DKP-DKP-level

Microphone receive volume level for all DKPs 1411-* -l evel

Make a DKP absent/Present 5704-1-DKP-Code

Make a range of DKPs absent/present 5704-2-DKP-DKP-Code

Make all the DKPs absent/present 5704-* -Code

Make a DKP absent/Present 5704-1-DKP-Code

Make a range of DKPs absent/present 5704-2-DKP-DKP-Code

Make all the DKPs absent/present 5704-* -Code

Ringer Acknowledge Mode

Auto Acknowledge timer

Handset Transmit Volume Level

Handset Receive Volume Level

Speaker Transmit Volume Level

Microphone Receive Volume Level

DKP Absent/Present

DKP Keypad Lock/Unlock



Matrix


Assign default Call Loops for one DKP port 1401-1-DKP-#

Assign default Call Loops for a range of DKP ports 1401-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Call Loops for all DKP ports 1401-* -#

Assign default Ringer Tone for one DKP port 1402-1-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Tone for a range of DKP ports 1402-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Tone for all DKP ports 1402-* -#

Assign default Ringer Volume for one DKP port 1403-1-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Volume for a range of DKP ports 1403-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Volume for all DKP ports 1403-* -#

Assign default Ringer Mode for one DKP port 1404-1-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Mode for a range of DKP ports 1404-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Mode for all DKP ports 1404-* -#

Assign default Ringer Delay Timer for one DKP port 1405-1-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Delay Timer for a range of DKP ports 1405-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Ringer Delay Timer for all DKP ports 1405-* -#

Assign default Acknowledge Mode for one DKP port 1406-1-DKP-#

Assign default Acknowledge Mode for a range of DKP ports 1406-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Acknowledge Mode for all DKP ports 1406-*-DKP-#

Assign default Auto Acknowledge Timer for one DKP port 1407-1-DKP-#

Assign default Auto Acknowledge Timer for a range of DKP ports 1407-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Auto Acknowledge Timer for all DKP ports 1407-* -#

Assign default Handset transmit volume level for a DKP 1408-1-DKP-#

Assign default Handset transmit volume level for range of DKPs 1408-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Handset transmit volume level for all DKPs 1408-* -#

Default CommandsCall Loops

Ringer Tones

Ringer Volume

Ringer Mode

Ringer Delay Timer

Ringer Acknowledge Mode

Auto Acknowledge Timer

Handset Transmit Volume Level



Matrix


Assign default Handset receive volume level for a DKP 1409-1-DKP-#

Assign default Handset receive volume level for a range of DKPs 1409-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Handset receive volume level for all DKPs 1409-* -#

Assign default Microphone transmit volume level for a DKP 1410-1-DKP-#

Assign default Microphone transmit volume level for a range of

DKPs

1410-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Microphone transmit volume level for all DKPs 1410-* -#

Assign default Speaker receive volume level for a DKP 1411-1-DKP-#

Assign default Speaker receive volume level for a range of DKPs 1411-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default Speaker receive volume level for all DKPs 1411-* -#

Assign default configuration to a DKP 1420-1-DKP-#

Assign default configuration to range of DKPs 1420-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default configuration to all DKPs 1420-* -#

Copy DKP parameters from one DKP to other DKP 1421-1-Source DKP-Destination

DKP

Copy DKP parameters from one DKP to range of DKPs 1421-2-Source DKP-Destination

DKP-Destination DKP Copy DKP parameters from one DKP to all other DKPs 1421-* -Source DKP

Handset Receive Volume Level

Microphone Transmit Volume Level

Speaker Receive Volume Level

Default Configuration

Copy Commands

=X=X=



Matrix


Digital Key Phone-Basic Parameters

What’s this?When the system is programmed and it is required to know the settings of a DKP, it is desired to have theconfiguration reports of the DKP. Eternity provides the configuration reports for individual DKP, for range of DKPs and for all DKPs.

Eternity also provides the flexibility to assign default configuration to DKPs.It is possible to copy DKP parameters of one DKP to other DKP/DKPs.

Print configurationUse following command to print configuration reports of DKP:1400-1-DKP Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127A configuration report of a DKP is attached herewith

Use following command to print configuration reports of range of DKPs:1400-2-DKP-DKP

Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127

Use following command to print configuration reports of all DKPs:1400-* Please note that the Eternity prints configuration report of each DKP on a separate page.

Default configurationUse following command to default the configuration of DKP:1420-1-DKP Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127

Use following command to default configuration of range of DKPs:1420-2-DKP-DKP Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127

Use following command to default configuration of all DKPs:1420-*-#

On giving this command, following parameters will be assigned default values:• Name assigned to the DKP will be cleared

• Key Pad will Open• DKP goes present• Default Tenant Group i.e. 0 will be assigned• Default Priority i.e. 0 will be assigned• Default COS Group i.e. 02 will be assigned• Default Guest Group i.e. 99 will be assigned• Default Allowed Toll Control Group i.e. 01 and default Denied Toll Control Group i.e. 01 will be

assigned.• Default Dynamic Allowed Toll Control group i.e. 00 and default dynamic Denied Toll Control Group i.e

00 will be assigned.



Matrix


• Default Trunk Access Group will be assigned• Default Time Table will be assigned• Default Pick Up Group will be assigned• Default Operator will be assigned (000th station is the default Operator)• Default Floor Service Destination will be assigned• DND list will get cleared

• Personal Alarm Voice Message assignment will be cleared• DKP will go to checked out status

Copy parametersUse following command to copy the DKP parameters of one DKP to other DKP:1421-1-Sour ce DKP-Destination DKP Where,Source DKP is the DKP station whose parameters are to be copiedDestination DKP is the DKP station where parameters of the source DKP are to be copied.

Use following commands to copy DKP parameters of one DKP to a range of DKPs:1421-2-Sour ce DKP-Destination DKP- Destination DKP

Where,Source DKP is the DKP station whose parameters are to be copiedDestination DKP is the DKP station where parameters of the source DKP are to be copied.

Use following command to copy the DKP parameters of one DKP to all other DKPs:1421-*-Source DKP Where,Source DKP is the DKP station whose parameters are to be copiedDestination DKP is the DKP station where parameters of the source DKP are to be copied.

Timers of RelevanceInternal Digit-Digit Wait Timer

While dialing a DKP or a SLT, the system waits for some time. This timer is called Internal Digit-Digit waittimer. During this time the user does not hear any tone. If the user does not dial another digit during this timethen the system gives error tone.

Use following command to program the Internal Digit-Digit Wait timer:Command: 5220 – Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds



Matrix


DIGITAL KEY PHONE PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Software Port Number : 000

Hardware Slot-Port : 32-00

Attachment1 Slot-Port : First - None

Attachment2 Slot-Port : Second - None

Flexible Number : 3001

Name :Tenant Number : 0

Priority : 0

Guest Group : 99

Call Pick-Up Group : 00

Operator : 3001 DKP-000

Secondary Operator : 3001 DKP-000

Call Capacity : 04

Key Click : ON

Floor Service Group : 00

Do Not Disturb List : 00

Dynamic Toll Control Lists : Allowed - 00 Denied - 00

Alarm Voice Module Number : -

Call Budget Current Amount : 0

Call Budget Total Amount : 500

Call Budget Over : NOCall Budget Toll Control List : Allowed - 00 Denied - 00

Call Duration Control(CDC)Table : 0

TimeTable : 0

Ringer Mode : Immediate Ring

Ring Auto Acknowledge : OFF Timer = 10 seconds

Delayed Ring Timer : 10 seconds

User : Present

Keypad : Open

Handset Receive Volume Level : 5

Handset Transmit Volume Level : 5

Handsfree Receive Volume Level : 5

Handsfree Transmit Volume Level : 5

Ringer Tone Type : 1

Ringer Volume Level : 5

Time Zones --> Working Hours Break Hours Non-Working Hours

Class Of Service(COS) Group : 02 02 02

Toll Control Allowed List : 01 01 01

Toll Control Denied List : 01 01 01

Trunk Access Group : 0 5 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

Working Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Break Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Non-Working Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


PERSONAL DIRECTORY NUMBERS (3001) AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 001

002 003

004 005

006 007008 009

010 011

012 013

014 015

016 017

018 019

020 021

022 023

024 025

026 027

028 029

030 031

032 033

034 035

036 037038 039

040 041

042 043

044 045

046 047

048 049

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


If a DSS-64 is attached to the DKP then on giving this command, the location of DSS key and the LED on

DSS-64 will also be printed.

=X=X=

DIGITAL KEY PHONE PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LOCATION OF KEYS AND LEDS ON DIGITAL KEY PHONE (MAIN)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 Lop000 Lop000 01 Lop001 Lop001 02 Lop002 Lop002 03 Lop003 Lop003

04 FEA039 - 05 SLT000 SLT000 06 SLT001 SLT001 07 SLT002 SLT002

08 SLT003 SLT003 09 FEA017 FEA017 10 DKP000 DKP000 11 DKP001 DKP00112 DKP002 DKP002 13 DKP003 DKP003 14 FEA007 FEA007 15 TRK004 TRK004

16 TRK005 TRK005 17 TRK006 TRK006 18 TRK007 TRK007 19 FEA002 FEA002

20 TRK000 TRK000 21 TRK001 TRK001 22 TRK002 TRK002 23 TRK003 TRK003

24 FEA004 FEA004 25 Dig1 - 26 Dig2 - 27 Dig3 -

28 FEA003 - 29 Dig4 - 30 Dig5 - 31 Dig6 -

32 FEA005 - 33 Dig7 - 34 Dig8 - 35 Dig9 -

36 Xfer - 37 * - 38 Dig0 - 39 # -

40 Hold - 41 Fun - 42 Up - 43 Down -

44 Spk -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming

What’s this?It is possible to program the nature of the function that the DSS keys can perform. It is possible that on pressing a key a particular station is accessed or a particular trunk is accessed or a feature is activated, etc.Similarly, it is also possible to program the LEDs to show the status of the ports.

Soft Keys (Programmable keys)The Eternity supports 25 programmable keys on the Eon-45 and 64 programmable keys on the DSS-64. Alocation can be programmed to perform any function. This flexibility is useful in following situations:1. Any key of these 25 (or 25 + 64) keys can be programmed to access any station.2. Different users can program these keys to access different stations of their choice.3. Desirable and frequently used features can be accessed at a single touch.

A Key can be programmed to perform any function. There are two attributes of a key:1. Physical location where the key is situated.2. Function the key should perform.

Following diagram shows this relationship.

Physical location of a key is fixed as under:1. Each key has fixed 2-digit location2. Location starts with 003. Top-left location is always 004. Location is incremented row wise.

5. Once all the keys of a row are done, roll over to the next row.

Location numbers for the keys of the Eon-45 and the DSS-64 are given below:



Matrix


Eon-45Following diagram shows logical representation of physical locations of the keys available on the Eon-45.

DSS-64

Please note that the shaded key location can only be programmed

Soft LEDs (Programmable LEDs)

An LED can be programmed to indicate status of any port or function. There are two attributes of an LED:1. Physical location where the LED is situated2. Port or function whose status the LED should display

Following diagram shows this relationship.

00 01 02 03 04

05 06 07 08 09

10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28

29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36

37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63



Matrix


Physical location of a LED is fixed as under:1. Each key has fixed 2-digit location2. Location starts with 003. Top-left location is always 004. Location is incremented row wise.5. Once all the keys of a row are done, roll over to the next row.

Location numbers for the LEDs on the Eon-45 and the DSS-64 are given below:

Eon-45Following diagram shows logical representation of physical locations of the LEDs available on the Eon-45.

DSS-64

Please note that the shaded LED location can only be programmed

Hence, location A is actually made up of two entities – Key and LED indicator.

00 01 02 03 04

05 06 07 08 09

10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28

29 30 31 32

33 34 35 3637 38 39 40

41 42 43 44

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 5556 57 58 59 60 61 62 63



Matrix


How to program?The Eternity provides separate commands for programming a location:1. Key programming command2. LED programming command.

Key programming

Use following command to assign a function to a DKP key:1501-1-DKP-Key Location-Function Type- F unction Number Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127Key Location is from 00 to 24Function Type is from 00 to 12 as shown in the table belowFunction Number depending on the Function Type

Use following command to assign a function to a key of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1502-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-F unction Type- Function Number Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127

DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2Key Location is from 00 to 63Function Type is from 00 to 12 as shown in the table belowFunction Number depending on the Function Type

You can use copy commands to copy the Key map of one DKP to other DKPs

Function:A function should be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. There are 12 different types of functions, which can be assigned to a key. Each function that can be assigned to a key is given uniquenumber. Following table lists all the function types available:

Function Type Meaning Function Range

0 Null ---

1 Access a SLT Port 000-255

2 Access a DKP Port 000-127

3 Access a Trunk 000-127

4 Trunk Access codes 000-009

5 Department Group 000-015

6 AOP 000-016

7 AIP 000-016

8 DOP 000-015

9 DIP 000-01510 Tenant 000-007

11 Loop 000-009

12 Features 000-033



Matrix


Function Type 12: Features

Feature Name Function Number Key Programming?

Call Pick Up - General 000 Yes

Call Pick Up - Selective 001 Yes

Auto Call back 002 Yes

Redial 003 Yes

Auto Redial 004 Yes

Memory dialing 005 Yes

Operator dialing 006 Yes

Call forward/Call follow me 007 Yes

Dynamic lock 008 Yes

Hot line 009 Yes

Alarms 010 Yes

DND 011 Yes

Interrupt Request 012 Yes

Barge In 013 Yes

Raid 014 YesTrunk Reservation 015 Yes

Held Toggle 016 Yes

Conference (3 Party) 017 Yes

Conference (24 party) 018 Yes

Call Park 019 Yes

Room Monitor 020 Yes

Personal Memory Programming 021 Yes

Last Caller Recall 022 Yes

Personal Alarm message Record 023 Yes

Voice Help 024 YesWalk In Class of Service 025 Yes

Override 026 Yes

Enter SE Mode 027 Yes

Enter SA Mode 028 Yes

Change User password 029 Yes

Floor Service 030 Yes

Page Zone 031 Yes

Room Clean 032 Yes

Room Status 033 Yes

Cancel All Features 034 Yes

Flashing on trunk 035 Yes

User not Available 036 Yes

Account Code 037 Yes

Background Music 038 Yes

Flash Key 039 Yes

Answer Key 040 Yes

Release Key 041 Yes

Acknowledge Key 042 Yes



Matrix


LED ProgrammingUse following command to assign a function to a DKP LED:1511-1-DKP-LED Location-Function Type- Function Number Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127LED Location = LED Location from 00 to 24

Type = Function Type from 00 to 12 as shown in the table below Number = Function Number depending on the Function Type

Use following command to assign a function to a LED of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1512-1-DKP-DSS-LED Location-Function Type- Function Number Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2LED location = LED Location from 00 to 63Type = Function Type from 00 to 12 as shown in the table below Number = Function Number depending on the Function TypeYou can use copy commands to copy the LED map of one DKP to other DKPs

Function:A function should be assigned to these LED, which they should indicate. There are 12 different types of functions, which can be assigned to a LED. Each function that can be assigned to a LED is given uniquenumber. Following table lists all the function types available:

Function Type 12: Features

Function Type Meaning Function Range

0 Null ---

1 SLT 000-255

2 DKP 000-127

3 Trunk 000-127

4 Trunk Access Group ---

5 Department Group ---

6 AOP 000-016

7 AIP 000-016

8 DOP 000-015

9 DIP 000-015

10 Tenant ---

11 Loop 000-009

12 Features 000-038

Feature Name Function Number LED Programming?

Call Pick Up - General 0 No

Call Pick Up - Selective 1 No

Auto Call back 2 Yes

Redial 3 No

Auto Redial 4 Yes



Matrix



Key ProgrammingFor DKP keys

Memory dialing 5 No

Operator dialing 6 No

Call forward/Call follow me 7 Yes

Dynamic lock 8 Yes

Hot line 9 Yes

Alarms 10 YesDND 11 Yes

Interrupt Request 12 No

Barge In 13 No

Raid 14 No

Trunk Reservation 15 Yes

Held Toggle 16 No

Conference (3 Party) 17 No

Conference (24 party) 18 No

Call Park 19 No

Room Monitor 20 No

Personal Memory Programming 21 No

Last Caller Recall 22 No

Personal Alarm message 23 No

Voice Help 24 No

Walk In Class of Service 25 No

Override 26 No

Enter SE Mode 27 No

Enter SA Mode 28 No

Change User password 29 No

Floor Service 30 No

Page Zone 31 No

Room Clean 32 No

Cancel All Features 33 No

Back Ground Music 38 Yes

Flash 39

For a DKP, set key function 1501-1-DKP-Key-Type-Number

For a range of DKP, set a key’s function 1501-2-DKP-DKP-Key-Type-Number

For all DKP, set a key’s function 1501-* -Key-Type-Number



Matrix


For DSS-64 keys

LED ProgrammingFor DKP LEDs

For DSS-64 LEDs

Copy CommandsDKP Key Map

DKP LED Map

Please note that on issuing copy commands, the Key Map and LED Map of DSS-64-64 (if attached) also getscopied from one DKP to other.

Default commandsKey Programming

For a DKP, set key function for its DSS-64 1502-1-DKP-DSS-Key-Type-Number

For a range of DKP, set a key function for DSS-64 1501-2- DKP-DKP-DSS-Key-Type-Number

For all DKPs, set a key function for its DSS-64 1501-* -DSS-Key-Type-Number

For a DKP, set LED function 1511-1-DKP-LED-Type-Number

For a range of DKP, set a LED’s function 1511-2-DKP-DKP-LED-Type-Number

For all DKP, set a LED’s function 1511-* -LED -Type-Number

For a DKP, set LED function for its DSS-64 1512-1-DKP-DSS-LED -Type-Number

For a range of DKP, set a LED function for its DSS-

64

1512-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-LED-Type-Number

For all DKPs, set a LED function for its DSS-64 1512-* -DSS-LED -Type-Number

Copy entire key map from one DKP to another 1504-1-Source DKP-Desti nati on DKP

Copy entire key map from one DKP to a range DKP 1504-2 Source DKP-Dest inat ion1 DKP-

Desti nati on2 DKP

Copy entire key map from one DKP to all other DKP 1504-* -Source DKP

Copy entire LED map from one DKP to another 1514-1-Source DKP-Desti nati on DKP

Copy entire LED map from one DKP to a range DKP 1514-2 Source DKP-Dest inat ion1 DKP-

Desti nati on2 DKP

Copy entire LED map from one DKP to all other 1514-* -Source DKP

For a DKP, default key function 1501-1-DKP-#

For a range of DKPs, default a key’s function 1501-2-DKP-DKP-#

For all DKPs, default all key’s function 1501-* -#

For an Operator, default key function 1503-1-DKP-#

For a range of Operators, default a key’s function 1503-2-DKP-DKP-#

For all Operators, default all key’s function 1503-* -#



Matrix


LED Programming

Important points:• By default, DKP port 000 is an Operator. On power ON, the DKP instrument connected on this port is

assigned default key functions and default LED functions as shown below:

• If more than one operator is required default key function and default LED function can be assigned usingcommand 1503 and 1513.

• By default, all DKP ports except DKP port number 000 are assumed as normal DKPs used by executives.On power ON, the DKP instrument connected on these ports are assigned default key functions and defaultLED functions as shown below:

Relevant point:1. Eon-45 User’s Card

=X=X=

For a DKP, default LED function 1511-1-DKP-#

For a range of DKPs, default LED’s function 1511-2-DKP-DKP-#

For all DKPs, default all LED’s function 1511-* -#

For an Operator, default LED function 1513-1-DKP-#

For a range of Operators, default LED’s function 1513-2-DKP-DKP-#

For all operators, default all LED’s function 1513-* -#

Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Flash

SLT 0 SLT 1 SLT 2 SLT 3 Conference-3P

DKP 1 DKP 2 DKP 3 DKP 4 Call Forward

Trunk 5 Trunk 6 Trunk 7 Trunk 8 Auto Call Back

Trunk 1 Trunk 2 Trunk 3 Trunk 4 Auto Redial1 2 3 Redial

4 5 6 Memory Dial

7 8 9 Transfer

* 0 # Hold

Function Volume Speaker

SLT 4 SLT 5 SLT 6 SLT 7 FlashSLT 0 SLT 1 SLT 2 SLT 3 Conference-3P

DKP 1 DKP 2 DKP 3 DKP 4 Call Forward

Trunk 5 Trunk 6 Trunk 7 Trunk 8 Auto Call Back

Trunk 1 Trunk 2 Trunk 3 Trunk 4 Auto Redial

1 2 3 Redial

4 5 6 Memory Dial

7 8 9 Transfer

* 0 # Hold

Function Volume Speaker



Matrix


Direct Inward dialing (DID)

What’s this?The System can perform the task of an operator by greeting the external caller and transferring the call to thedesired station. This facility is called Auto Attendant or direct inward dialing (DID).

By using this facility, frequent callers can reach desired stations by dialing the station numbers from their phone. There are following advantages:

1. Reduced traffic burden on the operator 2. Calls are transferred faster and hence save the caller’s time.3. Useful even during non-working hours and holidays.4. Professional image of the Company.

How it works?Flow charts on the next pages depict the logic the system follows for DID call. First flow chart gives an over all view of it whereas second flow chart gives the detailed logical structure.

Start

Caller makes a call

System plays detects the incoming

ring and answers the call

System plays appopriate voice

greeting to the caller and problems

him to dial station number

The caller dials the desired

numbers in tone (DTMF)

The system transfers the call

End



Matrix


Start

Caller makes a call

Is DID activate

on the trunk?

System answer the call by

going off-hook

Is voice message

greeting programmed for

this trunk and current time

zone ?

System routes the call on the

programmed destination station

End

No

Yes

System plays the greeting message System plays the music

No

Yes

System gives beeps to the caller prompting

him to dial the desired station

B



Matrix


B

Has the

caller dialed any

digit/digits ?

Has the

DID beeps timer

matures

Play DID number dial

message or route to

programme destination

End

Is digit /

digits dialed valid

station

number ?

Is the

station free?

System transfers the call to the dialed

station. The caller gets ring back tone

Play the DID error message

or give error tone

A

Play DID busy message

or give busy tone

A

Is the call

answered within

DID ring timer ?

Plat the DID no reply message or

give routing tone

A

System connects caller to the

dialed station

End

No

YesNo

YesNo

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes



Matrix


How to program DID on Trunks?Step 1: Enable DID on desired trunks for different time zones depending on requirement.Step 2: Program DID timers viz. DID music timer, DID wait answer timer, DID Busy tone timer, DID No

reply timer, DID Error tone timer and DID beeps timer.Step 3: Record voice messages for different time zones (different messages during

different times of the day), for dial message, for wrong dial message, for busy tone message, No

reply message and error tone cases.Step 4: Program privacy for DID calls on the stations, if required.

Following flow chart depicts this case,

CommandsStep 1Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during working hours:3301-1-Trunk-Code Where,

Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk.

Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during lunch hours:3302-1-Trunk-Code Where,

Start

Activate DID on required trunks

as per the time table

Program and record messages

for the time zones

Record other DID voice messages

for error, busy and no reply cases

Set privacy for each station for DID

calls, if require.

End

Code Meaning

0 DID deactivated

1 DID activated



Matrix


Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk.

Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during non-working hours:3303-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk.

Code Meaning

0 DID deactivated

1 DID activated

By default DID is OFF on all trunks during all time zones.

Step 2Use following commands to set the various timers:Timers of Relevance:

All timers can be set from 001 to 255.

Significance of timers• DID Inactivity Timer is the time after which the Eternity releases the trunk if no activity has taken place

during this time.• DID Answer Timer is the time after which the Eternity answers a DID call• DID Music Timer is the time for which the Eternity plays music after answering the DID call.• DID Beeps Timer is the time for which the Eternity gives beeps to the caller prompting him to dial the

desired station number • DID Ring timer is the time for which the Eternity rings the non-responding station.• DID Busy tone Timer is the time for which the Eternity hunts the busy station.

• DID Error tone Timer is the time for which the Eternity gives error tone to the caller if he has dialed aninvalid code.

Step 3For programming and recording voice messages, please refer topic “Voice Message Applications”

Step 4For setting privacy from DID call for each user, please refer topic “Privacy”

Code Meaning

0 DID deactivated

1 DID activated

Timer Name Command Default

(in secs)

DID Inactivity Timer 3311-Seconds 60

DID Answer Wait Timer 3312-Seconds 5

DID Music Timer 3313-Seconds 5

DID Beeps Timer 3314-Seconds 10

DID Ring Timer 3315-Seconds 30

DID Busy Tone Timer 3316-Seconds 15

DID Error Tone Timer 3317-Seconds 5



Matrix


Example:Let us activate DID for a trunk (software port number 002) during working hours, lunch hours and non-working hours.3301-1-002-1 3302-1-002-1 3303-1-002-1

Wild cardsRange commands

Related topics:1. Time Tables2. Voice Applications3. Privacy4. Direct Inward System Access.

=X=X=

Command to activate DID on a trunk during working hours 3301-1-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on a range of trunks during working hours 3301-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on all trunks during working hours 3301-* -Code

Command to activate DID on a trunk during lunch hours 3302-1-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on a range of trunks during lunch hours 3302-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on all trunks during lunch hours 3302-* -Code

Command to activate DID on a trunk during non-working hours 3303-1-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on a range of trunks during non-working

hours

3303-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Command to activate DID on all trunks during non-working hours 3303-* -Code



Matrix


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

What’s this?Direct Inward System Access (DISA) permits a user to use the system’s resources from a remote location.The user can:1. Call any of the stations (Generally known as DID)

2. Make external calls (Generally known as DOSA)3. Activate/deactivate features of his station.4. Use PAS and such other facilities of the system.5. Program or Administer the system

DISA is a programmable facility for each trunk. In order to use DISA, one or more trunks should be programmed for DISA. Further, the station for DKP user has to have class of service (COS) rights to useDISA.

How it works?Following flow chart elaborate the steps involved in using DISA:



Matrix


Start

System receives a call on a trunk

Is DISA or DID activated for the

trunk ?

System answers the call

Route the call on the hunt

destinations

End

Is voicemessage programmed

for the trunk and current

time zone ?

System plays the voice message greeting

Once the greeting is over system gives

beeps prompting the caller to dial

System gives music to the caller

The caller dials

DISA access code

Is DISA

activated on the

trunk ?

System gives beep to the caller prompting him

to login by dialing his station number

The caller dials his station number

System checks for DID and

route call accordingly

End

B

A

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes



Matrix


Is the station

number valid ?

System gives beeps to caller prompting

him to dial his password

System gives DID error message or

error tone to the caller

A

B

The caller dials his password

Is the

password valid

?

System gives slow tone to the

indicating successful DISA login

System gives error message or

error tone to the caller

E

No

Yes

No

Yes

A

Caller remains in DISA idle state

for time = DISA idle timer

What has

the caller dialed

during DISA idle

timer ?

System reloads

DISA idle timer System gives system

dial tone to the caller

System released the trunk

Caller gets error tone of PSTN

End

Wrong

digit dialed

Off hook(#*)

code

On hook code

dialedNo digit

dialed

F

The caller is assumed in idle

condition while he gets the tone.

This is called DISA idle state

C



Matrix


What is the

activity done by

the caller

Caller does not dial any digit

for time = inactivity timer

Caller goes to DISA idle state

E

Caller dials a

feature code

System responds

accordingly

End

Caller grabs a

trunk line

Caller dials a

telephone number

System loads inactivity timer

on completion of dialing

Caller dials a station

Is the

called party

free

Called party/answer the call

Caller and called party are in speech

Caller gets warning beeps for 15 seconds

Caller goes on-hook

by dialing # - #

Caller goes off-hook

by dialing #-*

Caller gets system

dial tone

No

Yes

Does the

caller dial a digit

within 15seconds

Both caller and called person remain

in speech warning beeps stops

System release the grabbed

trunk line/called station

Caller goes in DISA idle state

E

F

No

Yes

C



Matrix


Important point:• DISA is a facility used from a remote location and the user is not directly connected with the system. The

connection is through the PSTN where only voice is transmitted and received between the caller and thesystem. Due to this, activities like off hook (active), on-hook (idle) and dialing of ‘flash’ are not possible.

The Eternity supports these activities by the way of dialing special digits. They are as under:

A Flow chart showing this logic is shown below:

Calling a StationCalling a station from DISA is same as a call made from local station. Only differences are in the off hook and on hook steps. As the caller is not physically connected with the system, he has to use appropriate codefor giving off hook and on hook.

Once speech is established between the caller and any other external person, it is likely that the caller will notdial a digit as long as he is talking to the called person. This lull in the dialing might be taken as an event of no activity state by the system and it might terminate the DISA session forcing the caller to make a fresh call.

Activity What to dialOff hook (lifting handset) # *

On hook (replacing handset) # #

Dialing of 'flash' # 1

* dialed # dialed 1 dialed No digit dialed

Wait for DTMF digit

Start

Is digit #

dialed ?

Is */#/1/No

digit dialed within 2

seconds

Interprete the dialed

code as per the logic

End

No

Yes

Interprete as

off-hook

End

Interprete as

on-hook

End

Interprete as

Flash

End

Interprete #

as per logic

End



Matrix


Start

Wait for DTMF digit

Any digit

dialed within 20

seconds ?

DISA session terninated.The trunk released

End

The caller has dialed the

off0hook code and dialed an

extension. DKP or external

No

Yes

Any digitdialed within 90

seconds ?

Reload the inactivity timer

The caller gets

warning tone

Yes

No

Any digit

dialed within 15seconds ?

The call is

disconnected

Yes

No

To overcome this problem, Eternity gives warning tone after time = DISA Inactivity timer. The Eternity waitsfor 15 seconds (fixed) after the warning tone for the caller to dial a digit. If the caller does not dial any digiteven after this, Eternity disconnects the call and the caller gets slow beeps of the DISA idle state.



Matrix


The caller can reach any station user just by dialing the respective station number. As such he cannot dial hisown station number. He can reach and request a third person to transfer him on his own station.

Making an external call using DISA

As shown in the diagram the DISA caller can make an external outgoing call by grabbing a trunk and thendialing the required external number.

Following points are relevant:1. The remote user is allowed all the features, trunk access and toll control programmed for his local station.2. The outgoing trunks are subjected to the same treatment as if they were made from local station.3. Call Budget, Call Duration Control and SMDR features work in the same way.4. When such calls are stored in the SMDR buffer, they are marked specifically and printed with ‘D’

character in the remarks column.

Using features through DISA:Remote caller can use the features available on his station. He can activate or cancel any feature from DISA,as he would have done from his local station.These include:1. Call Pickup2. Call Forward/Call Follow Me.3. Setting and canceling Alarms4. Personal Lock settings5. Conference6. PAS7. Abbreviated Dialing8. OthersPlease note that some of the features involve ring on station from the system. In such cases, the ring is givenon the local station instead of the remote end. Obviously the Eternity does not know from where the caller isusing DISA. And hence cannot reach him at the remote location.

Programming through DISAEternity can be programmed through DISA mode since after DISA login, the remote end behaves as normallocal station. Programming is done the same way as is done from a Local Station.



Matrix


Terminating a DISA sessionIf the caller dials the on-hook code from the DISA idle state, the DISA session is terminated and the trunk isreleased.

During DISA state, the Eternity monitors dialing of the caller. In case there is no dialing of a digit for 90seconds, the system assumes that the caller has hung-up. Accordingly, it terminates the DISA session and

releases the trunk.

How to program?Following steps are needed to program and use DISA successfully:Step 1: Activate DISA on desired trunks during working hours using command 3401 Step 2: Activate DISA on desired trunks during lunch hours using command 3402 Step 3: Activate DISA on desired trunks during non working hours using command 3403 Step 4: Program DISA timersStep 5: Program and record voice messages keeping DID in mind.Step 6: Assign COS group with DISA activated on desired stations.

Step 1

Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during working hours3401-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk

Step 2Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during lunch hours3402-1-Trunk-Code

Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk

Step 3Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during non-working hours3403-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk

Step 4Use following commands to program DISA timers:

Code Meaning

0 DISA off

1 DISA on

Code Meaning

0 DISA off

1 DISA on

Code Meaning

0 DISA off

1 DISA on



Matrix


Step 5To program and record DISA voice messages; please refer the topic “Voice Message Applications”.

Step 6To allow DISA to a desired station, please refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)”

By default DISA is OFF on all the trunks in all the time zones.


How to use it?• Dial a DISA enabled trunk • PBX answers the call• Dial DISA login code i.e. 119-Station Number-User password • You get DISA log-in beeps• Dial a station or grab a trunk line and dial an external number • To continue the speech, dial any digit• To terminate the speech, dial on hook command• To terminate DISA mode, dial on-hook command again

Relevant topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing(DID)2. Voice Message Applications3. Class of Service(COS)4. Remote Programming

=X=X=

Timer Name Command Valid Range Default

DISA Idle state Timer 3411-Seconds 000-255 20 Seconds

DISA Inactivity Timer 3412-Seconds 000-255 90 Seconds

DISA Warning Beeps Timer Non Programmable ---- 15 Seconds

DISA Inter digit Timer Non Programmable ---- 2 Seconds

Programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during working hours 3401-1-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on range of trunks during working hours 3401-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on all trunks during working hours 3401-*-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during lunch hours 3402-1-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on range of trunks during lunch hours 3402-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on all trunks during lunch hours 3402-*-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during non-working hours 3403-1-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on range of trunks during non-working 3403-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Programming command to activate DISA on all trunks during non-working hours 3403-*-Code



Matrix


Direct Station Selection Console (DSS-64)

What’s this?Digital Station Selection Console (DSS-64) is a feature-rich, easy to use console with followingcharacteristics:1. Total 64 direct station selection (DSS) Keys

2. Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green Led gives the status for an activity like called stationringing (Green LED blinks), in speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). RedLed indicates various statuses for other stations like other stations going off-hook, ringing, calling other station, dialing on trunk, on hold, etc.

3. The LED color turns Orange on loop keys for a call returned to your station or for unanswered calls.

In an office, operators have to manage more number of calls. Hence if more number of DSS keys is madeavailable to them their job becomes comparatively easier. DSS-64 Console precisely does this.

The Eternity supports maximum of two DSS-64 with one DKP. In a typical application, the operator can useOne DSS-64 with one Eon-45.

How to attach DSS-64 to a DKP?As the name suggests, Console aids the operator for accessing various stations or trunks at a single touch.But since the console does not have a speech circuit it is always connected as an attachment with the DKP. Itis possible to connect two DSS-64 with one DKP if the configuration of the system is big.



Matrix


It is possible to use the built-in DKP ports on the switch card to connect one DKP and two DSS-64. For moredetails on how to install DSS-64, Please refer Eternity-Installation Manual.Figures given below shows the total number of keys available for direct station selection:Case 1:

DKP with one DSS-64

(Total 89 keys can be used for DSS-64)

Case 2:

DKP with two DSS-64(Total 153 keys can be used for DSS-64)

How to program?Step1: Assign a hardware ID to the DSS-64 using command 1205.Step2: Assign a function to a key of DSS-64 using command 1502.Step 3: Assign a function to a LED of DSS-64 using command 1512.

Step 1Use following command to assign hardware ID to DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1205-1-DKP-DSS-Slot- Port off set on the card Where,DKP = Software port number of DKP from 000 to 127DSS = DSS number from 1 to 2Slot = Slot number from 00 to 40 in which the card is insertedPort offset = Port number on that cardPlease note that if the in-built ports are used then slot number will be 32.



Matrix


Step 2Use following command to assign a function to a key of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1502-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2

Key location is from 00 to 63Function Type is from 00 to 12.Function Number is from 000 to 255.(Please refer Direct Station Selection - Soft Key Programming for function type and function number for Key)

Since the programming of DSS-64 is attached with the DKP to which it is attached, use copy commands tocopy the Key map of one DSS-64 to other DSS-64.

Step 3Use following command to assign a function to a LED of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1512-1-DKP-DSS-LED Location-Function Type-Function Number

Where,DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 000 to 127DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2LED Location is from 00 to 63Function Type is from 00 to 12Function Number is from 000 to 255.(Please refer Direct Station Selection- Soft Key Programming for function type and function number for LED)

Since the programming of DSS-64 is attached with the DKP to which it is attached, use copy commands tocopy the LED map of one DSS-64 to other DSS-64.

Important point:• If any console is connected then first console (DSS-64 number1) is assigned default key functions and

default LED functions as shown below whereas second console (DSS-64 number 2) is not assigned anykey function or LED function by default.

=X=X=

Station 45 Station 46 Station 47 Station 48 Station 49 Station 50 Station 51 Station 52






DKP 5 DKP 6 DKP 7 DKP 8 DKP 9 DKP 10 DKP 11 DKP 12Trunk 8 Trunk 9 Trunk 10 Trunk 11 Trunk 12 Trunk 13 Trunk 14 Trunk 15



Matrix


Distinctive Rings

What’s this?The Eternity support flexible rings. It is possible to use ring cadence of our choice during different situations.One can set Triple ring for ‘Internal call-Boss’ situation and long ring for ‘Alarm call’.

Following eight situations are possible:1. Internal Call-Low priority2. Internal Call-Equal priority3. Internal Call-High priority4. External Call5. Alarm Call6. Auto Call Back Call7. Auto Redial Call8. Message Wait Call

Various ring types available are:

How to program?Use following command to assign a ring type to any situation:5802-Situation-Ring Type Where,

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

0 Off Off - - - - - - -

1 Continuous On - - - - - - -

2 Single 500 2500 - - - - - -

3 Double 400 200 400 2000 - - - -

4 Triple 400 200 400 200 400 1400 - -

5 Long 1000 2000 - - - - - -

6 Very Long 2000 1000 - - - - - -

7 Fast 500 500 500 500 500 500 - -

8 Single Fast 500 1000 500 1000 - - - -9 Long Fast 1000 500 1000 500 - - - -

Ring index Ring type Timings in milli seconds

Situation Meaning

0 Low Priority Call

1 Equal Priority Call

2 High Priority Call

3 Trunk Call

4 Alarm Call

5 Auto Call Back Call

6 Auto Redial Call

7 Message Wait Call



Matrix


Example 1:Let us use triple ring for High Priority Call.5802-02-4

Example 2:Let us use Long Ring for Alarm Call:5802-04-5

The default ring type-situation is:

Use following command to default the ring type-situation relation:5802-* -#

Use following command to print the ring configuration report:5800

Demonstration of ringsIt is possible to demonstrate these various types of rings. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to getacquainted with different types of rings given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these rings, hewould not understand their meaning.

How to use it?Lift the handset. Dial out following command and keep the handset back on the cradle. The telephoneinstrument rings depending upon the ring type.

Ring Type Meaning

0 Ring Off

1 Continuous Ring

2 Single Ring

3 Double Ring

4 Triple Ring5 Long Ring

6 Very Long Ring

7 Fast Ring

8 Single Fast Ring

9 Long Fast Ring

Situation Ring Type

Low Priority Call 2

Equal Priority Call 2

High Priority Call 4

Trunk Call 3

Alarm Call 6

Auto Call Back Call 8

Auto Redial Call 9

Message Wait Call 7



Matrix


Use following commands to demonstrate the ring:5803-Ring Type Where,

Timer of Relevance

Demonstration Timer - Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring/music to the user.Command: 5202-Seconds Default: 30 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

=X=X=

Ring Type Meaning

0 Ring Off

1 Continuous Ring

2 Single Ring

3 Double Ring

4 Triple Ring

5 Long Ring

6 Very Long Ring

7 Fast Ring

8 Single Fast Ring

9 Long Fast Ring

RING PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:33

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Type of Rings For Callers

Caller Type

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Internal (Low Priority) 2

Internal (Equal Priority) 2

Internal (High Priority) 4

Trunk 3

Alarm 6

Auto Call Back 8

Auto Redial 9

Message Wait 7

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pickupable Rings (On/Off)

Caller Pickup

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Internal (Low Priority) ON

Internal (Equal Priority) ON

Internal (High Priority) ON

Trunk ON

Alarm OFF

Auto Call Back OFF

Auto Redial OFF

Message Wait OFF

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Do Not Disturb (DND)

What’s this?Many times it happens that a user wishes privacy for some duration and would not like to be disturbed by phone calls. Do Not Disturb (DND) feature is very useful in such situations.

Further a station user might wish to attend to calls from few important persons. For example a station user would like to deny all calls expect from few important people. Eternity supports this Flexibility. A stationuser may program some important persons in his DND list. All the persons programmed in this list can callhim. Persons not in this list cannot call him.However if a caller is not available in destination’s DND list, he can still call him but only if he has theaccess to override feature.

How it works?A flow chart shown on the next page highlights the logic of this feature.

Start

Station A calls Station B

Has Station

B enabled

DND ?

System checks for other

features like call forward etc.

EndIs Station A

available on DND

list of Station B ?

Call is placed

End

No

Yes

Yes

No

Is override

feature available to

Station A ?

Call is denied

EndStation A gets routing tone

Station A dials override feature

Is station

B free ?

Call is placed

End

No

Yes

Call is blocked

End

No

Yes



Matrix


How to program?Step 1: Decide the Number of DND lists to be formed and the stations to be kept in one DND listStep 2: Program the stations in a DND list using command 2701 Step 3: Assign DND list to a SLT using command 2702 Step 4: Assign DND list to a DKP using command 2703 Step 5: Take care that DND is allowed to the user from COS programming.

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a piece of paper and decide the number of DND lists and the stations to be programmed ineach DND list.

Step 2Use following command to program DND list:2701-1-DND li st- DND li st I ndex-Station Type-Station Where,DND list is from 00 to 24.DND list Index is from 0 to 9

Station Type and Station are

Step 3Use following command to assign a DND list to a SLT:2702-1-SLT-DND l ist Where,

SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255.DND list is from 00 to 24

Step 4Use following command to assign a DND list to a DKP:2703-1-DKP-DND li st Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127.DND list is from 00 to 24

Station Type Meaning Station

0 Null port ---

1 SLT port 000-255

2 DKP port 000-127

3 Trunk Port 000-127

Station Index

DND List

Station0 Station1 ……. Station9

0 0 8 221 10 26

2 … … … … …

24



Matrix


Important points:· DND is a programmable feature and hence can be allowed or denied to a user. Please refer section “Class

of service” section for details on how to enable this feature on a particular station.· By default DND is enabled on all the stations.

Example:

Program a system for following constraints:SLTs 201, 202, 203 and 204 (s/w ports 000,001,002,003) cannot call DKP 205 (software ports 000).2701-1-00-0-01-000 2701-1-00-1-01-001 2701-1-00-2-01-002 2701-1-00-3-01-003

2703-1-000-00

How to use it?• Dial 181 from your station.• A Person with override feature can access you provided he is not in your DND list.

• To cancel DND, dial 180 from your station.


Default commandsThere are no default DND lists available

Clear Commands

Program a station in a DND list 2701-1-DND l i st-DND l ist Index-Stati on Type-Stati on

Program same station in range of DND lists 2701-2-DND l i st-DND l ist-DND li st I ndex-Station Type-Station

Program same station in all DND lists 2701-*-DND l i st Index-Stati on Type-Stati on

Assign a DND list to a SLT 2702-1-SLT-DND l ist

Assign a DND list to a range of SLTs 2702-2-SLT-SLT-DND li st

Assign a DND list to all SLTs 2702-*-DND l i st

Assign a DND list to a DKP 2703-1-DKP-DND li st

Assign a DND list to a range of DKPs 2703-2-DKP-DKP-DND l i st

Assign a DND list to all DKPs 2703-*-DND l i st

Clear a DND list 2701-1-DND l i st-#

Clear a range of DND lists 2701-2-DND l i st- DND l i st-# Clear all DND lists 2701-* -#

Assign no DND list to a SLT 2702-1-SLT-#

Assign no DND list to a range of SLTs 2702-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign no DND list to all SLTs 2702-* -#

Assign no DND list to a DKP 2703-1-DKP-#

Assign no DND list to a range of DKPs 2703-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign no DND list to all DKPs 2703-* -#



Matrix


Related topics:1. Class Of Service(COS)2. Override

=X=X=

DO NOT DISTURB(DND) LISTS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:30

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Destinations (Type-Port)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List 00:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 01:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 02:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 03:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 04:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 05:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 06:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 07:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 08:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 09:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 10:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 11:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 12:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 13:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 14:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 15:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 16:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 17:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 18:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 19:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 20:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 21:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 22:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 23:

- - - - - - - - - -

List 24:

- - - - - - - - - -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Dynamic Lock

What’s this?• A user can lock his station to avoid misuse of local and long distance dialing in his absence.• When a user locks his station, his toll control changes to limited dialing or with no dialing permitted.• The lock operates with a 4-digit password. Each user has his personal password called User Password.

• Station can be locked manually or automatically.• If manual lock is selected, then user should lock the station while leaving his work place by dialing the

required code. When the station user returns back, he can unlock the station.• In automatic lock, the system locks the station after a set time automatically if there is no activity from the

station for some time.

How to use it?

Select Auto or Manual Lock

• Station User Password is a 4-digit secret code. Default Password is 1111.• Minutes specify delay in minutes after which the station gets locked automatically.• Set minutes to 00 for manual locking. Factory default is manual lock.• Range for time is 00 to 99 minutes. 00 for manual locking and 01-99 for auto locking.

To Lock your station manually

Open Dynamic Lock

• Once the station is locked, the station user will be able to dial the numbers depending on the dynamic tollcontrol.

• In case you forget your password, do not panic. Contact the System Administrator (SA) or the SystemEngineer (SE). He can clear your password to its default value. Refer “System Security (Passwords)” for more details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Dynamic Lock to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Toll Control2. User Security (User Password)

=X=X=


2 Dial 114-Old User Passowrd-New User Password Confirmation tone


2 Dial 142-User Password-Minutes Confirmation tone




2 Dial 141-User Password Confirmation tone



Matrix


E&M Connectivity

What’s this?E&M connectivity feature of Eternity offers seamless connectivity between various communication productslike PBX, Router, PCM Link, etc.E&M interface is widely used interface to connect such diverse equipments. For example, an existing PBX

capacity needs to be expanded beyond the configuration limit of a PBX. Installing one more PBX andconnecting both the PBX through E&M interfaces can get us the desired expansion.

Three different applications of E&M connectivity are shown below:

Figure 1: Two PBXs are connected using E&M interface.

In the above figure,• T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).• S1 to Sn are stations.• E&M1 to E&Mn are E&M lines between two PBX systems.



Matrix


Figure 2: 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.



Matrix


Figure 3: Two PBX systems located far from each other connected to each other using E&M connectivity.

How to install?Please refer ‘Eternity-Installation Manual’ for more details.

How it works?An E&M port of Eternity has dual personality: both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like astation interface for any incoming call to it and works like a trunk interface when any station makes anoutgoing call through it.

However, please note that a trunk line cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot beconnected to an E&M port.

Incoming call on an E&M portAs explained above an E&M port behaves as a station for an incoming call. Please refer figure 1. When anystation of PBX B grabs an E&M port, he gets dial tone of PBX A. This port of PBX A behaves as a SLT port. Now he can call another station, grab a trunk, or use a feature like override, raid, etc just like a normal stationwould do.



Matrix


However, this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal station. Features like Class Of Service(COS), Toll Control, etc will apply to this port, if programmed.

Outgoing call using E&M portPlease refer figure 1. When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through an E&M port, he dialstrunk access code. The E&M port behaves as trunk interface and gives the station, the dial tone of PBX B.

Now he can dial any station of PBX B or grab a trunk line of PBX B to make a call or use any featuredepending on the station programming done by the SE of PBX B. Hence the E&M port of PBX A should be programmed as any other normal trunk like enabling the port, programming the dial type, etc.

All E&M ports can be put together in one single group or few groups depending on the requirement. Aseparate access code can be assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. In such case the stations can haveat least two different access codes for making outgoing calls, one for making outgoing calls using trunk linesand other for making outgoing calls using E&M lines.

How to program?Step 1: Assign a SLT software port and a trunk software port to an E&M port using command 5101.Step 2: Assign features like COS, Toll Control group, Trunk access group, call pick up group, etc to this SLT

port using commands like 1702, 1903, etcStep 3: Assign trunk enable, dial type, trunk-landing group, DID, etc to this trunk port using commands like

1601,1602,2001,2002,3301, etcStep 4: Define the E&M port as trunk type for auto landing of the incoming call.Step 5: Assign a pause timer to this E&M port suing command 5102 Step 6: Define E&M pulse characteristics of this E&M port using command 5103.Step 7: Define Flash timer to this E&M port suing command using command 5604.Step 8: Take printout of E&M configuration using command 5100.

Step 1Use following command to program an E&M port:5101-1-E&M -SLT-Trunk

Where,E&M is the software port number of the E&M from 000 to 063SLT is the software port number from 000 to 255Trunk is the software port number from 000 to 127It is advisable to give higher software port number for SLT and trunk since these would be seldom usedwhile programming.

Step 2Assign features like COS, Toll control group, trunk access group, call pick up group, etc to the SLT portassigned for E&M

Step 3Assign features like trunk enable, dial type, trunk landing, etc to the trunk port assigned for E&M

Step 4Define the E&M port as trunk type or station type. If the E&M port is defined as trunk type then it is possibleto assign trunk-landing group to it. If the E&M port is defined as station type then the caller will have to diala particular station to reach it.Use following command to define the port type of the E&M port:5104-1-E& M -Port Type Where,



Matrix


E&M is the E&M port from 000 to 063

Use following command to define the port type for a range of E&M ports:

5104-2-E&M-E&M -Port Type Use following command to define the port type for all the E&M ports:5104-*-Port Type

Example:To define E&M 000 as trunk type, dial5104-1-000-1 Doing so it is possible to assign trunk-landing group to the corresponding trunk assigned to this E&M port.Hence whenever the caller calls this E&M port, his call lands on the station according to the trunk-landinggroup.

Step 5

Use following command to program pause timer for an E&M port:5102-1-E& M-Seconds Where,E&M is the software port number of the E&M from 000 to 063Default Pause time is 003 seconds

Step 6Use following command to program the dialing properties of the E&M port:5103-1-E&M -Code Where,E&M is the software port number of the E&M from 000 to 063

By default, dialing properties of E&M are assumed to be 10PPS +/- 10%, Make/Break Ratio = 1:2

Step 7To program flash timer for the E&M port, please refer “Flash timers”

Step 8Use following command to take printout of the E&M configuration:5100

Example:Program E&M1 port (S/w port 000) of PBX A.Assign SLT software port 255 and trunk software port 127 for E&M port 000

Code Dialing properties

0 10 PPS +/- 10%, Make/Break Ratio = 1:2




Port Type Meaning

0 Station

1 Trunk



Matrix


Use following command to assign SLT and trunk for E&M port:5101-000-255-127 On giving this command all the default SLT parameters will be applicable to SLT port 255 and all the defaulttrunk parameters will be applicable to trunk port 127.

Use following command to program 5 seconds pause time for E&M port:

5102-1-000-005

Use following command to program 20PPS +/- 10%, Make/Break ratio = 1:25103-1-000-2


Clear commands

Default commands

Related topics:1. Eternity Eternity-Installation Manual2. Class Of Service (COS)3. Toll Control4. Trunk Access Groups

Program pause timer for an E&M port 5102-1-E&M -Seconds

Program pause timer for a range of E&M ports 5102-2-E&M-E&M -Seconds

Program pause timer for all E&M ports 5102-* -Seconds

Program the dialing properties of an E&M port 5103-1-E&M -Code Program the dialing properties of range of E&M port 5103-2-E& M-E&M -Code

Program the dialing properties of all the E&M ports 5103-* -Code

Clear an E&M port 5101-1-E&M-#

Clear range of E&M ports 5101-2-E& M-E&M -#

Clear all E&M ports 5101-* -#

Assign default pause timer to an E&M ports 5102-1-E&M-#

Assign default pause timer to a range of E&M ports 5102-2-E& M-E&M -#

Assign default pause timer to all E&M ports 5102-* -#

Assign default dialing properties to an E&M port 5103-1-E&M-#

Assign default dialing properties to range of E&M ports 5103-2-E& M-E&M -#

Assign default dialing properties of all the E&M ports 5103-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

E&M PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

E&M TRK SLT Flash Pause Dial IC E&M TRK SLT Flash Pause Dial IC

Port Port Port Tmr Tmr Type Type Port Port Port Tmr Tmr Type Type

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 - - - - - - 040 - - - - - -

001 - - - - - - 041 - - - - - -

002 - - - - - - 042 - - - - - -

003 - - - - - - 043 - - - - - -004 - - - - - - 044 - - - - - -

005 - - - - - - 045 - - - - - -

006 - - - - - - 046 - - - - - -

007 - - - - - - 047 - - - - - -

008 - - - - - - 048 - - - - - -

009 - - - - - - 049 - - - - - -

010 - - - - - - 050 - - - - - -

011 - - - - - - 051 - - - - - -

012 - - - - - - 052 - - - - - -

013 - - - - - - 053 - - - - - -

014 - - - - - - 054 - - - - - -

015 - - - - - - 055 - - - - - -

016 - - - - - - 056 - - - - - -

017 - - - - - - 057 - - - - - -

018 - - - - - - 058 - - - - - -019 - - - - - - 059 - - - - - -

020 - - - - - - 060 - - - - - -

021 - - - - - - 061 - - - - - -

022 - - - - - - 062 - - - - - -

023 - - - - - - 063 - - - - - -

024 - - - - - -

025 - - - - - -

026 - - - - - -

027 - - - - - -

028 - - - - - -

029 - - - - - -

030 - - - - - -

031 - - - - - -

032 - - - - - -

033 - - - - - -034 - - - - - -

035 - - - - - -

036 - - - - - -

037 - - - - - -

038 - - - - - -

039 - - - - - -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Dial Type - 0 : 10 PPS Ratio 2/3

1 : 10 PPS Ratio 1/1



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


External Call

How to make External Call?

From SLT/DKP Handset• Lift the handset.

• Dial trunk access code• Dial the external Telephone Number

From DKP: Hands free Operation• Press the key ‘SPK’ on the DKP• Dial trunk access code• Dial the external Telephone Number

Important points:• The stations having access to trunk will only be able to make External Calls• The station with higher Toll Control will be able to make External Calls.

Relevant points:1. Toll Control2. Trunk Access Groups

=X=X=



Matrix


External Call Forward (ECF)

What’s this?It is possible to divert the calls on your personal trunk line to your residence or your mobile number. Thisfacility of diverting your incoming trunk calls is known as External Call Forwarding or ECF in short.

By default ECF is off on all the trunks

How to program?Step 1: Decide the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.Step 2: Assign a trunk access group to be used to forward these calls.Step 3: Assign the destination number where the calls are to be forwarded.

Use following command to enable/disable ECF on a trunk:3201-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.

Use following command to assign destination trunk access group to forward the calls of a trunk:3202-1-Trunk-Destination Trunk Access group Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.Destination Trunk Access Group is the trunk access group number from 00 to 24 through which the calls areto be forwarded.

Use following command to assign destination number where the calls are to be forwarded for a trunk:3203-1-Trunk-Telephone Number-# Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.Telephone Number is the number where the calls are to be forwarded.

Example:Forward all the incoming calls on trunk 001 to 0265-630555 using trunk access group 01.

Use following command to program this requirement:3201-1-001-1 3202-1-001-01

3203-1-001-0265630555-#

Wild CardRange commands

Code Meaning

0 Feature disable

1 Feature enable

Enable/disable ECF on a trunk. 3201-1- T runk-Code

Enable/disable ECF on a range of trunks. 3201-2-Trunk- Trunk-Code

Enable/disable ECF on all trunks. 3201-* -Code



Matrix


Relevant topic:

1. Trunk Access Groups

=X=X=

Assign a destination trunk access group to forward the calls

on a trunk.

3202-1-Trunk -Desti nati on

Trunk Access group

Assign same destination trunk access group to forward the

calls on a range of trunks.

3202-2-Trunk-Trunk -

Desti nati on Trunk Access group

Assign same destination trunk access group to forward the

calls of all the trunks

3202-* -Desti nation Trunk

Access group

Assign destination number where the calls are to be

forwarded for an incoming trunk.

3203-1-Trunk -Telephone

Number-#


forwarded for a range of incoming trunks.

3203-2-Trunk-Trunk -Tel ephone

Number-#


forwarded for all incoming trunks.

3203-* -Telephone Number-#



Matrix


External Music

What’s this?Eternity provides a facility to give external music to the users by way of connecting an external musicsource. It is possible to give external music to the stations or external callers or both. For more details, pleaserefer ‘Music on Hold’.

=X=X=



Matrix


Flash Timer

What is Flash?Pulse dialing is a type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses. Flash is also a code just sameas digits 0 to 9. A hook switch or a Flash key is generally used to dial this code. Technically, Flash is breaking the loop current for 200 milliseconds to 900 milliseconds. Please note that since this code is not

simulated in standard DTMF convention, one cannot dial it in DTMF mode.

Flash timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks. Flash timer is programmable. Flashtimer is given as count from 1 to 9. Flash count 1 signifies 100 milliseconds and Flash count 9 signifies 900milliseconds. By default Flash count is programmed as 6 i.e. 600 milliseconds

Where is it used?Stations dial flash to use few PBX features and also to use few PSTN features. Flash is used in followingcases:• While transferring a call from one station to another.• While making conference between few stations.• While toggling call between two stations.

• While using call-waiting facility available from PSTN exchange.

Now a days, more number of basic service providers and different types of advanced electronic telephoneexchanges are prevailing. It is possible that one service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 300ms as flash, other service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 900 ms as flash and systeminterprets breaking of loop current for 600 ms as flash. Hence if the system engineer sets the flash timer to600 ms then he might not be able to use features provided by the service provider interpreting 900 ms for flash.

To take care of thi s situation, E ternity off ers Flexibi li ty to program dif ferent fl ash timers for both stationsand trunks.

How to program?Step 1: Program flash timer for SLTStep 2: Program flash timer for DKPStep 3: Program flash timer for Trunk Step 4: Program flash timer for E&M

Step 1Use following command to program flash timer for a SLT:5601-1-SLT-Count Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user

Count is from 1 to 9

Step 2Use following command to program flash timer for a DKP:5602-1-DKP-Count Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user Count is from 1 to 9



Matrix


Step 3Use following command to program flash timer for a Trunk:5603-1-Trunk-Count Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk Count is from 1 to 9

Step 4Use following command to program flash timer for a E&M:5604-1-E&M -Count Where,E&M is the software port number of the E&MCount is from 1 to 9

Example:Program flash timer as 8 for SLT (S/w port 000) and DKP (S/w port 000). Also program flash timer as 4 for atrunk (S/w port 000) and E&M port (S/w port 001).5601-1-000-8

5602-1-000-8 5603-1-000-4 5604-1-001-4

Wild cardRange commands

Default commands

Program flash timer for a SLT 5601-1-SLT-Count

Program flash timer for a range of SLTs 5601-2-SLT-SLT-Count

Program flash timer for all SLTs 5601-* -Count

Program flash timer for a DKP 5602-1-DKP-Count

Program flash timer for a range of DKPs 5602-2-DKP-DKP-Count Program flash timer for all DKPs 5602-* -Count

Program flash timer for a trunk 5603-1-trunk-Count

Program flash timer for a range of trunks 5603-2-trunk-trunk-Count

Program flash timer for all trunks 5601-* -Count

Program flash timer for an E&M port 5604-1-E&M-Count

Program flash timer for a range of E&M ports 5604-2-E&M-E&M-Count

Program flash timer for all E&M ports 5604-* -Count

Assign default flash timer to a SLT 5601-1-SLT-#

Assign default flash timer to a range of SLTs 5601-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default flash timer to all SLTs 5601-* -#



Matrix


Important points:• Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not

transferred. This happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for transferring the call hence it is advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument.

• This problem may occur with Flash Key also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrumentand the flash timer of the system are not set properly.

• Few telephone instruments have flash timers set to 800 ms. In such case the call does not get transferred because the flash timer of all stations is set at 600 ms by default. In such cases the flash timer of the stationwhere the cordless phone is connected should be increased to 800 ms.

• While using DISA facility, it is required to dial flash. Since the current loops are separate for differentexchange lines, it is not feasible to sense following codes:1. Off-hook.2. On-hook (Making-breaking of loop-current)3. Flash (momentarily breaking of loop-current)

The Eternity allows dialing of these codes by using combination of DTMF digits as under:

Following flow chart explains the dialing of these special digits

Assign default flash timer to a DKP 5602-1-DKP-#

Assign default flash timer to a range of DKPs 5602-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default flash timer to all DKPs 5602-* -#

Assign default flash timer to a trunk 5603-1-trunk-#

Assign default flash timer to range of trunks 5603-2-trunk-trunk-# Assign default flash timer to all trunks 5601-* -#

Assign default flash timer to an E&M port 5604-1-E&M-#

Assign default flash timer to a range of E&M ports 5604-2-E&M-E&M-#

Assign default flash timer to all E&M ports 5604-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

Start

Wait for DTMF digit

Is digit #

dialed ?

Interprete the dialed

code as perthe logic

EndIs */#/1/No

digit dialed within

2 seconds ?

No

Yes

Interprete as

off-hook

Interprete as

on-hook

Interprete as

Flash

Interprete #

as per logic

End End End End

* dialed # dialed 1 dialed No digit dialed



Matrix


Flexible Numbers

What’s this?Eternity offers Flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called Flexiblenumber. For example, to access first SLT having software port 000, one has to dial 2001. It is possible tochange this code to any other number of your choice.

Eternity offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the SLTand DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers using acommand.

A typical table of default SLT station numbers looks like:

A typical table of default DKP station numbers looks like:

How to program?For SLTUse following command to program the access code for a SLT station:4301-1-SLT-Access code-# Where,SLT is a 3-digit number from 000 to 255.Access Code is of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Clear CommandUse following command to clear the access code for a SLT station:4301-1-SLT-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for a range of SLT stations:4301-2-SLT-SLT-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for all SLT stations:4301-* - #

Software Port Access Codes

0 2001

1 2002

2 2003

… …

… …

255 2256

Software Port Access Codes

0 3001

1 3002

2 3003

… …

… …127 3128



Matrix


Default commandsUse following command to assigned default Flexible numbers to all the stations:4351-*-#

For DKPUse following command to program the access code for a DKP station:

4302-1-DKP-Access code-# Where,DKP is a 3-digit number from 000 to 127.Access Code is of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Clear CommandUse following command to clear the access code for a DKP station:4302-1-DKP-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for a range of DKP stations:4302-2-DKP-DKP-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for all DKP stations:4302-*-#

Default commandsUse following command to assigned default Flexible numbers to all the stations:4352-*-#

Print CommandUse following command to take print out of flexible numbers:4300

Please note that this command gives printout of access codes, which includes feature codes and flexible

numbers.

Example:Eternity-8S has one SLT card and one DKP card. I want the Flexible numbers of SLT ports (S/w Ports 000 to007) to be 4001 to 4008 and that of DKP ports (S/w ports 000 to 007) to be 5001 to 5008.Use following commands to assign desired Flexible numbers to SLTs:4301-1-000-4001 4301-1-001-4002 4301-1-002-4003 4301-1-003-4004 4301-1-004-4005 4301-1-005-4006 4301-1-006-4007 4301-1-007-4008

4302-1-000-5001 4302-1-001-5002 4302-1-002-5003 4302-1-003-5004 4302-1-004-5005



Matrix


4302-1-005-5006 4302-1-006-5007 4302-1-007-5008

Important points:• It is possible to have single digit, 2-digit, 3-digit and 4-digit Flexible numbers.

• It is also possible that few stations have single digit, few have 2-digit, few have 3-digit and remaining havefour digit Flexible Numbers.• It is possible to clear the Flexible number of a station, range of station and all stations.• Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. These Flexible numbers

should be unique and should not match with either other SLT stations or DKP stations or any of thefeatures available from the dial phase.

• Flexible number having common digits can’t be assigned to another station. For example if 3101 is usedthen 310 can’t be used/programmed. Same way if 3111 is used then 311 can’t be used/programmed.

• Same Flexible number cannot be assigned to two different stations. For example you if have used 211 for one station then 211 can’t be assigned to any other station if both the stations are in the same tenant group.

• Use Flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode. Software port numbers are to be used onlyduring for SE mode or SA mode.

• When the access code of a station is cleared; its Flexible number becomes null or void.• If access code of a station is cleared, one cannot call that station. However the station with null Flexible

number can make calls as usual.• It is not possible to give any station, a flexible number ‘1’.



Matrix


FLEXIBLE NUMBERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE(SLT)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------000 2001 001 2002 002 2003 003 2004 004 2005 005 2006 006 2007 007 2008

008 2009 009 2010 010 2011 011 2012 012 2013 013 2014 014 2015 015 2016

016 2017 017 2018 018 2019 019 2020 020 2021 021 2022 022 2023 023 2024

024 2025 025 2026 026 2027 027 2028 028 2029 029 2030 030 2031 031 2032

032 2033 033 2034 034 2035 035 2036 036 2037 037 2038 038 2039 039 2040

040 2041 041 2042 042 2043 043 2044 044 2045 045 2046 046 2047 047 2048

048 2049 049 2050 050 2051 051 2052 052 2053 053 2054 054 2055 055 2056

056 2057 057 2058 058 2059 059 2060 060 2061 061 2062 062 2063 063 2064

064 2065 065 2066 066 2067 067 2068 068 2069 069 2070 070 2071 071 2072

072 2073 073 2074 074 2075 075 2076 076 2077 077 2078 078 2079 079 2080

080 2081 081 2082 082 2083 083 2084 084 2085 085 2086 086 2087 087 2088

088 2089 089 2090 090 2091 091 2092 092 2093 093 2094 094 2095 095 2096

096 2097 097 2098 098 2099 099 2100 100 2101 101 2102 102 2103 103 2104

104 2105 105 2106 106 2107 107 2108 108 2109 109 2110 110 2111 111 2112

112 2113 113 2114 114 2115 115 2116 116 2117 117 2118 118 2119 119 2120120 2121 121 2122 122 2123 123 2124 124 2125 125 2126 126 2127 127 2128

128 2129 129 2130 130 2131 131 2132 132 2133 133 2134 134 2135 135 2136

136 2137 137 2138 138 2139 139 2140 140 2141 141 2142 142 2143 143 2144

144 2145 145 2146 146 2147 147 2148 148 2149 149 2150 150 2151 151 2152

152 2153 153 2154 154 2155 155 2156 156 2157 157 2158 158 2159 159 2160

160 2161 161 2162 162 2163 163 2164 164 2165 165 2166 166 2167 167 2168

168 2169 169 2170 170 2171 171 2172 172 2173 173 2174 174 2175 175 2176

176 2177 177 2178 178 2179 179 2180 180 2181 181 2182 182 2183 183 2184

184 2185 185 2186 186 2187 187 2188 188 2189 189 2190 190 2191 191 2192

192 2193 193 2194 194 2195 195 2196 196 2197 197 2198 198 2199 199 2200

200 2201 201 2202 202 2203 203 2204 204 2205 205 2206 206 2207 207 2208

208 2209 209 2210 210 2211 211 2212 212 2213 213 2214 214 2215 215 2216

216 2217 217 2218 218 2219 219 2220 220 2221 221 2222 222 2223 223 2224

224 2225 225 2226 226 2227 227 2228 228 2229 229 2230 230 2231 231 2232

232 2233 233 2234 234 2235 235 2236 236 2237 237 2238 238 2239 239 2240240 2241 241 2242 242 2243 243 2244 244 2245 245 2246 246 2247 247 2248

248 2249 249 2250 250 2251 251 2252 252 2253 253 2254 254 2255 255 2256

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


FLEXIBLE NUMBERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num Port Num

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of DIGITIAL KEY PHONE(DKP)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3001 001 3002 002 3003 003 3004 004 3005 005 3006 006 3007 007 3008

008 3009 009 3010 010 3011 011 3012 012 3013 013 3014 014 3015 015 3016016 3017 017 3018 018 3019 019 3020 020 3021 021 3022 022 3023 023 3024

024 3025 025 3026 026 3027 027 3028 028 3029 029 3030 030 3031 031 3032

032 3033 033 3034 034 3035 035 3036 036 3037 037 3038 038 3039 039 3040

040 3041 041 3042 042 3043 043 3044 044 3045 045 3046 046 3047 047 3048

048 3049 049 3050 050 3051 051 3052 052 3053 053 3054 054 3055 055 3056

056 3057 057 3058 058 3059 059 3060 060 3061 061 3062 062 3063 063 3064

064 3065 065 3066 066 3067 067 3068 068 3069 069 3070 070 3071 071 3072

072 3073 073 3074 074 3075 075 3076 076 3077 077 3078 078 3079 079 3080

080 3081 081 3082 082 3083 083 3084 084 3085 085 3086 086 3087 087 3088

088 3089 089 3090 090 3091 091 3092 092 3093 093 3094 094 3095 095 3096

096 3097 097 3098 098 3099 099 3100 100 3101 101 3102 102 3103 103 3104

104 3105 105 3106 106 3107 107 3108 108 3109 109 3110 110 3111 111 3112

112 3113 113 3114 114 3115 115 3116 116 3117 117 3118 118 3119 119 3120

120 3121 121 3122 122 3123 123 3124 124 3125 125 3126 126 3127 127 3128

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Flexible Numbers of DEPARTMENT GROUPS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3901 001 3902 002 3903 003 3904 004 3905 005 3906 006 3907 007 3908

008 3909 009 3910 010 3911 011 3912 012 3913 013 3914 014 3915 015 3916

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of TENANTS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 2991 001 2992 002 2993 003 2994 004 2995 005 2996 006 2997 007 2998

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of TRUNK ACCESS CODES

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 0 001 5 002 61 003 62 004 63 005 64 006 65 007 66

008 67 009 68

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of AOP-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3921 001 3922 002 3923 003 3924 004 3925 005 3926 006 3927 007 3928

008 3929 009 3930 010 3931 011 3932 012 3933 013 3934 014 3935 015 3936

016 3937

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of AIP

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3941 001 3942 002 3943 003 3944 004 3945 005 3946 006 3947 007 3948

008 3949 009 3950 010 3951 011 3952 012 3953 013 3954 014 3955 015 3956

016 3957

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of DOP

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3961 001 3962 002 3963 003 3964 004 3965 005 3966 006 3967 007 3968

008 3969 009 3970 010 3971 011 3972 012 3973 013 3974 014 3975 015 3976-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flexible Numbers of DIP

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 3981 001 3982 002 3983 003 3984 004 3985 005 3986 006 3987 007 3988

008 3989 009 3990 010 3991 011 3992 012 3993 013 3994 014 3995 015 3996

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Follow Me

What’s this?• Make your calls follow you wherever you go.• After going to your co-worker’s desk if you desire to receive all your calls on his station, use this feature.

How to use it?

Example:Your station number is 201. Your user password is 1212. Right now you are at station 203. You want todivert all your calls to station 203. Dial 134-201-1212 from station 203.

Cancel Follow Me

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Follow Me to a user.

Important points:1. The stations dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.2. Multiple users can use ‘Follow Me’ from the same station.3. Follow Me can be overwritten. User A sets Follow-Me from station B. Now, he goes to station C and he

wishes to receive his call at station C. He can use Follow Me once again from station C.4. Follow Me cannot be chained. If user A sets Follow Me from station B. And now B uses Follow Me from

station C, Follow Me of station A is automatically cancelled.5. Follow Me is a programmable feature. Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details.

Relevant topics:1. Call Forward2. Class Of Service (COS)

=X=X=


2 Dial 134-Stati on -User Passwo rd Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset of your stat ion Dial tone




Matrix


Help Reports

What’s this?• The Eternity supports printing of the help reports for all the features.• These help reports can be printed on the standard printer or transferred on a computer.• All the commands with description corresponding to a feature are printed in a table format.

How to use it?Use following command to generate the Help Report:4700

This command can be given from SE Mode & SA Mode.

Relevant topics:1. Communication Ports2. Printer Port

=X=X=



Matrix


Hold

What’s this?This feature allows the user to talk other station or external party without releasing the present party. Thisfeature is also called Consultation-Hold. It is same as asking the person to wait in the waiting room whileyou want to attend another important guest simultaneously.

How to use it?

Relevant points:1. Call Splitting2. Call Transfer 3. Conference

=X=X=

1 Speech with Party A

2 Dial Flash Party A goes on Hold and gets Music on Hold. Caller gets beeps

3 Dial Station Or Trunk A ccess Code Speech with dialed station or trunk dial tone



Matrix


Hotline

HotlineWhat’s this?• Hotline eliminates repeated dialing of a station number.• As soon as the user picks up his handset, the Eternity automatically dials the fixed station. The station

starts ringing and the user gets ring back tone.• In an office environment, it is found that a boss calls his secretary or his co-worker frequently. He can use

this feature.

How to use it?

Example:The boss needs to speak to his secretary (station number 202) many times in a day. He can avoid repeateddialing by activating the Hotline feature from his station:151-202

Delayed hot line is possible. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the station immediately butget regular dial tone. If the user does not dial anything during this short dial tone, the Eternity places thehotline call to the station. This delay timer allows the user to dial other numbers without canceling hot line.

Set Hotline Timer

• The default value of hot line timer is 3 seconds and its range is 1-9 seconds.• The hot line timer cannot be set to 0 seconds.

Hot Outward Dialing (HOD)What’s this?• You get connected to a desired trunk the moment you lift the handset.• This feature is useful when you are making more number of trunk calls compared to internal calls. Once

this feature is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone after the set time.

How to use it?

Example:

To simulate dialing of trunk access code 62 immediately on lifting the handset, dial152-62

• Delayed HOD is possible as on a station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the trunk line immediately but get a regular dial tone. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.




2 Dial 154-Seconds Confirmation tone


2 Dial 152-Trun k A ccess Code Confirmation tone



Matrix


HOD With NumberWhat’s this?• You get connected to a desired external number the moment you lift the handset.• This feature is useful when you are making call to a particular external number many times in a day. Once

this feature is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset, the system dials the telephone number and you getconnected to the external person.

How to use it?

Example:Let us activate HOD for external number 0265 630555. Let us assume trunk access code ‘63’. Dial followingcode to set this feature:153-63-0265630555-#

• Delayed HOD With Number is possible from any station. After lifting the handset you do not getconnected to the external number immediately instead you get a normal dial tone. You get connected to the

external number only after the set time. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.• This allows you to dial other numbers without canceling HOD

Important point:• Hotline and HOD cannot be activated on the same station at the same time.

Cancel Hotline/Hot Outward DialingWhat’s this?There is a common code to cancel both Hotline and Hot Outward Dialing.

How to use it?

• Please note that the cancellation code must be dialed from the Eternity dial tone. If the delay timer is keptat its minimum of 1 second, you have to be very quick in dialing the code.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot line to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Toll Control

=X=X=


2 Dial 153-Trun k A ccess Cod e-Num ber-# Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset Eternity dial tone




Matrix


Internal Call

How to make an Internal Call?From SLT/DKP:• Lift the handset.• Dial the desired station’s access code

• The called station rings.• Speech is established when the called party lifts the handset

From DKP: Hands free Operation• Press the key ‘SPK’ on the DKP• Dial the desired station’s access code• The called station rings.• Speech is established when the called party lifts the handset or presses the ‘SPK’ key.

Important points:• Hands free Operation is also possible if a speakerphone is used.• The stations having Class of Service level with internal call allowed will only be able to make Internal

Calls

=X=X=



Matrix


Interrupt Request

What’s this?• When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his

conversation after intimating him.• While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for 45 seconds.

• During the beeps, the called person can dial ‘Flash ’ to answer your call. He can talk to you while his previous partner is put on hold and gets music.

• Replace your handset once your talk is over. This will automatically restore his original speech with theheld-up party.

How to use it?

Important points:

• Interrupt Request works even when the destination is talking on a trunk line.• Interrupt Request works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.• Interrupt Request is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Interrupt Request.• The called party requested Interrupt Request can toggle both the calls.• Interrupt Request can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be

transferred to a busy station after putting the calling party in hold and interrupting the busy destination toinform him about his call. This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Interrupt Request to a user.

Timer of RelevanceInterrupt Request timer – Time for which the station on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps.Command: 3002-Seconds Default: 45 secondsValid Range: 001 to 255 seconds

Relevant topics::1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Privacy

=X=X=


2 Dial Station Busy Tone

3 Dial 3 Ring Back Tone. The called person gets beeps

4 The destination dials 'Flash' Speech with the called person



Matrix


Last Caller Recall

What’s this?Eternity offers a facility to trace last caller to your station.

How to use it?

Example:Station 2001 wants to find that who made a last call to it.Station 2001 should dial 112 from his station. The station that last called 2001 rings. Speech establisheswhen the called party answers the call.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Last Caller Recall to a user.

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset Dial tone2 Dial 112 The station that last called you rings. You get Ring Back Tone

3 Called party answers the call Speech



Matrix


Last Number Redial

What’s this?• This feature redials the last number dialed, be it a station or an external number.• This feature saves time during retrying a busy external number. It is same as REDIAL button of the

telephone instrument.

• This feature is also known as Last Number Redial (LNR).

How to use Redial from SLT?

How to use Redial from DKP?

Important points:• The system uses the same trunk access code you used for dialing the number last time.• Dialing ‘7’ can do redialing of both the external number and the internal number.• The ‘Redial’ button of the SLT can be used to redial internal station only.• Redial is a programmable feature. Refer Class Of Service (COS) for more details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow redial to a user.

Timer of RelevancePause timer: Please refer the topic ‘Trunk Parameters’.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Trunk Parameters

=X=X=


2 Dial 7 Silence

3 The system grabs a trunk Trunk dial tone

4 The system inserts pause

5 The Eternity dials out the last number

1 Press 'Redial' Silence

2 The system grabs a trunk Trunk dial tone

3 The system inserts pause4 The eternity dials out the last number



Matrix


Least Cost Routing (LCR)

What’s this?Different basic service providers offer different rates for different times of the day and the destinationnumbers. For example, Reliance may offer cheaper rates compared to BSNL for calls made during peak hours. i.e. 09.00 to 20.00. Whereas BSNL may offer cheaper rates as compared to Reliance during off peak

hours i.e. 20.00 to 09.00

Least cost routing logic is used to select the cheapest trunk from the total allotted trunks to the station tomake outgoing calls. This way, the cost of outgoing calls can be minimized, by selecting the mosteconomical trunk depending upon the time of call and the destination number.

Above diagram shows that few trunks of both BSNL and Reliance are interfaced with Eternity. Here it isdesirable to use LCR facility if these service providers offer different rates.

Eternity offers three different types of LCR logic.

Time based LCR – This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates during different timings of the day. This logic uses online dialing. In Online dialing, the digits dialed by the user are directly passed onthe trunk.

Number based LCR – This logic is used when different SPs provides different rates for different areas,different phone numbers. For example, BSNL provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda to Delhias compared to Reliance. This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digitsare first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.

Mixed LCR – This logic is used when the rates of service providers differ both time wise and number wise.For example, BSNL provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda to Mumbai during peak hrs (09.00 to20.00) as compared to Reliance. Whereas Reliance provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda toDelhi during off peak hours (20.00 to 09.00). This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store andForward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.



Matrix


How to program?Step 1: Decide the type of LCR to be programmed to a trunk access group viz. No LCR, Time zone wise

LCR, Number wise LCR or Mixed LCR using command 4830 .Step 2: Assign the service provider code to each trunk using command 4831 Step 3: Program the LCR table as per the LCR type selected using command 4801,4802,4803 or 4810,4811,

4812 or 4820,4821,4822.

Step 4: Take a printout of the LCR configuration using command 4800

Step 1Decide the LCR type i.e. whether no LCR, Time wise LCR, Number wise LCR or Mixed LCR.Use following command to program LCR type for a trunk access group:4830-1-Trunk Access Group-LCR Type Trunk access group is from 00 to 24.

Step 2Assign the service provider code to a trunk Use following command to assign code of a service provider:4831-1-Trunk-Service Provider Code Where,Trunk – Software port number of the trunk Service Provider Code is from 0 to 3.You can assign any code to any service provider. Suppose we have four service providers viz. BSNL,Reliance, TATA and Hughes then you can give code 0 to BSNL, code 1 to reliance, code 2 to TATA and code3 to Hughes.

Step 3• If time wise LCR is to be used make following table on a plain paper.

In the above table for different time zones, program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasingcost.For example, If we have four service providers BSNL (SP#0), TATA (SP#1), Reliance (SP#2) and Hughes(SP#3) and if for time zone 0 (08.00 to 20.00) the services of Reliance are cheapest followed by TATA,BSNL and Hughes then the first row in the table would appear as shown in the table.

Use following command to program Time Zone Index:4802-Time Zone I ndex-Start Time-End Time Where,

LCR Type Meaning

0 No LCR

1 Time zone wise LCR

2 Number wise LCR

3 Mixed LCR (Time zone wise + Number wise)

Time Zone Index

08.00 – 20.00 2 1 0 3

1 2 1 3 0 … … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

9

Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost



Matrix


Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.

The time zone table looks like:

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Time Zone:4803-Time Zone I ndex-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4 Where,Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9

SP1: Service Provider 0 is the cheapest service provider SP2: Service Provider 1 is the cheaper service provider SP3: Service Provider 2 is the cheap service provider SP4: Service Provider 3 is the costly service provider

Please note that i t is mandatory to complete this command. I f f ewer number of service providers are used,then the repeat the cheapest service provider for remaini ng SPs.

Use following command to default Time Zone wise LCR table:4801-# Default time zone is 00.00 to 23.59Default service provider sequence is 1,2,3,4.

The default time zone wise LCR table would look like:

• If Number wise LCR is to be used, make following table on a plain paper.


0 HH:MM HH:MM1 HH:MM HH:MM

… …

… … .

… …

9 HH:MM HH:MM

Time Zone Index

00.00 – 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 – 23.59 0 1 2 3 … … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

00.00 – 23.59 0 1 2 3


Number Index0 (022) 1 3 0 2

1 2 1 3 0 … … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

9 B B B B




Matrix


In the above table for Number Index 0 (Number string in Number Index 0 can be a complete telephonenumber, a truncated number or an area code), program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For example, if we have four service providers viz. BSNL (SP#0) TATA (SP#1), Reliance(SP#2) and Hughes (SP#3) and if for area code 022, the services of TATA are cheapest followed by Hughes,BSNL and Reliance then the first row in the table would appear as shown.

Use following command to program Number Index:4811-Number I ndex-Number stri ng -# Where, Number Index is from 0 to 9 Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of maximum 16 digits.Default Number string is ‘Blank’.The number string table looks like:

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each number:4812-Number I ndex-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4 Where, Number Index is from 0 to 9SP1: Service Provider 0 is the cheapest service provider SP2: Service Provider 1 is the cheaper service provider SP3: Service Provider 2 is the cheap service provider

SP4: Service Provider 3 is the costly service provider

Please note that i t is mandatory to complete this command. I f f ewer number of service providers are used,then the repeat the cheapest service provider f or remaini ng SPs.

Use following command to default Number wise LCR table:4810-# Default Number string is blank Default service provider sequence is 0,1,2,3.

The default number wise LCR table would look like:

Number Index Number String

0 (16 digits allowed)


.. ..8 (16 digits allowed)


Number Index

B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3

… … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

… … .

B 0 1 2 3




Matrix


• If mixed LCR is to be used, make following table on a plain paper.

Suppose we have four basic service providers viz. BSNL (SP#0), TATA (SP#1), Reliance (SP#2) and Hughes(SP#3).

For Area code 022 (Number String 0) in time zone 08.00 – 12.00, (time zone 0), BSNL provides cheapestservices followed by TATA, Hughes and reliance. Then the first entry in first row would be as shown.

For Area code 011(Number String 1) in time zone 08.00-12.00 (time zone 0), Hughes provides cheapestservices followed by BSNL, Reliance & TATA, then the second entry in first row would be as shown.

For Area code 022(Number String 0) in time zone (12.00-18.00) time zone 1, cheapest services are offered by Reliance followed by TATA, BSNL, Hughes the 1st entry in 2nd row would be as shown in the table.

Use following command to program Time Zone Index for Mixed LCR:4821-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time Where,

Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.Default Time zone is 00.00 to 23.59The time zone table looks like:

Use following command to program Number Index for Mixed LCR:4822-Number I ndex-Number stri ng -# Where, Number Index is from 0 to 9. Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of maximum 8 digits.Default Number string is ‘Blank’.

Number Index

Time Zone Index 022 011 033 ……...…. 9

08.00 to 12.00 0,2,3,1 3,0,1,2 ………… ……...

12.00 to 18.00 1,2,0,3 ……….. ……….. ………… ………

… … … … … …

… … … … … . . . .

… … … … … .

…………

… … … … . . . … .

9 ……… ………. ………… ………


0 HH:MM HH:MM

1 HH:MM HH:MM … …

… …

… …

9 HH:MM HH:MM



Matrix


The Number string table looks like:

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each number and time zone:4823-Number I ndex—Time zone index- SP0-SP1-SP2-SP3 Where, Number Index is from 0 to 9.Time Zone Index is from 0 to 9.SP1: Service Provider 0 is the cheapest service provider SP2: Service Provider 1 is the cheaper service provider SP3: Service Provider 2 is the cheap service provider

SP4: Service Provider 3 is the costly service provider

Please note that i t is mandatory to complete this command. I f f ewer number of service providers are used,then the repeat the cheapest service provider f or remaini ng SPs.

Default Number Index is ‘Blank’Default Time zone is 00.00 to 23.59.Default service provider sequence is 1,2,3,4.

Default mixed LCR table is shown below:

Step 4Take printout for the LCR ConfigurationUse following command to take the LCR printout configuration:4800

Examples:Given: Three service providers are available viz. BSNL (SP Code:0), Reliance (SP Code: 1) and Hughes (SPCode: 2). Four trunks with software port numbers 000, 001, 002 and 003 are available. 000 and 001 are fromBSNL, 002 is from Reliance and 003 is from Hughes. All the trunks are in trunk access group 00.

Number Index Number String


1 (16 digits allowed) …

…

…

… .


Number Index

Time Zone Index

B B B ……….. B

00.00 to 23.59 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 ………… 0,1,2,3

00.00 to 23.59 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 ………… 0,1,2,3 … … … … … …

… … … … … . . . .

… … … … … .

… … … … . . . …

…………

… … … … . . . … .

00.00 to 23.59 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 ………… 0,1,2,3



Matrix


First assign the SP code to each trunk using following command:4831-1-000-0 4831-1-001-0 4831-1-002-1 4831-1-003-2

Example1:• BSNL is cheapest during 08.00 to 16.00 followed by Hughes and Reliance.• Hughes is cheapest during 16.00 to 20.00 followed by BSNL & Reliance.• Reliance is cheapest for 20.00 to 23.00 followed by BSNL & Hughes.• BSNL is cheapest for 23.00 to 08.00 followed by Reliance & Hughes.

Use following command to program time zone LCR type for the trunk access group:4830-1-00-1

Use following command to program LCR time zones:4802-1-1600-2000 4802-2-2000-2300

4802-3-2300-0800

Use following commands to assign service providers for the respective time zone:4803-0-0-2-1-1 4803-1-2-0-1-1 4803-2-1-0-2-2 4803-3-0-1-2-2

With above programming the time zone LCR table will look as below:

Example 2:• BSNL is cheapest for Baroda – Mumbai call followed by Reliance and Hughes.• Reliance offers cheapest service if a local is made to 665555 from 630555 followed by Hughes & BSNL.• Hughes offers cheapest service for Baroda – Delhi call followed by BSNL & Reliance.

Use following command to program number wise LCR type:4830-1-00-2

Use following command to program number index for LCR:4811-0-022-#

Time Zone index

08.00 to 16.00 0 2 1 1

16.00 to 20.00 2 0 1 120.00 to 23.00 1 0 2 2

23.00 to 08.00 0 1 2 2

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3

00.00 to 23.59 0 1 2 3




Matrix


4811-1-665555-# 4811-2-011-#

Use following command to assign SPs for respective numbers:4812-0-0-1-2-2 4812-1-1-2-0-0

4812-2-2-0-1-1

With above programming the Number LCR table will look as below:

Example 3:• BSNL is cheapest for Baroda – Mumbai call during 08.00 – 20.00 followed by Hughes and Reliance.• Reliance is cheapest for Baroda – Delhi call during 20.00 to 08.00 followed by BSNL and Hughes.

Use following command to define LCR type:4830-1-00-3

Use following command to program time zone index in mixed LCR:4821-0-0800-2000 4821-1-2000-0800

Use following command to program number index in mixed LCR:4822-0-022-# 4822-1-011-#

Use following command to assign SPs for respective number wise & zone wise LCR:4823-0-0-0-2-1-1 4823-1-1-1-0-2-2

The table will look as below:

Number index

22 0 1 2 2

665555 1 2 0 0

11 2 0 1 1

B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3

B 0 1 2 3


Number Index

Time Zone Index022 011 B ………..

08.00 to 20.00 0,2,1,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3

20.00 to 08.00 0,1,2,3 1,0,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 … …

… …

… …

… …

… …

… …

… …

… …

… …

… …

00.00 to 23.59 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3 0,1,2,3



Matrix



Default commands

(Default LCR type is No LCR)

(Default Service provider is cheapest trunk i.e. code 0)

Relevant topics:1. Trunk Access Groups2. Trunk Parameters

Program LCR type for a trunk access group 4830-1-Trunk Access Group-LCR Type

Program LCR type for a range of trunk access group 4830-2-Trunk Access Group-Trunk Access

Group- LCR Type

Program LCR type for all trunk access groups 4830-* -LCR Type

Assign code of a service provider to a trunk 4831-1-Trunk-Service Provi der Code

Assign code of a service provider to a range of trunks 4831-2-Trunk-T runk-Service Provider Code

Assign code of a service provider to all the trunks 4831-* - Servi ce Provi der Code

Program default LCR type for a of trunk access group 4830-1-Trunk Access Group-#

Program default LCR type for a range of trunk access

group

4830-2-Trunk Access Group-Trunk Access

Group-#

Program default LCR type for all trunk access groups 4830-* -#

Assign default service provider to a trunk 4831-1-Trunk-#

Assign default service provider to a range of trunks 4831-2-Trunk-Trunk – #

Assign default service provider to all the trunks 4831-* - #



Matrix


=X=X=

LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR) AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:32

===============================================================================

Time Based LCR Table

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time Zone Start Time End Time Service Providers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 00:00 23:59 0123

1 00:00 23:59 0123

2 00:00 23:59 01233 00:00 23:59 0123

4 00:00 23:59 0123

5 00:00 23:59 0123

6 00:00 23:59 0123

7 00:00 23:59 0123

8 00:00 23:59 0123

9 00:00 23:59 0123

===============================================================================

Number Based LCR Table

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Index Number Service Providers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 0123

1 0123

2 01233 0123

4 0123

5 0123

6 0123

7 0123

8 0123

9 0123

===============================================================================

Mixed LCR Tables

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Start Time 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00

End Time 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59 23:59

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Index Number Service Providers

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

1 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

2 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

3 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

4 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

5 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

6 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

7 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

8 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

9 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123 0123

===============================================================================

TAG 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

LCR No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Eternity V1R1 Page :01



Matrix


Maturity

What’s this?A call is said to be matured when the called party lifts the telephone and answers the call. PBX should billthe call only when the call matures. This information about the call maturity should be given to the PBX.There are three methods to sense maturity.

• Delay• CPD + Delay• Polarity Reversal• 16KHz Metering

How it works?DelayIf the reversal facility is not available from the Service provider and still we want to calculate call cost, thismethod can be used. Please note that this is a very simple method and exact bill cannot be guaranteed. Inthis method, it is assumed that the call will mature after set timer (called maturity delay timer) irrespective ofwhether the call actually gets matured or not.• Measured call duration cannot match exactly with the actual duration because maturity delay timer has no

relation with the actual maturity.• If the maturity delay timer is less, the calls that were not replied will also be considered as matured ones.• If the maturity delay timer is more, short matured calls will go undetected.• The system starts the timer once a station enters speech mode.

CPD + DelayCPD stands for Call Progress Detection. Call is in progress or not is found by detecting various tones likedial tone, busy tone, ring back tone (RBT), routing tone, etc. on the trunk lines.

In this option, the system starts detecting the ring back tone as soon as it enters speech mode. (The systementers speech mode after time = Trunk interdigit wait timer after the last digit is dialed). System detects ring back tone for time = Maturity delay timer.If ring back tone is sensed, the system waits for ring back tone to stop for Time = maturity delay timer. If the

RBT stops and is properly sensed by the system, it understands to be a matured call and starts duration meter for billing.

If the RBT is not sensed or does not stop during Maturity delay timer, the system understands it to be amature call and starts the duration meter for billing.

Polarity ReversalService provider provides this signal. Whenever the called party lifts the handset to answer, Service provider senses it and gives a signal to the caller. PBX senses this signal and starts the duration meter.

16KHz MeteringPSTN exchange provides pulses of 16KHz for every unit depending upon the pulse rate. Suppose you arecalling Mumbai from Baroda and the pulse rate is of 16 seconds then PSTN exchange gives a pulse of 16KHz every 16th second till you are in speech with the other end.

Eternity provides the facility to sense 16KHz signal. Eternity counts these pulses, multiplies it with the unitcharge and adds the service charge. This is how the Eternity calculates call charges. This method of call costcalculation is most efficient.



Matrix


Mathematically,Call Charges = (Number of Pulses X Unit Charge) + Service Charges

Advantages of 16KHz• No need to enter STD codes• No need to enter time zones

• No need to enter pulse rates• Only the unit charges and the service charges are to be entered

How to program?Use following command to program maturity type for a trunk:3612-1-Trunk-Maturi ty type Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk

Timer of RelevanceMaturity Delay Timer-Time after which the system starts metering the call.Command: 3613-Timer Default: 25 secondsValid Range: 000 to 255 seconds

CAUTION:CPD is not 100% accurate. Matri x assumes no responsibi li ty for any error i n SMDR reports or calculation.

=X=X=

Maturity Type Meaning

0 Delay

1 CPD + Delay

2 Polarity Reversal3 16KHz Metering



Matrix


Music on Hold

What’s this?Whenever a person is put on hold while his call is being transferred or otherwise, the person gets music.Eternity supports two types of music sources.

Internal Music Source

There are four different varieties of internal music. They differ in their cadences, tunes and tempo from eachother. All these four varieties are stored in four backup files in the system with file identity 12 to 15.

External Music SourceA hold-on music of your choice can be played while you keep a person on hold. The Eternity supports suchexternal music interface on the switch card by way of providing an Analog input port (AIP). An AIP canhandle un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.

The specifications of an Analog input port (AIP) are given below:

Specification ValueInterface Type Audio signal

Frequency 300 Hz to 3400 Hz

Maximum voltage 0.707 Vrms across 600 Ohms

DC bias Not more than 10V DC

Isolation Internal Transformer

Source Impedance required 600 Ohms

Termination provided 600 Ohms



Matrix


Any external device meeting above specifications can be connected with the system. The volume must be setto a level such that the music on the trunks is not very low or very loud. The volume of the signal comingfrom this device must never increase beyond the specified limits.The external music port i s an audio input por t and no electri cal signal of higher value than the specif ied limi t shoul d be appli ed to this port. This may resul t in permanent damage to the system. Matri x warranty does not cover damages resul ting f rom improper use.

How to program?Use following command to demonstrate Music on Hold:5300-Code Where,

Use following command to select the type of music to be played when stations are kept on hold:5302-Code

Use following command to select the type of music to be played when trunks are kept on hold:5303-Code

Use following command to select the type of music for background music:5304-Code

Example:Program the system such that when stations are kept on hold, they get internal Music on Hold type 2 andwhen trunks are kept on hold, the caller gets external music. Background music should be external.5301-1 5302-0 5303-1 5304-1

Important point:• Please note that Music on Hold is stored in Voice Module 00. Hence it is possible that if the system

remains swithced OFF for 10 days or more, the Music on Hold gets erased and on again switching ON thesystem, the stations/trunks kept on hold may not get Music on Hold. However, all the four varieties of Internal Music on Hold are stored in back files from 12 to 15.

Code Meaning

0 Internal Music Source

1 External Music Source

Code Meaning0 Internal Music Source


Code Meaning



Code Meaning





Matrix


Hence in such cases,Use following command to copy voice message from a backup file to a voice module:3513-F il e I denti ty Number-Voice Module Number Where,File Identity Number is from 12 to 15 (You may select music of your choice)Voice Module Number is 00

Relevant topics:1. Back Ground Music2. Switch Card in Eternity Eternity-Installation Manual

=X=X=



Matrix


Operator

What’s this?• Operator is a person who handles more number of calls at a time. She acts a link between the caller and the

called person.• Any DKP or SLT can be interpreted as Operator.

• If SLT is made an Operator, she can handle only one call at a time. Similarly if a DKP having one loop keyis made an operator she can handle only one call at a time.

• A DKP user can be made an operator by assigning him more number of Loops.• If the traffic is more, more than one Operator can be defined. The traffic can be distributed accordingly

between the operators.

How it works?• An Operator can be assigned to each SLT or DKP.• One SLT or DKP cannot be assigned more than one Operator.• All SLTs and DKPs can be assigned one Operator.• When any SLT or DKP presses ‘9’ the system diverts the call to the operator he is assigned.• A Department Group can also be made an Operator. In this case on dialing Operator calling code ‘9’, the

call will land on the stations of the Department Group.• An Operator should be assigned Key functions and LED functions. For more details, please refer “Digital

Key Phone – Soft Key Programming”• When the Operator leaves her desk, she can dial a command to make Operator absent. On coming back to

her desk, she can dial a command to make Operator present.

How to program?Step 1: All the programming of Operator for making outgoing calls or landing of incoming calls is same as

that of a SLT or DKP.Step 2: Operator should be given more number of loop keys to handle more number of calls.Step 3: Assign Operator for SLTs and DKPs using command 2101 and 2102.

Use following command to program the Operator station for a SLT:2101-1-SLT-Port Type-Operator Where,SLT is the software port number from 000 to 255.Port Type is the port type of the Operator Station.

Operator is the software port number of the operator station

Port Type Meaning

0 Null Port

1 SLT

2 DKP

4 Department Group

Port Type Operator Station

Software Number

00 (Null) Null Port

01 (SLT) 000-255

02 (DKP) 000-127

04 (Department Group) 00-15



Matrix


Use following command to program the Operator station for a DKP:2102-1-DKP-Por t Type-Operator Where,DKP is the software port number from 000 to 127.Port Type is the port type of the Operator Station.

Operator is the software port number of the operator station

Example:Program a system for following conditions:• Call on trunk 000 and 001 should land on DKP 000 during working hours• DKP 000 can handle 5 calls at a time• DKP 000 can make all the types of outgoing calls• SLT 000,001,002,003,004 and 005 can call DKP 000 by dialing ‘9’.• DKP 001,002,003,004 can call DKP 000 by dialing ‘9’.

Solution:Use following commands:

Making a trunk landing group 002002-1-00-0-02-000 2003-1-00-0-015 2004-1-00-0-0 2005-1-00-1

Both the trunks 000 and 001 lands on DKP 000 during working hours2011-1-000-00 2011-1-001-00

Assigning Call Loops to the DKP 0001401-1-000-05

Assigning Allowed Toll Control Group and Denied Toll Control Group to DKP during working hours1921-1-000-00 1971-1-000-04

Port Type Meaning

0 Null Port1 SLT

2 DKP

4 Department Group

Port Type Operator Station

Software Number

00 (Null) Null Port

01 (SLT) 000-255

02 (DKP) 000-12704 (Department Group) 00-15



Matrix


Assigning Operator to SLTs2101-1-000-02-000 2101-1-001-02-000 2101-1-002-02-000 2101-1-003-02-000 2101-1-004-02-000

2101-1-005-02-000

Assigning Operator to DKPs2102-1-001-02-000 2102-1-002-02-000 2102-1-003-02-000 2102-1-004-02-000

Similarly more number of Operators can be assigned within one system.

How to use it?To make Operator Absent, dial 104-0

To make Operator Present, dial 104-1


Relevant topic:1. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming

=X=X=

Assign an Operator to a SLT 2101-1-SLT-Por t Type-Operator

Assign an Operator to a range of SLTs 2101-2-SLT-SLT-Por t Type-Operator

Assign an Operator to all SLTs 2101-* -Port Type-Operator

Assign an Operator to a DKP 2102-1-DKP-Port Type-Operator

Assign an Operator to a range of DKPs 2102-2-DKP-DKP-Por t Type-Operator

Assign an Operator to all DKPs 2102-* -Port Type-Operator



Matrix


Override

What is this?• Important people can override Do Not Disturb feature of the called person.• This ensures selective privacy for the users.

How to use?

Important points:• Override feature is relevant only when the called person has activated Do Not Disturb (DND) on his

station.• If the caller is in the DND list of the called person, he gets routing tone.• Thus, the caller knows that the called person needs privacy.• If his call is important and he wishes to override the Do Not Disturb (DND), he can exercise his override

right.• Override feature is effective only if the called person is not using privacy against it.• Override is a programmable feature. Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow override to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Do Not Disturb (DND)3. Privacy

=X=X=


2 DialStation Routing tone

3 Dial 4 Ring back tone. The destination get ring



Matrix


Paging

What’s this?You can deliver a message to a mass of people just by lifting your handset and dialing a code. This feature ishelpful when it is required to call few people for a meeting. This feature is of great use in factories, offices,etc. where it is not feasible to provide more number of stations. In such cases, if you need to call somebody

you can just make an announcement naming him to come and see you or call you. This can also be used for mass communication.

The Eternity supports two types of paging.

Internal pagingEach DKP is equipped with built-in hands-free speaker. A user can use this for announcements. As soon asthe access code for a paging zone is dialed, the speaker of the DKP is activated and the caller’s voice isheard.

One or more destinations (DKP Stations and external paging ports) can be paged simultaneously dependingon the zone programming.



Matrix


Maximum number of internal paging ports = Max number of DKP = 128

External PagingMany times it is required to make announcements in a hall, in a lobby or on a shop floor. In such situations,internal paging might not serve the purpose because of limited voice level available on the small speaker of aDKP. As higher power output is needed, external amplifier and speaker are desirable.

The Eternity supports such external paging by way of providing an Analog output port (AOP) on the switchcard. An AOP outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal to be amplified by an external amplifier.The specifications of an Analog output port (AOP) are given below.

Paging Interface block diagram is given below:

For more details on installation of external paging equipment, please refer “ Eternity-Installation Manual”.Please note that the Eternity supports one built in paging port on the switch card. This port is located on theswitch card of the system. Its interface is available on from the facial panel on the front side of the card.This special external paging port has following hardware IDSlot Number = 37; Port Number = 00.

How to use it?A User needs to dial paging access code for making announcement in a paging zone. Access code for each paging zone is Flexible and can be programmed the same way other access codes are programmed.

A paging zone may contain one or more internal and external paging ports. When a user dials a code for thezone, all the speakers of the zone are activated and the announcement is heard on all the speakers.

Specification Value

Interface Type Audio signal

Frequency 300 Hz to 3400 Hz

Maximum voltage 0.707 Vrms across 600 Ohms

Source impedance 600 Ohms

Termination Required 600 Ohms

DC bias None

Isolation Internal Transformer



Matrix


Once the announcement is over, user needs to replace the handset. The system deactivates all the speakers.

The flow chart elaborates these steps.

How to program?The Eternity supports maximum of ten (10) paging zones. Each zone can have maximum of eight (8) paging ports. A port can be of internal type (DKP) or external type (built-in port).

Paging zone table looks like:

Use following command to program an entry for a page zone in the paging zone table:3101-1-Page Zone-Port I ndex-Station Type-Station Where,Zone Number is from 0 to 9


2 Dial103-Page Zone Number You get connected to the external paging port

3 Start announcement when the ring back tone stops

Start

User dials a paging zone code

System activates the free ports

User speaks out his message. The

message is heard on all the speakers

The user disconnects

System releases all the paging ports

and deactivates the speakers

End

Making an

announcement

Terminating an

Announcement

Type Number Type Number Type Number Type Number

Zone 0 2 3 0 1 0 116 0 25

Zone 1 6 0 1 1 1 5 1 2

Zone 2 0 1 0 1

Zone 9

Port 7…………..Zone

Port 0 Port 1 Port 2



Matrix


Port Index is from 0 to 7Station Type is the Paging destination port type

000 is the AOP on the Switch CardStation = Software port number of the port.

Use following command to program same entry for a range of page zones in the paging zone table:3101-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-Por t Index-Station Type-Station

Use following command to program same entry in all page zones in the paging zone table:3101-* -Port I ndex-Station Type-Station

Example 1Announcement is to be made on DKP ports 000, 001 and 002 in page zone 0

3101-1-0-0-02-000 3101-1-0-1-02-001 3101-1-0-2-02-002

Example 2Announcement is to be made on built in paging port (Software port no. 000) and on DKP ports 000, 001 and0023101-1-0-0-06-000 3101-1-0-3-02-000 3101-1-0-4-02-001 3101-1-0-5-02-002

Relevant topic:1. Eternity Eternity-Installation Manual

Station Type Software Number Range

0 Null Port --

2 DKP Port 000 to 127

6 AOP Port 000 to 016



Matrix


=X=X=

PAGING ZONES AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:31

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Zone Destinations(Type-Port)

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 - - - - - - - -

1 - - - - - - - -

2 - - - - - - - -

3 - - - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - -

5 - - - - - - - -

6 - - - - - - - -

7 - - - - - - - -

8 - - - - - - - -

9 - - - - - - - -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Printer Port

What’s this?The Eternity offers a built in parallel port for connecting a printer with the system. This port is available (inthe form of a 25 pin connector) on the master card of the system and is marked PRN on the facia panel.

How it works?Any standard printer can be attached with the system. The system sends data in the pure ASCII format. Nospecial characters or control sequences are sent.

How to use it?This port can be used to generate reports for one of the following facilities:1. SMDR Outgoing online printing2. SMDR Incoming online printing3. SMDR reports offline printing4. Configuration Reports

Relevant topics:

1. Station Message Details Recording (SMDR)2. Configuration Reports

=X=X=



Matrix


Priority

What’s this?All callers do not have same hierarchical position in an organization. It is not advisable to keep a call fromsome important person waiting just because there is already one unimportant call pending at the destination.The important caller should be allowed to jump the queue and be attended first ahead of other earlier pending

calls.

Following cases highlight the utility of this feature:1. Calls from CEO.2. Calls on a special or private trunk line3. Calls on a help or emergency line.4. Calls on a hot line.All the above calls can be given priority from other normal calls.Priority is relevant only when there is more than one call pending on the destination.

How it works?When the destination answers a call by going off-hook or by pressing ANSWER key, the call with the

highest priority is connected to him.

In case of a DKP user, the second line of the LCD shows the call with the highest priority. And this will bethe first call to be answered whenever the user lifts his handset or presses the ANSWER key.

In case of a SLT user, the priority is not relevant because there cannot be more than one call ringing on aSLT.

The Eternity supports Flexible priority assignment for different users. Each port can be assigned a prioritylevel between “0” to “9”. Higher the priority level, more important the caller is. Accordingly 0 has the least priority and 9 are the highest priority. Following ports can be programmed with a desired priority level:1. SLT users.2. DKP users3. Trunk lines4. Priority logic also applies to operators.



Matrix


Above example shows arrival of calls on the operator in following chronological order:

When operator answers calls by going off-hook or by pressing answer key, above calls will be answered inthe following order:1. DKP#2012. TRUNK#0013. SLT#3014. SLT#302Of course, the DKP user can alter the above sequence by manually answering calls by using the DSS-64 key.

How to program?Use following command to assign priority to SLT:

2901-1-SLT-Priority Where,SLT is the software port number of the user.Priority is a single digit number from 0 to 9.

Use following command to assign priority to DKP:2902-1-DKP-Priority Where,DKP is the software port number of the user.Priority is a single digit number from 0 to 9.

Use following command to assign priority to Trunk:

2903-1-Trunk-Priority Where,Trunk is the software port number of the Trunk Priority is a single digit number from 0 to 9.

Example:Program priority for the following stations in the given hierarchical structure:Station for CEO is a DKP (S/w port number 000)Station for GM is a DKP (S/w Port number 001)Stations for four Department heads are DKP (S/w port Numbers 002,003,004,005)Stations for five Executives are SLT (S/w port numbers 000,001,002,003,004)Stations for office staff persons are SLT (S/w port numbers 007,008,009,010)Station for two office boys are SLT (S/w port numbers 005,006)

2902-1-000-9 2902-1-001-8 2902-2-002-005-7 2901-2-000-004-6 2901-2-007-010-5 2901-2-005-006-0

Caller Time of the call Priority

SLT 301 10:00:00 0

SLT 302 10:00:05 0

TRUNK 001 10:00:10 4

DKP 201 10:00:15 7



Matrix



Default commands

=X=X=

Assign a priority to a SLT. 2901-1-SLT -Priorit y

Assign same priority to range of SLTs. 2901-2-SLT-SLT -Priori ty

Assign same priority to all SLTs. 2901-*-Priority

Assign priority to a DKP. 2902-1-DKP -Pri ori ty

Assign same priority to range of DKPs. 2902-2-DKP-DKP -Pri orit y

Assign same priority to all DKPs. 2902-*-Priority

Assign priority to a Trunk. 2903-1-Trunk -Pri ori ty

Assign same priority to range of Trunks. 2903-2-Trunk-Trunk -Priori ty

Assign same priority to all Trunks. 2903-*-Priority

Assign default priority to a SLT 2901-1-SLT-#

Assign default priority to range of SLTs. 2901-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default priority to all SLTs. 2901-* -#

Assign default priority to a DKP. 2902-1-DKP-#

Assign default priority to range of DKPs. 2902-2-DKP-DKP -#

Assign default priority to all DKPs. 2902-* -#

Assign default priority to a Trunk. 2903-1-Trunk-#

Assign default priority to range of Trunks. 2903-2-Trunk-Trunk -#

Assign default priority to all Trunks. 2903-* -#



Matrix


Privacy

What’s this?While two stations are in speech, it is desired that no third person can listen their talk i.e privacy of their conversation is maintained.However if few important stations are allowed to use features like interrupt request, barge-in and raid, they

can intrude the conversation. Also if DID is activated, outside caller can reach any station or if there is a callfrom another trunk line, it will interrupt your conversation by giving intrusion tone. Some times this is veryannoying and undesirable. Eternity provides privacy against all these types of intrusions. This is known asPrivacy.There are four types of intrusions against whom a user might wish privacy:1. Privacy from Interrupt Request and Barge-In2. Privacy from Raid3. Privacy from Trunk call intrusion4. Privacy from DID callThese four types are provided as programmable features in the class of service groups. A user can beassigned any combination of above four privacy flags by selecting an appropriate class of service group. If itis required that no other station can raid you then the corresponding flag i.e Privacy – Raid in the class of

service should be made ‘1’. Likewise other flags should be made ‘1’ or ’0’ as per the requirement. For moredetails, please refer section “ Class of Service(COS)”.

How it works?Following flow charts depicts the series of events in which it works.



Matrix


Start

Station A and Station B are in speech

Station C calls Station A. He gets busy tone

Station C dials interrupt requist,

Barge-In or Raid code

In Station C

allowed the dialedfeature ?

Is Station A

programmed with

privacy against interrupt

request / Barge-In or

Raid ?

Station A gets beeps in his speech

Logic of interrupt request, Barge-In

and Raid follows here

End

Call blocked. Station

C gets error tone

End

No

Yes

No

Yes

Privacy from IR/Barge-In/Raid



Matrix


Privacy from Trunk Call

Start

Station A and Station B are in speech

Fresh call arrives on Trunk T. Station

a is the first destination for the trunk

Is Station A

programmed with

privacy against trunk

call beeps ?

System gives beeps to station

A for trunk landing ring timer

Does

station A attends

the trunk call

Station B goes on hold. Caller

gets connected to Station A

End

Station a is not interrupted. System

lands the call on next landing

station in the trunk landing group

End

System routes the call to the next

destination in trunk landing group

No

Yes

No

Yes



Matrix


How to program?

Access to Call Privacy is programmable from Class of Service. Any station can be allowed or denied CallPrivacy through Class of Service programming.To deny Call Privacy set the flag to ‘1’ and to allow Call Privacy set the flag to ‘0’.

Example:To program station 201 such that no other station can raid it, enable this feature i.e. set this bit to ‘1’.

Relevant topic:1. Class of Service(COS)

=X=X=

Privacy from DID calls

Start

An external call lands on a

trunk programmed for DID

The external caller dials

Station A

Is Station

A programmed with

privacy against DID

?

The caller is routed to

Station A. He gets ring

End

The caller gets DID error

message or DID error tone

End

Yes

No



Matrix


Programming the System

What’s this?Eternity is a flexible system and can be programmed to suit your needs. Programming can be done at threelevels:• System Engineer level

At this level, System Engineer does the programming. This is called System Engineer mode.• System Administrator level

At this level, System Administrator does the programming. This is called System Administrator mode.• User level

At this level, User does the programming for himself for features like Alarms, Call follow me, etc. For more details, please refer respective sections.

How it works?System Engineer (SE) Mode• SE mode allows SE to program the system for main basic functions like assigning access codes to the

stations, programming destinations for trunk lines, Activation of DISA facility on few lines, assigningfeature access levels to stations, etc.

• In this mode, only SE can do programming.• All the commands are allowed from SE mode.• This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and

subsequent misuse of features and facilities.• System engineer is a person who programs the system as per the need. He is the person to make major

alternations in the system. No other person can change the system settings without his knowledge providedthe password is kept secret. Depending upon the organization structure, a person is designated as systemengineer.

How to use it?

• SE password is 4-digit secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SE mode.• Default SE password is 1234.• In case the SE password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value. For more details on this,

please refer section ‘System passwords.


2 Dial1#91-SE Password Programming Tone



Matrix


• System gives programming tone on entering SE mode.• If the SE password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone.• Only one person can enter SE mode at a time.• To exit SE, dial ‘00’ from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone.

System Administrator (SA) Mode

• SA mode allows SA to change few system settings without entering the SE mode. It is a subset of the full- blown SE mode and hence supports only a few programming commands.• In this mode, only SA or SE can do programming.• This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and

subsequent misuse of features and facilities.• System Administrator is a person who carries out routine jobs like taking SMDR printouts, making

operator absent/present, etc. Generally an operator in an organization is selected as a SystemAdministrator.

How to use it?

• SA password is a 4-digit secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SA mode.• Default SA password is 1111.• In case the SA password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value from the System

Engineer (SE) mode.• System gives programming tone on entering SA mode.• If the SA password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone.• Only one person can enter SA mode at a time.• To exit SA, dial ‘00’ from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone.• Following programming commands are allowed from the SA mode:• SMDR Reports Printing Commands• Day/Night control Commands

• System Restart Command• Station Call Budget Programming• Guest Group Programming• Operator Present/Absent

Important points:• Programming can be done at the site without opening the system from any Station.• System can also be programmed from a remote end from anywhere in the world. For more details, please

refer section ‘Remote Programming”.• Programming is accomplished by dialing separate codes (string of digits) for different settings. This

eliminates need for entering long and confusing programming sequences. Programming commands are broken into two parts: Codes and Values.

• The system continues to function normally even during programming. This allows the SE or SA to changethe settings without disturbing any communication.

• The SE mode and the SA mode are password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorizedalterations and subsequent misuse of features and facilities.

Steps for programmingIt is advisable to program the system in following hierarchy. One may skip undesirable features’ programming.


2 Dial1#92-SA Password Programming Tone



Matrix


1. Current Date and Time2. Time Tables3. Software Port – Hardware Port relations (On first Power On the system will define this relation at its own)4. Flexible Numbers5. Name Programming6. Class of Service

7. Trunk Access Groups8. Toll Control9. Call Pick Up Group10. Privacy11. Priority12. Call Budget13. DKP Parameters14. Trunk Parameters15. PCC16. LCR 17. Trunk Landing Destinations (Trunk landing groups)18. DID

19. Operator Station20. SMDR 21. DISA22. Voice Message Applications23. CCC24. Department Call25. Paging26. Music27. Rings28. External Call Forward29. SLT Parameters30. Tenants

31. E&M32. AOP33. AIP34. DOP35. DIP

Please note that Eternity accepts the command immediately and works accordingly but it takes approximately30 seconds to save a command. Hence it is advisable not to turn OFF the system for 30 seconds after entering the last command.

I n condition of power failur e, whichever commands were entered duri ng last 30 seconds wil l not be saved and wi ll have to be reprogrammed.

Relevant topics:1. System Security2. Remote Programming3. Programming Using a Computer 4. Programming Using the Jeeves5. Wild Card Programming

=X=X=



Matrix


Programming Using A Computer

What’s this?Programming a system like Eternity through phone is a bit time consuming process. Eternity provides afacility to program it using a computer. A text file is to be made which can be uploaded to the Eternity usingany communication software like ProComm, BitComm, HyperTerminal, etc. The advantage of programming

the Eternity through computer is that once a text file is ready, any change can be made in it and can again beuploaded to the PBX.

How to use it?• As explained above any communication software can be used to upload the text file from the computer to

the Eternity.• Connect the communication port of the Eternity with the communication port of the computer using a

crossed communication cable. Matrix provides 10 meters long crossed communication cable with 9-pin Dtype female connector on both the sides. Please refer ‘Communication ports’ for more details.

• Program the communication port of the Eternity for serial communication.

Programming the Eternity using HyperTerminal

• Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Double click on WordPad.• Create a text file that contains programming commands followed by the comments explaining the

significance of the command.• Each command should be prefixed with character ‘̂ ’.• Once all the commands are entered, save this file using a proper file name with .txt extension.• Now again click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Click on HyperTerminal. Double

click on hyper terminal icon.• Give the name you desire and press <Enter>.No need to enter any phone no. Change the settings of

‘Connect to’ using its options to ‘Direct to Comm. port2’ (It is assumed that the PBX is connected tocomm. port 2 of the computer) and click OK. Set Bits per Second to 2400, Data Bits to 8, Parity Bit to None, Stop bits to 1, Flow control to None and Click OK.

• Click on File, Click on Properties, Click on Settings and Change Emulation option to VT100. Click onASCII set up. Tick for Echo characters in sending mode. Click OK.

• Click on Transfer. Click on Send Text File. Give filename with path OR Browse to give the path whereyou have stored your file to be transferred. Click OK .

• The computer is sending the command file character by character. The PBX is receiving these charactersand executing commands after assembling them in command format. Wait for the file transfer to finish.

• If the PBX accepts the programming, it responds by sending character ‘Y’. If the PBX does not accept it, itresponds by sending character ‘N’.

• Click on File and then on Exit to come out of the programming mode.• Verify the programming of PBX by generating configuration reports.• The command file can be saved for future reference and use.• We can print the command file for verification and future reference.

Programming the PBX using ProComm.It is assumed that ProComm software is loaded at C:\ProComm\Procomm• Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.• You get C:\windows>. Type CD.. You get C:\>. Type EDIT. A new file viz. ‘UNTITLED’ opens.• Type all the commands followed by the comments explaining the significance of the command. Now to

save the file, press ‘ALT-F’. Point to ‘Save As’ and press enter. The computer asks you the name you wantto give to this file. Give the name say <Eternity>. Again press ‘ALT-F’ and point to Exit. Press enter toexit.



Matrix


• Please note that you have saved the file in the root directory.• Each command should be prefixed with character ‘̂ ’.• Again Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.• You get C:\windows>. Type CD.. You get C:\>. Type CD PROCOMM. You get C:\ PROCOMM>. Type

PROCOMM. You get PROCOMM main screen. Press < ESC>. You get status bar at the bottom of thescreen.

• Press ALT-P to set the communication port of the computer. Press ‘9’. Press enter.• Now press ‘20’ if you have connected the cable to comm. port 1 (where normally a mouse is connected)and press enter OR Press ‘21’ if you have connected the cable to comm. port 2 and press enter.

• To save the changes made in the settings, press 24.• After some time you get a screen with a status bar at the bottom.• Now press ‘Page Up’. Press ‘7’ to select ASCII protocol (Preferred).• Now the computer asks the file name. Give the file name. Type C:\>Eternity. Press enter.• The file gets uploaded to the Eternity. The Eternity responds with ‘Y’ if it accepts the file and with ‘N’ if it

does not accept the file. Re-try if the programming is not done properly.• To come out of the DOS mode, press ALT-X and then ‘Y’.

Important points:

• Programming password is not required when the system is to be programmed through the computer. Inother words, there is no need to enter programming mode while programming through the computer. Thecommands are to be typed directly.

• Each command should be prefixed with character ‘̂ ’.• If WORDSTAR is being used, non-document mode must be used.

=X=X=



Matrix


Programming Using Jeeves

Matrix supplies a special, windows based software package to program the Eternity known as Jeeves. TheJeeves is a flexible and friendly tool with mouse operated GUI.

When the Eternity is managed by the Jeeves, following functions are supported:1. Single command programming2. Batch programming3. Customer profile storing and retrieval.4. Retrieval of existing configuration from the Eternity.5. Flexible programming commands structure.

How to program?Use following command to assign communication port for Jeeves:5901-Code

Code Meaning

1 Communication port 1

2 Communication port 2



Matrix


=X=X=

Start

Install the Jeeves on a PC with

working COMM PORT

Connect the PC and the Eternity using

statndard RS232C serial cable (crossed)

Set Comm port parameters

or the Jeeves

Set Comm port parameters

on the Eternity

Set the Eternity Comm port

for Jeeves application

Download the existing Eternity

configuration on the Jeeves if needed

Make necessary changes in the

configuration parameters

Upload the modified

configuration on to the eternity

Verifying by checking variuos

features on the Eternity

End



Matrix


Raid

What’s this?• Without knowledge of the called busy station, you can enter his conversation by using this feature.• The station you raid does not come to know that you have entered in his conversation unless you speak

something.

How to use it?

CAUTIONRaid is a sensitive feature. The System Administrator and the System Engineer should restrict access to thisfeature. If a user is allowed the access to raid, he should use this responsibly.

Important points:• When user raids a station, a 3-party conference ensues. All the three persons can speak and hear to each

other.• Raid is a programmable feature. Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details.• A station can be raided if he is in 2-way speech either with a station or with a trunk. In all other cases, raid

does not apply.• If the busy station is programmed with privacy against raid, he cannot be raided. Refer “Call Privacy” for

details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow raid to a user.


=X=X=


2 Dial Station Busy tone

3 Dial5 Speech

4 Start talking



Matrix


Real Time Clock

What’s this?Various features and facilities provided by the Eternity use date and time parameters. Such facilities work properly only if the system is set with correct date and time values. These features are:1. Alarms

2. SMDR 3. Time zones

The Eternity is equipped with built in Real Time Clock (RTC) circuit. This circuit is to be set once withcurrent date, day and time values. It then updates itself regularly to keep track of the parameters. However, please note that the RTC circuit can drift over a long period. Hence it is recommended to check and resetRTC values at least once every month to correct this drift. Please note that the system RTC takes care of theleap year.

How to program?Use following command to set date parameters:1000-Date-Month-Year

Where,Date = 01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date)Month = 01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month)Year = Year in four digits from 0000 to 9999

Use following command to set day of the week:1001-Day

Use following command to set time:1002-Hours-M inutes-Seconds WhereHours = Hours in 24-hours format in two digits from 00 to 23 (leading zero must)Minutes = Minutes in two digits from 00 to 59 (leading zero must)Seconds = Seconds in two digits from 00 to 59

Example:Set the system with 1st April 2002, Monday at 9:00 am.Use following commands:1000-01-04-2002 1001-2

1002-090000

=X=X=

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesda Thursday Friday Saturday

1 2 3 4 5 6 7



Matrix


Remote Programming

What’s this?One can program Eternity from any remote location. Direct inward system Access (DISA) facility of thesystem allows a remote user to login and use most of the functions of the system. Programming is one of such functions allowed to the remote user. The remote user can program the system using the same

commands as used by the normal local station to program the system.

How it works?Following flow chart depicts the process:

Start

Dial and log-in as a DISA user

remotely. For more details,

please refer section DISA

User is in DISA idle state

User dial command for en tering program

mode followed by SE password

Is the

password

correct ?

Error Tone

System gives programming tone

User to dial any programming command

Is the

command dialedcorrect and accepted

by the system ?Error tone

Wait for error

tone to get over System gives dial tone

End

Error tone

wait for confirmation

tone to get over

No

Yes

NoYes

Exit

Program

Mode



Matrix


How to use it?• Make a DISA call.• On getting DISA Login beeps, enter SE/SA mode as if you are a local station user.• Make programming changes• Exit SE/SA mode.• Terminate DISA call.

• In case none of the trunk lines have DISA facility and it is required to do remote programming, then followfollowing steps:• From the remote location, make a call to the system.• Ask the person answering the call at the system end to keep you on hold by dialing Flash. When the person

at the system end dials ‘Flash’, you get hold on music.• Ask the person at the system end to dial 1#91-SE password. On completion of the command, he gets

confirmation tone. He can disconnect and carry on with the routine job.• The person at the remote end gets DISA beeps. Now he can program the system from the remote end.

Relevant topic:1. DISA

=X=X=



Matrix


Room Monitor

What is this?• Room Monitor lets a user to listen to the sounds in a colleague’s room or cabin.• A supervisor would like to listen to what is happening in a manufacturing area.

How to use it?

CAUTION:Room Monitor is a sensitive feature. It can breach the privacy of users. The System Administrator and theSystem Engineer should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed the access to Room Monitor, heshould use this responsibly.

Important points:

• Room Monitor can be used from both - SLT and DKP.• The destination station must be a DKP.• This feature will work when the DKP is idle.• Microphone of the destination DKP is activated when the caller uses Room Monitor. But, the speaker is

not activated.• One-way speech is established. The caller can listen to the sound in the room but the destination cannot

listen the caller’s sound.• Room Monitoring is terminated when the caller disconnects or the called party lifts the handset to dial or

the called party gets a call from any other station.• Room Monitor feature can be used by a station whose priority is higher than the station, which has to be

monitored.• If the destination station is programmed with privacy against Room Monitor, the caller cannot monitor

him. Refer “Call Privacy” for details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Room Monitor to a user.


=X=X=


2 Dial 101-Station

3 Start Listening



Matrix


Selective Trunk Access

What’s this?The station user can access a particular trunk by dialing a code.

How to use it?

1. To grab trunk 000, the user should dial ‘69000’2. To grab trunk 127, the user should dial ‘69127’

Relevant topic:1. Trunk Access Groups

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset Dial tone2 Dial 69-Trunk Software Port N umber Dial tone of the trunk

3 Dial desired external number



Matrix


SLT Basic Parameters

What’s this?When the system is programmed and it is required to know the settings of a SLT, it is desired to have theconfiguration reports of the SLT. Eternity provides the configuration reports or individual SLT, for range of SLTs and for all SLTs.

Eternity also provides the Flexibility to assign default configuration to SLTs. It is also possible to copy SLT parameters of one SLT to other SLT/SLTs

How to use it?Print configurationUse following command to print configuration reports of SLT:1300-1-SLT Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255A configuration report of a SLT is attached herewith

Use following command to print configuration reports of range of SLTs:1300-2-SLT-SLT

Use following command to print configuration reports of all SLTs:1300-*

Default configurationUse following command to default the configuration of SLT:1301-1-SLT-# Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255

Use following command to default configuration of range of SLTs:1301-2-SLT-SLT-#

Use following command to default configuration of all SLTs:1301-*-#

On giving this command, following parameters will be assigned default values:• Name assigned to the SLT will be cleared• Default tenant group i.e. 0 will be assigned• Default priority i.e. 0 will be assigned• Default COS group i.e. 02 will be assigned

• Default guest group i.e. 99 will be assigned• Default flash timer i.e. 006 seconds will be assigned• Default Allowed Toll control group i.e. 00 and default Denied Toll Control Group will be assigned.• Default dynamic Allowed Toll control group i.e. 00 and default dynamic Denied Toll Control Group will

be assigned.• Call Budget will get enabled and the default call budget will get set on the SLT.• Default trunk access group will be assigned• Default time table will be assigned• Default Pick up group will be assigned



Matrix


• Default operator will be assigned• Default floor service destination will be assigned• DND list will get cleared• Personal alarm voice message assignment will be cleared• SLT will go to checked out status

Copy parametersUse following command to copy the SLT parameters of one SLT to other SLT:1302-1 -Source SLT-Destination SLT

Use following commands to copy SLT parameters of one SLT to a range of SLTs:1302-2-Sour ce SLT-Destination SLT-Destination SLT

Use following command to copy the SLT parameters of one SLT to all other SLTs:1302-* -Sour ce SLT

Timers of Relevance:Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer

While dialing a SLT or a DKP, the system waits for some time. This timer is called Internal Digit-Digit waittimer. During this time the user does not hear any tone. If the user does not dial another digit during this timethen the system gives error tone.Use following command to program the Internal Digit-Digit Wait timer:Command: 5220-Seconds Range = 001 to 255 secondsDefault = 007 seconds



Matrix


SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE(SLT) PARA AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Flexible Number : 2001

Name :

Tenant Number : 0

Priority : 0Flash Timer : 600ms

Guest Group : 99

Call Pick-Up Group : 00

Operator : 3001 DKP-000

Floor Service Group : 00

Do Not Disturb List : 00

Dynamic Toll Control Lists : Allowed - 00 Denied - 00

Alarm Voice Module Number : -

User : Present

Call Budget Current Amount : 0

Call Budget Total Amount : 500

Call Budget Over : NO

Call Budget Toll Control List : Allowed - 00 Denied - 00

Call Duration Control(CDC)Table : 0

TimeTable : 0Time Zones --> Working Hours Break Hours Non-Working Hours

Class Of Service(COS) Group : 02 02 02

Toll Control Allowed List : 01 01 01

Toll Control Denied List : 01 01 01

Trunk Access Group : 0 5 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

Working Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Break Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Non-Working Hours - 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


PERSONAL DIRECTORY NUMBERS (2001) AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

000 001

002 003

004 005

006 007

008 009010 011

012 013

014 015

016 017

018 019

020 021

022 023

024 025

026 027

028 029

030 031

032 033

034 035

036 037

038 039040 041

042 043

044 045

046 047

048 049

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

What’s this?Eternity can store the details of each external call. This includes both outgoing (OG) and incoming (IC) calls.Eternity can send the details of these calls on any of the three communication ports. These can be printedeither immediately on completion of the call or afterwards when desired.

Following diagram shows the logic in which the calls are stored and printed.

How to program and use it?As shown above two types of calls are possible: Outgoing call and Incoming call

Outgoing CallBroadly classifying outgoing calls can be stored and printed in a desired way.

Outgoing calls-StorageStation message detail/recording facility is used to keep records of calls made from the system. SMDR isuseful in monitoring and controlling the cost of telephone calls. The Eternity can keep track of each callmade by any station. Each call is stored in form of a record in the SMDR buffer. One outgoing call occupiesone record space in the SMDR buffer. The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures.

It is advisable to take frequent printouts of the calls to avoid inadvertent or accidental loss of the SMDR records. Maximum 10000 records can be stored in the SMDR buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the nextcall is stored in place of the oldest call in the SMDR buffer. This is known as First In First Out (FIFO) logic.

The SMDR parameters configuration report shows the number of SMDR records in the buffer. The SA or SEcan clear the SMDR-OG buffer by using appropriate password from the admin mode. The SystemAdministrator (SA) or the System Engineer (SE) can print these calls on a printer. The SA or SE can eventransfer this data on a computer for storage or further analysis.



Matrix


Each outgoing call is stored with following fields:• Station who made the call• Trunk line port used for the call• Number dialed (16 digits)• Date and time when the call matured• Duration of the call in seconds

• Call units• Call maturity type (Delay, CPD+Delay, Reversal or 16KHz)• Call type (Normal, DISA, ECF etc.)

In case of a call transfer from one station to another station, the system stores two calls with same number but different duration for both the stations. This is called ‘Call Splitting’. If call splitting mode is kept on, thecost of the call as per the duration of the call will be added to both the stations.

CommandsMaster command:This command enables/disables the storage of outgoing calls depending upon the filters setUse following command to set SMDR storage flag:

3601-Storage F lag Where,

Use following command to set Outgoing call storage to default settings:3610-#

Filter commands:These commands enables the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. trunk wise, destination number

wise, duration wise or cost wise.

Trunk wiseUse following command to store outgoing calls made on particular trunk:3611-1-Trunk-Storage F lag Where,Trunk is the software port number from 000 to 127

Use following command to store outgoing calls made on a range of trunks:3611-2-Trunk-Trunk-Storage F lag

Use following command to store outgoing calls for all the trunks:3611-* -Storage F lag

Storage Flag Meaning

0 Don't store outoging calls

1 Store outgoing calls as per the filters programmed

Storage Flag Meaning

0 Don't store outoging calls for this trunk

1 Store outgoing calls for this trunk



Matrix


Use following command to set call maturity type for a trunk:3612-1-Trunk-Maturi ty Type Where,Trunk is the software port number from 000 to 127

Use following command to set call maturity type for range of trunks:3612-2-Trunk-Trunk-Maturity Type

Use following command to set call maturity type for all trunk ports:3612-* -Maturity Type

Please note that if a trunk a set for Delay based Maturity, the system considers a call matured if it remains

active for ‘Maturity Delay Timer’. This is a global timer and used for all the trunks.

Use following command to program maturity delay timer:3613-Timer Where,Timer is from 000 to 255 secondsDefault timer = 025 seconds

Destination number wiseIt is possible to store outgoing calls selectively depending on the destination numbers. The Eternity supportsa list of 16 numbers. An outgoing call will be stored only if the destination matches with one of the numbersfrom the list. Thus, it is possible to store only international or long distance calls.

The list of 16 numbers looks like:

Maturity Type Meaning

0 Delay based maturity

1 Call Progress Tone Detection (CPD) + Delay2 Reversal

3 16 KHz

Index Number

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

0809

10

11

12

13

14

15



Matrix


Use following command to program a number in the list:3614-Index-Number-# Where,Index is from 00 to 15.‘Number’ is a string of 16 digits.

Duration wiseSometimes it is required to filter out the calls of small durations.Use following command to set the filter of call duration:3615-M inutes-Seconds Where,Minutes is from 00 to 59Seconds is from 00 to 59

Cost wiseIt is also possible to store only costly calls. The calls with cost below set value can be filtered out.Use following command to set the call units limit:3616-Units

Where,Units is in 4 digit i.e. XXXX format.

Supportive commands:If an outgoing call is transferred from one station to another station, it can be stored as one call or two calls.Use following command to decide this:3617-Call Split F lag Where,

If above option is selected as ‘Store One Call’, it is possible to store the call with originating station or terminating station.Use following command to select appropriate option:3618-Flag Where,

Use following command to clear SMDR–Outgoing buffer:3619-SE Password in Reverse

Default Storage settings• All outgoing long distance calls are stored.• Default Maturity type is Delay with 30 seconds delay timer • Call Splitting in ON

Call Split Flag Meaning

0 Store one call

1 Store multiple calls

Flag Meaning

0 Store the call on originating station's account

1 Store the call on terminating station's account



Matrix


Outgoing calls-PrintingEach SMDR record has following parameters or fields:• Serial Number • Station number who made the call• Trunk number used for the call• Number dialed

• Date on which the calls is made• Time at which the call matured• Duration of the call in seconds• Pulse Rate• Charge units• Cost of the call in amount• Remark

“Remark” column indicates following information:

The Eternity can print reports on any standard printer through the Centronics parallel port of the system.Standard A4 size paper is assumed with 60 lines x 80 characters per page. Maximum 40 records are printedon a page.

It is possible to generate these reports as and when the call is made i.e. online printing (provided a printer or a computer is connected) or offline. The calls are stored in the SMDR buffer in both casesThese reports can be generated on either of the three communication ports viz. COM 1 or COM. 2 or Printer port but the port has to be assigned.The reports are transferred on a computer through the RS232C (COM.) port of the Eternity. ASCII format isused for this. During printing if an error is encountered, the system waits for 60 seconds for the error to clear.If the error clears, it continues printing or else the report is abandoned.

Outgoing Printing - OnlineStep 1: Enable Online printingStep 2: Set the port where the printouts are desiredStep 3: In Online mode whatever is stored is printed

Use following command to decide whether online printing is desired:3701-Code Where,

Character Meaning

N Normal Call

O DISA CallE ECF Call

D Delay Maturity

R Reversal Maturity

C CPD + Delay Maturity

K 16 KHz Maturity

A Auto-Redial

Code Meaning

0 Immediate printing of outgoing calls off

1 Immediate printing of outgoing calls on



Matrix


Use following command to decide the destination port for immediate printing:3702-Port Where,

In this case the call is printed as soon as it is completed.

Outgoing Printing-OfflineStep 1: Set the port where the printouts are desiredStep 2: Set the Filters as per requirementStep 3: Issue print command

Use following command to decide the destination port for Offline printing:

3703-Port Where,

Various filters can be used to generate a report. These filters enable the user to select the type of calls to be printed viz. Calls made by particular station, calls made on a particular date or calls made between two dates,Long duration calls. It is also possible to print the calls with desirable combination like calls made by

particular station on a particular date for duration greater than 10 minutes.

Header and footer are printed on every page of the report.

A summary of the report is printed at the end of each report.

Code Meaning

0 None

1 COM1

2 COM2

3 Printer Port

Code Meaning

0 None

1 COM1

2 COM2

3 Printer Port

Filter Command

Default printing settings 3710-#

Call made by all SLT and DKP users 3711-*

Calls made by a SLT user 3712-1-SLT Calls made by range of SLT users 3712-2-SLT-SLT

Calls made by all SLT users 3712-*

(SLT is the S/w port number of the SLT user)

Calls made by a DKP user 3713-1-DKP

Calls made by range of DKP users 3713-2-DKP-DKP

Calls made by all DKP users 3713-*

(DKP is the S/w port number of the DKP user)



Matrix


It is possible to get printouts by giving print commands or automatically by programming the time, day or

date parameters.Use following commands to get the reports printed automatically:

Where,Day is from 1 to 7Date is from 01 to 31Hours and Minutes is in 24 hour formatIf automated reports are set then the system generate the reports as per the filters on programmed date andtime.

Use following commands to stop automated daily reports:3731-# Use following commands to stop automated weekly reports:3732-# Use following commands to stop automated monthly reports:3733-#

Calls made on a trunk 3714-1-Trunk

Calls made on a range of trunks 3714-2-Trunk-Trunk

Calls made on all trunks 3714-*

(Trunk is the S/w port number of the trunk)

Calls made on a date 3715-1-Date-Month-Year

Calls made on a range of dates 3715-2-Date-Month-Year-Date-Month-Year Calls made on all dates 3715-*

(Date-Month-Year in DD-MM-YYYY format)

Calls made at a fixed time 3716-1-Hour-Minute

Calls made between the range of time 3716-2-Hour-Minute-Hour-Minute

Calls made at any time 3716-*

(Hour-Minute in HH-MM, 24 hour format)

Calls made to a destination 3717-Number-#

(Number is number string with max. 16 digits)

Calls having duration of higher value 3718-Minutes-Seconds

(Minute-Seconds in MM-SS, 24 hour format)

Calls having more units 3719-Units

(Units is from 000 to 999)

Print detailed report or summary 3720-Summary F lag

(Summary flag: 0 means summarized report

: 1 means detailed report)

Calls made for an account code 3722-Account Code

Calls made for all the account codes 3722-*

Report Type Command

Daily report at given time 3731-Hour-Minute

Weekly report on given day and time 3732-Day-Hour-Minute

Monthly report on given date and time 3733-Date-Hour-Minute



Matrix


Default Print Settings:• Online printing is OFF• Offline printing is OFF on printer port• Calls made by all DKPs, SLTs from all trunks on all dates at all times.• Call with duration greater than or equal to 000 seconds• Call with units greater than or equal to 000 units

• Detailed report

Deletion of selective SMDR calls• Two types of calls can be deleted from the outgoing SMDR buffer

• Checked Out calls• Call made from a particular station.

• Checked Out calls can be deleted using command 5460-Station Number . On giving this command all thechecked out calls of this station will be deleted. This feature is very useful in Hotel Applications.

• Calls made by a particular station can be deleted using command 3740-Station Number .

Incoming CallBroadly classifying incoming calls can be stored and printed in a desired way.

Incoming calls-StorageStation message detail recording (SMDR) facility is used to keep track of the incoming calls received by theEternity. SMDR is useful in monitoring and managing the incoming traffic in more effective manner. TheEternity can keep log of each call received by it in the SMDR buffer. The buffers for the incoming calls andoutgoing calls are different. Each incoming call is stored in the form of a record in the buffer.

The SA or SE can print these calls on a printer in the form of various reports. The SA or SE can even transferthis data on a computer for storage and further analysis.

A record has following fields:1. Trunk

2. Date and time of the call3. Station to which the call was routed4. Time taken to answer the call5. Speech duration6. Hold duration in seconds7. Remarks

One incoming call can occupy one or more records in the buffer. When an incoming call is transferred onanother station, a new entry will be made in the SMDR buffer. The SMDR buffer data is maintained evenduring power failures.It is advisable to take frequent printouts of the calls to avoid inadvertent or accidental loss of the data.

Maximum 10000 records can be stores in the SMDR IC buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the nextincoming call is stored in place of the oldest call in the SMDR IC buffer. This is known as First In First Out(FIFO) logic. The system parameters configuration report shows the number of SMDR IC records in the buffer. The SA or SE can clear the SMDR IC buffer using appropriate command and password from theadmin mode.



Matrix


CommandsMaster command:This command enables/disables the storage of incoming calls depending upon the filters setUse following command to set SMDR storage mode:3651-Store Flag Where,

Use following command to set Incoming call storage to default settings:3660-# By defaul t, all incoming calls wil l be stored.

Filter commands:These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. All calls, Trunk wise calls,Unanswered calls, DID calls, etc.

Where,Flag Meaning0 Don’t store1 Store

Supportive commands:Use following command to clear SMDR–Incoming buffer:3675-SE Password in Reverse

Incoming Calls - PrintingEach SMDR record has following parameters or fields:• Serial Number • Calling Number (optional)• Trunk port number on which the call was received• Station Number who received the call• Date on which the call is received

Store Flag Meaning0 Don't store incoming calls

1 Store incoming calls as per the filters programmed

Filter CommandStore Normal Calls 3661-Flag

Store DID Calls 3662-Flag

Store Unanswered Calls 3663-Flag

Store DID Unanswered Calls 3664-Flag

Store DISA Calls 3665-Flag

Store Calls on a trunk 3671-1-Trunk-Storage Flag

Store Calls on a range of trunks 3671-2-Trunk-Trunk- Storage F lag

Store Calls on all trunks 3671-* -Storage F lag

(Trunk is the S/w port number of the trunk)

Store Calls - Speech Duration 3672-Seconds

Store Calls - Unanswered Duration 3673-Seconds

Store Calls - Hold Duration 3674-Seconds



Matrix


• Time when the call arrived• Call Answer Duration• Call Hold Duration• Call Speech Duration• Remark

“Remark” column indicates following information:

The Eternity can print reports on any standard printer through the Centronics parallel port of the system.Standard A4 size paper is assumed with 60 lines x 80 characters per page. Header and footer are printed onevery page of the report. Maximum 40 records are printed on a page.

It is possible to generate these reports as and when the call is made i.e. online printing (provided a printer or a computer is connected) or offline. The calls are stored in the SMDR buffer in both cases.These reports can be generated on either of the three communication ports viz. COM 1 or COM. 2 or Printer port but the port has to be assigned.

The reports are transferred on a computer through the RS232C (COM) port of the Eternity. ASCII format isused for this.

Incoming Printing -OnlineStep 1: Enable Online printingStep 2: Set the port where the printouts are desired

Step 3: In Online mode whatever is stored is printed

Use following command to decide whether online printing is desired:3751-Code Where,

Use following command to decide the destination port for online printing:3752-Port Where,

Character Meaning

N Normal Call

I DISA Call

D DID Call

U Unanswered Call

DU DID Unanswered Call

Code Meaning

0 Immediate printing of incoming calls off

1 Immediate printing of incoming calls on

Code Meaning

0 None

1 COM1

2 COM2

3 Printer Port



Matrix


Incoming Printing -OfflineStep 1: Set the port where the printouts are desiredStep 2: Set the filters as per the needStep 3: Give the command to take printouts manually or program the system for automated reports.

Use following command to decide the destination port for offline printing:

3753-Port Where,

Various filters can be used to generate a report. These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be printed viz. Normal calls, DID calls, Unanswered calls, Long Speech Duration calls. It is also possible to print the calls with desirable combination like Long Speech Duration calls and DID calls.

It is possible to sort on one or more keys and generate a report.A summary of the report is printed at the end of each report.

Code Meaning

0 None

1 COM1

2 COM2

3 Printer Port

Filter Command

Set default filters 3760-#

Normal Calls 3761-Flag

DID Calls 3762-Flag

Unanswered Calls 3763-Flag

DID Unanswered Calls 3764-Flag

DISA Calls 3765-Flag

Calls received by all SLTs and DKPs users 3770-*

Calls received by a SLT 3771-1-SLT

Calls received by a range of SLT 3771-2-SLT-SLT

Calls received by all the SLT 3771-*

Calls received by a DKP 3772-1-DKP

Calls received by a range of DKP 3772-2-DKP-DKP

Calls received by all the DKP 3772-*

Calls received on a trunk 3773-1-Trunk

Calls received on a range of trunks 3773-2-Trunk-Trunk

Calls received on all trunk 3773-*

Calls received on a date 3774-1-Date-Month-Year

Calls received on a range of dates 3774-2-Date-Month-Year-Date-Month-year

Calls received on all date 3774-*



Matrix


Print commands:It is possible to get printouts manually by giving print commands or automatically by programming the time,day or date parametersUse following command to start printing the reports:3781

Use following commands to get the reports printed automatically:

Where,Day is from 1 to 7Date is from 01 to 31Hours and Minutes is in 24 hour format

Use following commands to stop automated daily reports:

3791-#

Use following commands to stop automated weekly reports:3792-#

Use following commands to stop automated monthly reports:3793-#

Default print settings• Immediate printing is OFF• Screened printing is ON on printer port• All types of incoming calls are printed• Detailed report is printed

A sample printout is attached here for ready reference.

Calls received at a time 3775-1-Hour-Minute

Calls received between the range of time 3775-2-Hour-Minute-Hour-Minute

Calls received at any time 3775-*

(Hour-Minute is in HH:MM, 24 hour format)

Call unanswered for duration 3776-Minutes-Seconds

Calls put on hold for duration 3777-Minutes-Seconds Calls with speech duration 3778-Minutes-Seconds

Minutes is from 00 to 59, Seconds is from 00 to 59

Print detailed report or summary 3779-Flag

Report Type Command

Daily report at given time 3791-Hour-Minute

Weekly report on given day and time 3792-Day-Hour-Minute

Monthly report on given date and time 3793-Date-Hour-Minute



Matrix


On giving command 3600, following report will be printed:

SMDR PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:31

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Outgoing Call Storage Filters

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Outgoing Call Store = ON

Numbers:

00 0 01 02

03 04 05

06 07 08

09 10 11

12 13 14

15

Duration = 00:00 Units = 0

Call Split = ON Originator/Terminator Storage = OFF

Calls in Buffer = 0/9999

Buffer Last Cleared = Date - 01-01-2002 Time - 00:00:00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Incoming Call Storage Filters

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Incoming Call Store = ON

Normal = Yes, DID = Yes, Unanswered = Yes, DIDUnanswered = Yes, DISA = YesAnswer Time = 00:00, Hold Time = 00:00, Speech Time = 00:00

Calls in Buffer = 0/9999

Buffer Last Cleared = Date - 01-01-2002 Time - 00:00:00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Outgoing Call Printing Filters

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Online Printing OFF on Port None

Offline Printing on Port None

Daily Report OFF

Weekly Report OFF

Monthly Report OFF

Single Line Telephone = ALL Digital Key Phone = ALL

Trunk = ALL Date = ALL

Time = ALL Number = ALL

Duration = 00:00 Units = 0

Report Summary = ON

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Incoming Call Printing Filters

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Online Printing OFF on Port None

Offline Printing on Port None

Daily Report OFF

Weekly Report OFF

Monthly Report OFF

Normal = Yes, DID = Yes, Unanswered = Yes, DIDUnanswered = Yes, DISA = Yes

Single Line Telephone = ALL Digital Key Phone = ALL

Trunk = ALL Date = ALL

Time = ALL Report Summary = ON

Answer Time = 00:00 Hold Time = 00:00

Speech Time = 00:00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


On giving the command 3721, following report will be printed:

On giving the command 3781, following report will be printed:

SMDR OUTGOING CALLS REPORT AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:31

Num: ALL Stn: ALL Trk: ALL Time: ALL

Date: ALL Duration = 00:00 Units = 0 Acc No: ALL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SR STN TRK NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 3002 000 528741 23-08-2002 08:35 00:00:22 180.0 1 3.31 ND

2 2002 001 325641 23-08-2002 09:00 00:01:08 180.0 1 3.31 ND

3 5002 008 325641 23-08-2002 10:36 00:05:10 180.0 2 4.62 ND

4 2001 009 0268254323 23-08-2002 11:45 00:01:28 030.0 5 8.55 NR

5 2003 010 325641 23-08-2002 12:30 00:03:00 180.0 1 3.31 ND

6 2007 011 630555 23-08-2002 12:35 00:04:05 180.0 2 4.62 ND

7 2010 016 630555 23-08-2002 14:36 00:05:08 180.0 2 4.62 ND

8 2011 001 022786543 23-08-2002 15:46 00:06:20 015.0 26 35.18 NR

9 3010 002 325641 23-08-2002 16:36 00:04:38 180.0 2 4.62 ND

10 3011 003 325641 23-08-2002 17:00 00:04:18 180.0 2 4.62 ND

11 3012 005 9825032565 23-08-2002 17:05 00:06:28 180.0 3 5.93 ND

12 3015 001 9824232566 23-08-2002 17:20 00:10:00 180.0 4 7.24 ND

13 3020 003 630555 23-08-2002 17:21 00:03:18 180.0 2 4.62 ND

14 3022 004 0113256412 23-08-2002 17:25 00:04:28 015.0 18 25.58 NR

15 3032 007 0226987546 23-08-2002 18:00 00:05:10 015.0 21 29.51 NR

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total:- Calls: 15 Dur: 0000:65:01 Units: 92 Amt: 149.64

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

O: DISA Call E: ECF Call N: Normal Call A: Auto Redial

C: CPD K: 16KHz R: Reversal D:Delay

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


SMDR INCOMING CALLS REPORT AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:31

Stn: ALL Trk: ALL Date: ALL Time: ALL

Call Type-> Normal: Y, DID: Y, UnAnswered: Y, DIDUnAnswered: Y, DISA: Y

Timers-> Answer = 00:00 Hold = 00:00 Speech = 00:00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SR NUMBER TRK STN DATE TIME ANSWER HOLD SPEECH REM

TIME TIME TIME

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 95266863172 001 2003 23-08-2002 10:00 00:15 00:45 00:00:45 N

2 95266863172 001 2010 23-08-2002 10:01 00:25 00:45 00:05:45 N

3 633172 002 2003 23-08-2002 10:15 00:10 00:60 00:15:00 D

4 95266862056 001 2003 23-08-2002 10:20 00:05 00:45 00:10:15 D

5 664523 002 2003 23-08-2002 10:21 00:00 00:00 00:00:00 U6 0116487142 004 2003 23-08-2002 10:30 00:15 00:15 00:05:45 D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total:- Calls: 6 Ans: 0000:01:10 Speech: 0000:32:30 Hold: 0000:03:30

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

N: NORMAL, D: DID, U: UNANSWERED, DU: DIDUNANSWERED, I: DISA

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


On giving the command 3701 and 3751, following report will be printed

=X=X=

OG 3002 000 528741 23-08-2002 18:35 00:00:22 180.0 1 3.31 ND

OG 3002 001 325641 23-08-2002 18:36 00:00:08 180.0 1 3.31 ND

IC 003 3002 23-08-2002 18:36 00:00:08 00:00:00 00:00:12 N

IC 003 3002 23-08-2002 18:37 00:00:06 00:00:00 00:00:10 N



Matrix


Station Name

What is this?Stations can be programmed with names. These names are displayed on the LCD of the DKP when a call ismade to or received from the station. These names make easy to identify the callers.A station name can be of maximum 16 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks

and spaces.

How to program?Station names can be programmed only from the DKP.Use following command to program the station user name of the SLT port:4402-1-SLT-Name Where,SLT = Software Port Number of the SLT Name = A string of alphanumeric characters to be assigned for the station (maximum 8).Use first 25 keys and the redial key to enter the name. Press hold to complete the command.The alphabets are mapped to the keys as shown below:

Clear Commands

Use following command to program the station user name of the DKP port:4404-1-DKP-Station Name Where,DKP = Software Port Number of the DKPStation Name = A string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 8).

Clear Commands

Example:Program the name Ashok for SLT station 008.4402-1-008-Ashok (Now press ‘hold’ key of the DKP)

A B C D E

F G H I J

K L M N O

P Q R S T

U V W X Y

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

* 0 #

Not Used ‘&’ ‘-’ ‘,’

Z

‘Space’

‘.’

‘Enter’

Clear the name of the SLT user 4401-1-SLT-#

Clear the name for a range of SLT ports 4401-2-SLT-SLT-#

Clear the name for all the SLT ports 4401-* -Stati on Name

Clear the name of the DKP user 4403-1-DKP-#

Clear the name for a range of DKP ports 4403-2-DKP-DKP-#

Clear the name for all the DKP ports 4403-* -#



Matrix


The name is pr in ted in the confi guration report of a user.

Relevant topic:1. Configuration Reports

=X=X=



Matrix


Software Port and Hardware ID

What’s this?The Eternity supports various types of ports as under:

The Eternity treats a port as an entity and processes it based on the type of the port and the programmedattributes.



Matrix


Software PortThe Eternity takes a software port as fundamental entity. It processes the software port. Hardware ID and theaccess code are just two attributes of a software port and hence they are not used anywhere in processing and programming.

Software ports are always numbered from 0 to the maximum ports supported for the port type. Following

table lists this range for each port type.

Each type of software port has different attributes. The system engineer (SE) programs these attributes at thetime of installing the Eternity.For example, an Eternity system of configuration 16x8x64 (16 trunks, 8 DKP and 64 SLT) is to be installed.

Since 16 trunks are connected, the software ports used for trunks will be 000-015.A trunk software port has following attributes:1. Hardware ID2. Trunk Enabled/Disabled.3. Dial Type (Pulse/Tone)4. Priority5. Maturity Type6. Flash Timer 7. DISA Enabled/Disabled8. DID Enabled/Disabled

Since 64 SLTs are connected, the software ports used for SLTs will be 000-063. Each SLT software port hasfollowing attributes:1. Hardware ID2. Access Code (Flexible Number)3. Class Of Service (COS) Group.4. Toll Control Group5. Time Table6. Call Pick Up (CPU) Group7. Priority8. Flash Timer 9. Trunk Access Group

Since 8 DKPs are connected, the software ports used for DKPs will be 000-007. Each DKP software port hasfollowing attributes:1. Hardware ID2. Access Code (Flexible Number)3. Class Of Service (COS) Group.4. Toll Control Group5. Time Table6. Call Pick Up (CPU) Group

Port TypeMaximum Ports

Supported

Port Number

Range

SLT 256 000-255

DKP 128 000-127

Trunk 128 000-127

E&M 64 00-63



Matrix


Important point:Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hence, all the programming is done for the software port andnot for the hardware ID.Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming.

An access code is just a Flexible number assigned to the software port. Programming is for the software port

and not for the access code (Flexible number).Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming.

The System Engineer allocates software port numbers to different users. This allocation is Flexible and anysoftware port number can be assumed for any user. Hardware ID is not relevant at this stage. Hardware IDcan be programmed for a software port any time. Further, it can be changed any time in case of hardwarefailure of a port.

Following example elaborates this point.

Please take note of following points:

1. Software port numbers start from 000 for all different port types.2. Order is not important while allocating software port numbers.

Hardware IDThe hardware ID of a software port decides where the port is physically located. To derive hardware ID of asoftware port, we need:1. Slot number of the card2. Port number on that card. (Port offset)

Use following command to assign hardware ID to a SLT software port:1201-1-SLT-Slot-Por t off set on the card Where,SLT = Software port number of SLT from 000 to 255Slot = Slot number from 00 to 15 in which the card is insertedPort offset = Port number on that cardPlease note that in Eternity-8S, there are only 8 slots from 00 to 07,

Name Position Port Type Software Port Used

Anil Sharma Managing Director DKP 001

Nikhil Rao VP (Marketing) DKP 002Revathi Thyagarajan VP (Finance) DKP 003

Anand Chakraborty Manager (HRD) SLT 001

Pankaj Shah Accountant SLT 003

Ravi Tandon Sales Executive SLT 002

Conference Room --- DKP 000

Canteen --- SLT 004

Leased Line --- Trunk 000

STD Line --- Trunk 001



Matrix


Clear command for SLT

Use following command to assign hardware ID to a DKP software port:

1202-1-DKP-Slot-Por t off set on the card Where,DKP = Software port number of DKP from 000 to 127Slot = Slot number from 00 to 15 in which the card is insertedPort offset = Port number on that card.Please note that in Eternity-8S, there are only 8 slots from 00 to 07,

Use following command to assign hardware ID to a In-built DKP port on the switch card:1202-1-DKP-32-Port off set on the card Where,DKP = Software port number of DKP from 000 to 127Port offset = Port number on the switch card, 00 for topmost port & 03 for last port on the card

Clear command for DKP

Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Trunk software port:1203-1-Trunk-Slot -Port offset on the card Where,Trunk = Software port number of Trunk from 000 to 127Slot = Slot number from 00 to 15 in which the card is insertedPort offset = Port number on that card

Please note that in Eternity-8S, there are only 8 slots from 00 to 07,

Clear command for Trunk

Use following command to assign hardware ID to an E&M software port:1204-1-E&M -Slot-Port off set on the card Where,E&M = Software port number of E&M from 000 to 063Slot = Slot number from 00 to 15 in which the card is insertedPort offset = Port number on that cardPlease note that in Eternity-8S, there are only 8 slots from 00 to 07,

Clear command for E&M

Clear hardware ID assigned to a SLT software port 1201-1- SLT-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to range of SLT software ports 1201-2- SLT-SLT-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to all SLT software ports 1201 -* - #

Clear hardware ID assigned to a DKP software port 1202-1-DKP-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to range of DKP software ports 1202-2-DKP-DKP-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to all DKP software ports 1202 -* - #

Clear hardware ID assigned to a Trunk software port 1203-1-Trunk-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to range of Trunk software ports 1203-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to all Trunk software ports 1203 -* - #

Clear hardware ID assigned to an E&M software port 1204-1-E&M-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to range of E&M software ports 1204-2-E&M-E&M-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to all E&M software ports 1204 -* - #



Matrix


Use following command to assign hardware ID to a DSS-64 assigned to a DKP:1205-1-DKP-DSS-64-Slot-Por t off set on the card Where,DKP = Software port number of DKP from 000 to 127DSS-64 = DSS-64 number from 1 to 2Slot = Slot number from 00 to 15 in which the card is inserted

Port offset = Port number on that cardPlease note that in Eternity-8S, there are only 8 slots from 00 to 07,

Clear command for DSS-64

Please note that master card power card and switch have fixed slot numbers.Power card has Slot number 38Switch card has Slot number 37

Switch DKP card has Slot number 32Master card has Slot number 39

Example 1:Let us assume a SLT software port number 001 is to be given hardware port EXT8 card inserted in Slot # 03and the port offset is 05.1201-1-001-03-05

Example 2:Program hardware port ID for a SLT software port number 185. The EXT16 card is inserted in slot # 07 andthe port offset is 14.1201-1-185-07-14

Following table lists commands for programming hardware ID for all different port types:

Use following command to take printout of hardware ID and software port relationship:1200

Relevant topics:1. Eternity Eternity-Installation Manual2. Paging3. Music on Hold (MOH)4. Digital Key Phone-Programming

Clear hardware ID assigned to a DSS-64 assigned to a DKP 1205-1- DKP-DSS-64-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to DSS-64 assigned to a range of DKPs 1205-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-64-#

Clear hardware IDs assigned to DSS-64 assigned to all DKPs 1205-* -DSS-64-#

Port Type Command

SLT 1201-1-Software Port-Slot-Port offset on the card

DKP 1202-1-Software Port-Slot-Port offset on the card

Trunk 1203-1-Software Port-Slot-Port offset on the card

E&M 1204-1-Software Port-Slot-Port offset on the card

DSS-64 1205-1-DKP-DSS-64-Slot-Port offset on the card



Matrix


HARDWARE CONFIGURATION AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Slot No. 01 = SLT 16

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015

2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016

Slot No. 02 = TRK 8000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007

Slot No. 32 = DLC 4

001 002

3002 3003

Slot No. 37 = Switch

Slot No. 39 = Communication Manager

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


System Parameters

What’s this?Following options are desirable:• Printout of all the system parameters• Load Default configuration

• Default all timers

CommandsUse following commands to take printout of system parameters:5500

On giving this command, following parameters will be printed• Call progress tones timers• Other timers like call park timer, Barge in timer, etc• SA password• Time when SE mode was last exited• Port of Online and Offline SMDR printing

• Communication port parameters, etc

System Parameters report is attached herewith.

Use following commands to load default configuration:5501-Reverse SE Password

On giving this command all the programmable parameters of the system will be set to default values

Use following commands to load default values of all timers:5502-#

On giving this command all the timers of the system will set to default values



Matrix


SYSTEM PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Sat) AT 18:07

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Call Progress Tones Timers (in Seconds)

Dial Tone = 007 Ring Back Tone = 045

Busy Tone = 007 Error Tone = 010

Confirmation Tone = 007 Feature Tone = 007

Inter Digit = 007

Programing Timers:

Programming Tone = 007 Error Tone = 003Confirmation Tone = 003

Other Timers (in Seconds)

Call Park = 045 Park Count = 003

Interrupt Request = 045 Barge-In = 010

Transfer While Ringing = 030 Transfer On Busy = 030

Conference Hold = 060

Auto Redial:

Dial Tone Wait = 003 Ring Back Tone/Busy Tone Wait = 060

Ring Timer = 045

Auto Redial: Trials Timer

Low Priority 005 045

High Priority 020 020

Alarm:

Timer1 = 045 Timer2 = 045No-Reply Ring Back Tone = 030 Auto Call Back Ring = 030

Message Wait:

Count = 010 Ring Back Tone = 030

Wait Timer = 030

SMDR Maturity Delay = 025 Trunk First Dig Wait = 025

Trunk Inter Digit = 003 Trunk-Trunk Inactivity = 090

Trunk Reservation = 010 Minutes

SA Password: 1111

SE Mode Last Exited on 17-08-2002 at 17:58:26

Manually Default Settings Last Loaded on 01-01-2002 at 00:00:00

Power-On Default Settings Last Loaded on 17-08-2002 at 17:49:20

On-Line SMDR Printing on Port : None

Off-Line SMDR Printing on Port : NoneConfiguration Reports on Port : COM2

COM Port for Programming : None

COM1: 4800 bps, 1 Data bits, No Parity, 0 Stopbit

COM2: 19200 bps, 1 Data bits, No Parity, 0 Stopbit

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


System Security (Passwords)

What’s this?Eternity’s programming/usage is secured at three levels:• System Engineer level. This level is protected by SE password• System Administrator level. This level is protected by SA password.

• User level. This level is protected by user password.

System Engineer Password• This password is the main password of the system and should be kept by the system engineer. SE

password is needed to enter the system engineer mode of the system to change any setting of the system.• SE password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 0 – 9 are

valid.• Please note that the system engineer cannot know SA password or user password. However, he can clear

these passwords to their default values.

How to program?Use following command to change password:

5706-New SE Password New SE password is a number string of 4-digits. Default password is 1234.

Forgot your program password?• It is very important to remember the SE password. Without this password, it is not possible to enter the

program mode and change the settings. It is advisable to make a note of this password at a safe place.• However, if the system engineer (SE) password is lost, then it can be set to its default value. Following

steps describe the procedure:• Switch off the system.• Remove the master card from the system.• Locate a mini jumper on the Master card.• Put the jumper in A-B Position• Re-insert the card in the system and switch it on.• Wait for 15 seconds.• Switch off the system.• Remove the master card from the system, restore the jumper in its original position and switch on the

system.• The SE password gets default to 1234.• Enter SE mode by dialing 1#91-1234.

System Administrator Password• The system administrator uses this password.• SA password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 0 – 9 are

valid.• Following functions can be performed with this password:• Change of time zones.• Holiday rates• SMDR report• Clearing user passwords.



Matrix


How to program?Use following command to change SA password:5707-New SA Password New SA password is a number string of 4-digits. (Default password is 1111)

User Password (User Security)

The User can secure his station from unauthorized use by way of using User PasswordFor operational details on this topic, please refer ‘User Security’.

Added SecurityVarious users use the system and there are chances that users might make few operational mistakes likeforgetting their password and thereby unable to use system features or might need to lock their stationsremotely, etc. Eternity provides few commands to help in such conditions.Following are given such conditions:• Assigning default user password to SLT/DKP• Lock/Unlock the DKP keypad remotely• Making User absent/present remotely

How to assign default user password to the SLT?Sometimes a user forgets his user password. Eternity offers a command to assign default user password tothe user.Use following command to assign default user password to the SLT user:5701-1-SLT-# Where SLT is the software port number of the SLT user

Use following command to assign default user passwords to a range of SLT users:5701-2-SLT-SLT-#

Use following command to assign default user passwords to all SLT users:5701-*-#

Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.

How to assign default user password to the DKP?Sometimes a user forgets his user password. Eternity offers a command to assign default user password tothe user.

Use following command to assign default user password to the DKP user:5702-1-DKP-# Where DKP is the software port number of the DKP user

Use following command to assign default user passwords to a range of DKP users:5702-2-DKP-DKP-#

Use following command to assign default user passwords to all DKP users:5702-*-# Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.

How to lock/unlock a DKP keypad remotely?Sometimes a DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could notcome. Since his DKP keypad is active and is not locked any unauthorized person can make a call from hisstation. Eternity helps to avoid this. He can ask SA to lock his keypad.



Matrix


Use following command to lock/unlock the DKP keypad:5703-1-DKP-Code Where DKP is the software port number of the DKP user

Use following command to lock/unlock keypads of range of DKPs:5703-2-DKP-DKP-Code

Use following command to lock/unlock keypads of all DKPs:5703-* -Code Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.

How to make DKP user absent/present remotely?Sometimes a DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could notcome. Since his DKP is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can callhim. All these calls will not be answered since he is not present. Eternity offers Flexibility to make DKP

absent remotely.

Use following command to make DKP absent/present:5704-1-DKP-M ode Where DKP is the software port number of the DKP user

Use following command to make a range of DKPs absent/present:5704-2-DKP-DKP-Mode

Use following command to make all the DKPs absent/present:5704-*-Mode Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.

How to make SLT user absent/present remotely?Sometimes a SLT user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could notcome. Since his SLT is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can callhim. All these calls will not be answered since he is not present. Eternity offers Flexibility to make SLTabsent remotely.

Use following command to make SLT absent/present:5705-1-SLT-M ode Where SLT is the software port number of the SLT user

Use following command to make a range of SLTs absent/present:5705-2-SLT-SLT-Mode

Code Meaning

0 DKP unlock

1 DKP lock

Mode Meaning

0 DKP absent

1 DKP present

Mode Meaning

0 SLT absent

1 SLT present



Matrix


Use following command to make all the SLTs absent/present:5705-* -Mode Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.

Relevant topics:1. Programming the System

2. DISA

=X=X=



Matrix


Tenant Service

What’s this?In a business center, there are many different, independent offices. A housing colony can also have many buildings or apartments. In such cases different offices, bungalows or apartments are different entities termedas tenants. Each tenant needs a communication system of his own, one tenant is not concerned about the

other. Generally, a tenant expects:1. Flexible numbering plan.2. Separate incoming and outgoing trunks3. Flexible time table4. Inter-tenant communication.

Users from a tenant think they have their own communication system. They should feel that they have anindependent system. They need not know that the system they are using is physically the same the other tenants are using.

The Eternity provides this by allowing to group the users tenant wise. Maximum eight (8) tenant groups can be created within the system. Same station numbers can be reused in a different tenant. But, feature codes

remain the same throughout the system.

Please note that all the tenants can have different office timings of their choice. This is supported by eight(8) different timetables programmable in the system. Please refer section “Time tables” for more details.

How to program?Each Station can be put in one of the eight tenants.Use following command to assign a tenant group to a SLT:4901-1-SLT-Tenant.Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT User.Tenant is the Tenant group from 0 to 7



Matrix


Use following command to assign a tenant group to a DKP:4902-1-DKP-Tenant.Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP User.Tenant is the Tenant group from 0 to 7

Use following command to assign a tenant group to a Trunk:4903-1-Trunk-Tenant.Where,Trunk is the software port number of the User.Tenant is the Tenant group from 0 to 7

How to assign access code of your choice to the tenant group?Tenant number is an access code (a Flexible number) dialed from the dial phase to call another tenant. Thereare maximum 8 tenant groups. Each tenant code must be unique and should not match with either SLTstation number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial phase. A typical table of default tenant access codes for the tenants looks like:

Use following command to program the access code for a tenant group:4309-1-Tenant Group-Access Code-#

Where,Tenant Group is a three-digit number from 000 to 007.Access Code is of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear access code for a tenant group:4309-1-Tenant Group-# Use following command to clear access codes for a range of tenant groups:4309-2-Tenant Group-Tenant Group Index-# Use following command to clear access codes for all tenant groups:4309-*-# Use following command to assign default access codes for all tenant groups:4359 -*-#

Example:Cotton Software Inc. is a tenant. It has eight (8) stations. Tenant connects DKPs to two stations (software port number 000 and 001) and SLTs to six stations (software port numbers 000 to 005). Cotton Software Inc.is allotted two trunks viz. 000 and 001. Assign an access code 41 to tenant 1.Let us program these 8 stations in tenant groups 1.

First, Program the SLTs4901-2-000-005-1

Tenant Group Access Code

000 2991

001 2992

002 2993

003 2994

004 2995

005 2996

006 2997

007 2998



Matrix


Now, Program the DKPs4902-2-000-001-1

Now, program trunks for this Tenant.4903-2-000-001-1

Assign access code 41 to Cotton software Inc.4309-1-1-41-#

How to use it?• Decide the number of tenants to be formed.• Decide the number of trunks to be allotted to each tenant.• Decide the number of SLTs and DKPs to be kept in each tenant.• Do the programming using above commands.• Do other relevant programming for trunk, SLTs and DKPs.


Default commands

Relevant topics:1. Access Codes2. Time Tables

=X=X=

Assign a tenant group to a SLT 4901-1-SLT -Tenant Assign a tenant group to a range of SLTs 4901-2-SLT-SLT -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to all SLTs 4901-* -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to a DKP 4902-1-DKP -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to a range of DKPs 4902-2-DKP-DKP -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to all DKPs 4902-* -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to a Trunk 4903-1-Trunk -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to a range of Trunks 4903-2-Trunk-Trunk -Tenant

Assign a tenant group to all Trunks 4903-* -Tenant

Assign default tenant group to a SLT 4901-1-SLT -#

Assign default tenant group to a range of SLTs 4901-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign a default tenant group to all SLTs 4901-* -#

Assign default tenant group to a DKP 4902-1-DKP -#

Assign default tenant group to a range of DKPs 4902-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default tenant group to all DKPs 4902-* -#

Assign default tenant group to a Trunk 4903-1-Trunk-#

Assign default tenant group to a range of Trunks 4903-2-Trunk-Trunk -#

Assign default tenant group to all Trunks 4903-* -#



Matrix


Time Tables

What’s this?A user having access to long distance dialing would prefer this facility disabled to avoid misuse during non-working hours once the office is closed. Trunk calls should be routed to the security staff once the office isclosed. An operator would prefer the system to route calls directly to marketing department during lunch

hours. A different greeting message needs to be played on a holiday.

Above examples highlight the need for the system to behave differently depending on the time of the day.The Eternity offers a very Flexible programming for different time zones. A day can be divided in three timezones viz. Working hours, Lunch hours and Non-working hours. Each day of the week can be programmedwith different time zones. Such a schedule of a week is called a timetable. Thus, a timetable is a weeklyschedule of three time zones for each day of the week.The Eternity offers maximum of eight timetables. All eight different timetables are helpful when we haveeight tenants each having different timings.

A default timetable is shown below:

Time Zones

Week Days

Start End Start End Start End

Sunday 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 23:59

Monday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00

Tuesday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00

Wednesday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00Thursday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00

Friday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00

Saturday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00

Working Hours Lunch Hours Non-working Hours



Matrix


How to program a time table?Step 1: Program timetables using command 1101 and 1102 Step 2: Assign a timetable to SLT using command 1112 Step 3: Assign a timetable to DKP using command 1113 Step 4: Assign a timetable to trunk using command 1114 Step 5: Set timetable for Auto or Manual mode using command 1110

Step 6: If set for manual mode, select the time zone using command 1111 Step 7: Take a printout of all timetables using command 1100

Step 1Please note that there are three fixed time zones for each day in the timetable.Time Zone 1: Working hoursTime Zone 2: Lunch hoursTime Zone 3: Non-working hours (non-programmable)

Use following command to program an entry for working hours in a timetable:1101-1-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time.Where,

Timetable = 0 to 7Day = Day of the week as per following table

Start Time = Time Zone start time in 24-hour, Hour: Minute format.End time = Time Zone end time in 24 hour, Hour: Minute format.

Use following command to program an entry for lunch hours in a timetable:1102-1-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time.Where,Timetable = 0 to 7

Day = Day of the week as per following table

Start Time = Time Zone start time in 24-hour, Hour: Minute format.End time = Time Zone end time in 24-hour, Hour: Minute format.

Please note that the third time zone need not be programmed as the system automatically puts the leftover duration in this zone.

Example 1:Let us program a timetable with normal office hours of 9:00 am to 6:00 pm from Monday to Friday.Saturday is half day from 9:00 am to 1:00 pm and Sunday is holiday. We need following zones:1. Working Hours2. Non-working hours.

Important point:• We shall program Time zone 1 for 09:00 to 18:00 and since there is no Lunch break, we shall program

Time zone 2 for time 00:00 to 00:00. There is no need to program the third time zone as the systemautomatically puts the leftover duration in this zone.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7


1 2 3 4 5 6 7



Matrix


Once programmed, the timetable will look like:

Use following command to affect above programming:1101-1-1-1-0000-0000 1101-1-1-2-0900-1800 1101-1-1-3-0900-1800

1101-1-1-4-0900-1800 1101-1-1-5-0900-1800 1101-1-1-6-0900-1800 1101-1-1-7-0900-1300

1102-1-1-1-0000-0000 1102-1-1-2-0000-0000 1102-1-1-3-0000-0000 1102-1-1-4-0000-0000 1102-1-1-5-0000-0000 1102-1-1-6-0000-0000 1102-1-1-7-0000-0000

Example 2:Assume an office where:Working days are from Monday to Friday Normal office timings are 8:00 am to 5:00 pm.Lunchtime is from 12:30 pm to 13:00 pm.Saturday is half day from 8:00 am to 1:00 pm.Weekly off is on Sunday.

Following zones are needed:1. Working hours2. Lunch hours3. Non-working hours

Please note that Non-working hours need not be programmed since the system automatically puts theleftover duration in this zone.

Time Zones

Week Days


Sunday 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 23:59

Monday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Tuesday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Wednesday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Thursday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Friday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Saturday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00




Matrix


Once programmed, the timetable will look like:

Use following commands to achieve above programming:1101-1-2-1-0000-0000 1101-1-2-2-0800-1700 1101-1-2-3-0800-1700

1101-1-2-4-0800-1700 1101-1-2-5-0800-1700 1101-1-2-6-0800-1700 1101-1-2-7-0800-1300

1102-1-2-1-0000-0000 1102-1-2-2-1230-1300 1102-1-2-3-1230-1300 1102-1-2-4-1230-1300 1102-1-2-5-1230-1300 1102-1-2-6-1230-1300 1102-1-2-7-0000-0000

Time Zones and StationsFollowing stations parameters can be programmed differently for different time zones:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Toll Control Group3. Trunk Access Group

With this programming, it is possible to allow the station to dial long distance codes in certain period of time.A station user can be assigned a timetable matching his timings. Let us assume that in an office people work in two shifts. With these 8 different timetables to choose from, a user can be allocated a timetable thatmatches his working hours.

Step 2Use following command to assign a timetable to a SLT:1112-1-SLT-Timetable Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255Timetable is from 0 to 7

Time Zones

Week Days


Sunday 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 23:59

Monday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00

Tuesday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00

Wednesday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00

Thursday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00

Friday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00

Saturday 08:00 17:00 12:30 13:00 17:00 08:00




Matrix


Step 3Use following command to assign a timetable to a DKP:1113-1-DKP-Timetable Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127Timetable is from 0 to 7

Example:Assign timetable 2 to SLT 2001 (software port number 000) and timetable 1 to DKP 3001 (software portnumber 000)1112-1-000-2 1113-1-000-1

Time Zones and TrunksFollowing trunk parameters can be programmed different for different time zones:1. DID2. DISA3. Trunk landing group

A trunk can have different personalities for different time zones. For example, it can be programmed to landon the operator station during working hours. During lunchtime, it can land on the canteen station and finallyin the non-working, the same trunk can land on the security station.

Step 4Use following command to assign a timetable to a Trunk:1114-1-Trunk-Timetable Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk user from 000 to 127Timetable is from 0 to 7

Example:Assign timetable 2 to trunk 000 and timetable 1 to trunk 0011114-1-000-2 1114-1-001-1

Step 5Use following command to set Manual or Auto mode for a timetable:1110-1-Timetable-Code Where,Timetable is from 0 to 7

Example:Assign manual mode to timetable 2 and auto mode to timetable 1.1110-1-2-0 1110-1-1-1

Code Meaning

0 Manual1 Auto



Matrix


Step 6Use following command to select time zone for a timetable, if manual mode is set:1111-1-Timetable-Zone Where,Timetable is from 0 to 7Zone is from 1 to 3

Example:Assign zone 3 to timetable 2.1111-1-2-3

Step 7Use following command to take printout of all timetables:1100


Program an entry for working hours in a timetable 1101-1-Timetable-Day-Star t Ti me-End Ti me

Program an entry for working hours in range of

timetables

1101-2-Timetabl e-Ti metabl e-Day-Star t Time-

End Time

Program an entry for lunch hours in a timetable 1102-1-Timetable-Day-Star t Ti me-End Ti me

Program an entry for lunch hours in range of

timetables

1102-2-Timetabl e-Ti metabl e-Day-Star t Time-

End Time

Assign a table to a SLT. 1112-1-SLT-T imetable

Assign same table to a range of SLTs. 1112-2-SLT-SLT-Timetable

Assign same table to all SLTs. 1112-* -Timetable

Assign a table to a DKP. 1113-1-DKP-Timetable

Assign same table to a range of DKPs. 1113-2-DKP-DKP-Timetable

Assign same table to all DKPs. 1113-* -Timetable

Assign a table to a trunk 1114-1-Trunk-Timetable

Assign same table to range of trunks 1114-2-Trunk-Trunk-Timetable

Assign same table to all trunks. 1114-* -Timetable

Set manual or auto mode for a timetable 1110-1-Timetable-Mode

Set manual or auto mode for few timetables 1110-2-Timetable-Timetable-Mode

Set manual or auto mode for all timetables 1110-* -Mode

Select time zone for a timetable, if manual mode is

set

1111-1-Timetable-Zone

Select time zone for few timetables, if manual mode

is set

1111-2-Timetable-Timetable-Zone

Select time zone for all timetables, if manual mode

is set

1111-* - Zone



Matrix


Default commands

Relevant topics:1. Real Time Clock (RTC)2. Class Of Service (COS)3. Toll Control4. Trunk Access Groups

5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA)6. Direct Inward Dialing (DID)7. Trunk Landing Group8. Wild Card Programming

Default all entries for working hours in a timetable 1101-1-Timetable-#

Default all entries for working hours in few

timetables

1101-2-Timetable-Timetable-#

Default all entries for working hours in all timetables 1101-* - #

Default all entries for lunch hours in a timetable 1102-1-Timetable-#

Default all entries for lunch hours in few timetables 1102-2-Timetable-Timetable-#

Default all entries for lunch hours in all timetables 1102-* -#

Assign default timetable to a SLT. 1112-1-SLT-#

Assign default timetable to few SLTs. 1112-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default timetable to all SLTs. 1112-* -#

Assign default timetable to a DKP. 1113-1-DKP-#

Assign default timetable to few DKPs. 1113-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default timetable to all DKPs. 1113-* -#

Assign default timetable to a trunk 1114-1-Trunk-#

Assign default timetable to few trunks 1114-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Assign default timetable to all trunks. 1114-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

TIME TABLES AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:28

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

No. Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start End

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

01 Auto Switch - ONWH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

02 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

03 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

04 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

05 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

06 Auto Switch - ONWH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

07 Auto Switch - ON

WH 0000 0000 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800 0900 1800

BH 0000 0000 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400 1300 1400

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WH: Working Hours, BH: Break Hours

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Toll Control

What’s this?Toll Control can:• Restrict dialing all local telephone numbers.• Restrict dialing certain local telephone numbers.

• Restrict dialing telephone nos. starting with ‘95’• Restrict dialing long distance calls (00)• Restrict dialing certain areas (area codes 03 and 04)• Restrict dialing telephone numbers in a particular area (area codes 031,032,..)• Restrict dialing page numbers (96)• Restrict dialing cell phone numbers (98)• Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with a particular digit. (1)• Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with particular area code. (022)• Allow dialing only certain telephone number. (630555)• Allow dialing only certain area. (02 and 04)• Allow dialing only certain area code.• Allow dialing only certain page nos.

• Allow dialing only those telephone numbers starting with particular digit. (1)

How it works?• Eternity uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature.• When a call is made, the Eternity compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings

in allowed list and denied list.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Eternity

dials the number on the trunk, else compares with the number strings in the denied list.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Eternity

restricts dialing the number and gives error tone to the station user.• If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then

allowed list is given priority and the dialed number is dialed on the trunk.

How to use it?• By default, few number strings are available in the allowed list and denied list. If these number strings

satisfy the requirement then these should be assigned to the station for individual time zone.• If the requirement is not met by default allowed and denied list then customized allowed list and denied

list should be programmed.• The number strings which are to be allowed should be programmed in allowed list.• The number strings which are to be denied should be programmed in denied list.• One such allowed and a denied list should be assigned to each station for individual time zone.• If customized toll control is to be provided then customized numbers should be programmed in the

allowed list and the denied list. For example, the requirement is that station 201 can make a call to

Mumbai (022) but should make any other long distance call. In this case, number string 022 should be programmed in one of the locations of the allowed list and should be assigned to station 201. Similarly,station 201 is not allowed any long distance call, hence it should be assigned default denied list 02.

• One such allowed and a denied list should also be assigned to the station for the locked condition.• Once the station has been locked, the station user can make calls as per the allowed and denied lists

assigned to the station for the locked condition. Thi s is call ed Dynamic Toll Control.• Allowed list 00 and Denied list 00 are assigned in locked condition by default.



Matrix


The following flow chart explains the logic of Toll Control Group.

How to program?Step 1: List the toll control to be programmed station wise.Step 2: Check whether the requirement can be met by using default Allowed Lists and Denied Lists.Step 3: If default allowed lists satisfy the requirement, assign allowed list to the stations using commands

1911,1912,1913,1921,1922, 1923 for individual time zones.Step 4: If default denied lists satisfy the requirement, assign denied lists to the stations using commands

1961,1962,1963,1971,1972,1973 for individual time zones.Step 5: If the requirement cannot be satisfied by default allowed lists and denied lists then list down the

customized numbers to be programmed in allowed list and denied list.Step 6: Program the numbers/number strings to be allowed in the allowed list using command 6301 .Step 7: Program the number/number strings to be denied in the denied list using command 6302 .Step 8: Assign customized allowed list to the stations using commands 1911,1912, 1913, 1921,1922, 1923 .Step 9: Assign customized denied lists to these stations using commands 1961,1962, 1963,1971,1972,1973 .Step 10: Also assign a default/customized allowed list to these stations for the locked condition using

commands 1931,1932.Step 11: Similarly, assign a default/customized denied lists to these stations for the locked condition using

commands 1981,1982 .

Start

Station grab a trunk

Station dials a outside number

Does the

dialed numebr string

matches with any number

in allowed

list ?

Does the

number matches with

any number in denied

toll control list ?

System dials the number

End

System gives error tone to

the user

End

System dials the number

End

Yes

No

No

Yes



Matrix


Step 12: Print the SLT parameters or the DKP parameters report to verify the toll control assignment usingcommand 1300 or 1400 .

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a paper. Write down the toll control to be assigned to each station.

Step 2Have a look at default allowed lists and denied lists and check whether the requirement can be met withthese lists.

Step 3Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during working hours:1911-1-SLT-A ll owed List Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255.Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during lunch hours:1912-1-SLT-All owed L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during non-working hours:1913-1-SLT-All owed L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during working hours:1921-1-DKP-Al lowed L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during lunch hours:1922-1-DKP-Al lowed L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during non-working hours:1923-1-DKP-Al lowed L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Allowed List is from 00 to 24.



Matrix


Step 4Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during working hours:1961-1-SLT-Denied L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during lunch hours:1962-1-SLT-Denied L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during non-working hours:1963-1-SLT-Denied L ist Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during working hours:1971-1-DKP-Denied L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during lunch hours:1972-1-DKP-Denied L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during non-working hours:1973-1-DKP-Denied L ist Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Step5If the requirement is not met by default allowed lists and denied lists then write down the requirement on a piece of paper and make corresponding allowed lists and denied lists using step 5 and step 6.

Step 6 and Step 7Please refer “Allowed List and Denied List”.

Step 8 and Step 9Please refer step 3 and step 4 explained above.

Step 10Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT for locked condition:1931-1-SLT-Locked All owed List Where,



Matrix


SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Locked Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP for locked condition:1932-1-DKP-L ocked Al lowed L ist Where,

DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Locked Allowed List is from 00 to 24.

Step 11Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT for locked condition:1981-1-SLT-Locked Denied List Where,SLT is the software port number of the user from 000 to 255Locked Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP for locked condition:1982-1-DKP-L ocked Denied Li st

Where,DKP is the software port number of the user from 000 to 127Locked Denied List is from 00 to 24.

Step 12Please refer “SLT basic parameters” and ‘Digital Key Phone-Programming”

Example:Let us program the system for following conditions:We have two SLT users 2001 and 2002 (S/w port no. 000 and 001) and one DKP user 2003 (S/w port no.000)For 2001: During working hours: Allow 011-6565655 and 011-6565656 but restrict all other 011 calls.

Allow all 022 calls but restrict 022-7878787 and 022-7878788. Allow all local calls and other long distance calls Restrict all calls during lunch hours and non-working hours.

For 2002: Allow only local calls and 95 calls. Restrict long distance calls during all the timings of theday.

For 2003: All calls allowed. No restriction.

Solution:It is advisable to make changes for any customized requirement in allowed list 05 to 24 and denied list 05 to24 so that default lists can be assigned to other stations without making any changesLet us make an allowed list 05 which shall allow 011-6565655, 011-6565656, 022,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 and 9.Let us make a denied list 05 which shall restrict 022-7878787, 022-7878788 and 011 but shall allow all other calls.

Use following command to program allowed list 05:6301-1-05-00-0116565655-# 6301-1-05-01-0116565656-# 6301-1-05-02-022-#

Use following command to program denied list 05:6302-1-05-00-0227878787-# 6302-1-05-01-0227878788-#



Matrix


6302-1-05-02-011-# 6302-1-05-03-# 6302-1-05-04-# 6302-1-05-05-# 6302-1-05-06-# 6302-1-05-07-#

6302-1-05-08-# 6302-1-05-09-#

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2001 during working hours:1911-1-000-05

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2001 during lunch hours:1912-1-000-00

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2001 during non-working hours:1913-1-000-00

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2001 during working hours:1961-1-000-05

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2001 during lunch hours:1962-1-000-00

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2001 during non-working hours:1963-1-000-00

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2002 during working hours:1911-1-001-00

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2002 during lunch hours:1912-1-001-00

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 2002 during non-working hours:1913-1-001-00

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2002 during working hours:1961-1-001-02

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2002 during lunch hours:1962-1-001-02

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 2002 during non-working hours:1963-1-001-02

Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 2003 during working hours:1921-1-000-00

Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 2003 during lunch hours:1922-1-000-00



Matrix


Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 2003 during non-working hours:1923-1-000-00

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 2003 during working hours:1971-1-000-04

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 2003 during lunch hours:1972-1-000-04

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 2003 during non-working hours:1973-1-000-04


Assign allowed list to a SLT during working hours 1911-1-SLT-A l lowed List.

Assign allowed list to range of SLTs during working hours 1911-2-SLT-SLT-Al lowed L ist.

Assign allowed list to all SLT during working hours 1911-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a SLT during lunch hours 1912-1-SLT-A l lowed List.

Assign allowed list to range of SLTs during lunch hours 1912-2-SLT-SLT-Al lowed L ist.

Assign allowed list to all SLTs during lunch hours 1912-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a SLT during non-working hours 1913-1-SLT-A l lowed List.

Assign allowed list to a range of SLTs during non-working

hours

1913-2-SLT-SLT-Al lowed L ist.

Assign allowed list to all SLTs during non-working hours 1913-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a DKP during working hours 1921-1-DKP-Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to range of DKPs during working hours 1921-2-DKP-DKP-All owed L ist.Assign allowed list to a DKP during working hours 1921-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a DKP during lunch hours 1922-1-DKP-Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to range of DKPs during lunch hours 1922-2-DKP-DKP- A ll owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to all DKPs during lunch hours 1922-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a DKP during non-working hours 1923-1-DKP-Al l owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to a range of DKPs during non-working

hours

1923-2-DKP-DKP-All owed L ist.

Assign allowed list to all DKPs during non-working hours 1923-* -Al l owed L ist.

Assign denied list to a SLT during working hours 1961-1-SLT-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to range of SLTs during working hours 1961-2-SLT-SLT-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to a SLT during working hours 1961-* -Denied L i st.

Assign denied list to a SLT during lunch hours 1962-1-SLT-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to range of SLTs during lunch hours 1962-2-SLT-SLT-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to all SLTs during lunch hours 1962-* -Denied L i st.



Matrix


Default commands

Assign denied list to a SLT during non-working hours 1963-1-SLT-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to a range of SLTs during non-working

hours

1963-2-SLT-SLT-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to all SLTs during non-working hours 1963-* -Denied Li st.

Assign denied list to a DKP during working hours 1971-1-DKP-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to range of DKPs during working hours 1971-2-DKP-DKP-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to a DKP during working hours 1971-* -Denied Li st.

Assign denied list to a DKP during lunch hours 1972-1-DKP-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to range of DKPs during lunch hours 1972-2-DKP-DKP-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to all DKPs during lunch hours 1972-* -Denied Li st.

Assign denied list to a DKP during non-working hours 1973-1-DKP-Deni ed L ist.

Assign denied list to all DKPs during non-working hours 1973-2-DKP-DKP-Denied L ist.

Assign denied list to all DKPs during non-working hours 1973-* -Denied Li st.

Assign locked allowed list to a SLT. 1931-1-SLT -Locked Al lowed L ist.

Assign locked allowed list to a range of SLTs. 1931-2-SLT-SLT-Locked A l l owed

List.

Assign locked allowed list to all SLTs. 1931-* -Locked Al lowed L i st.

Assign locked allowed list to a DKP. 1932-1-DKP -L ocked Al l owed L ist.

Assign locked allowed list to a range of DKPs. 1932-2-DKP-DKP-L ocked Al l owed

List.

Assign locked allowed list to all DKPs. 1932-* -Locked Al lowed L i st.

Assign locked denied list to a SLT. 1981-1-SLT -Locked Denied Li st.

Assign locked denied list to a range of SLTs. 1981-2-SLT-SLT -Locked Denied

List.

Assign locked denied list to all SLTs. 1981-* -Locked Deni ed L ist.

Assign locked denied list to a DKP. 1982-1-DKP -Locked Deni ed L ist.

Assign locked denied list to a range of DKPs. 1982-2-DKP-DKP -Locked Denied

List.

Assign locked denied list to all DKPs. 1982-* -Locked Deni ed L ist.

Assign default allowed list to a SLT during working hours 1911-1-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to range of SLTs during working

hours

1911-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to all SLTs during working hours 1911-* -#



Matrix


Assign default allowed list to a SLT during lunch hours 1912-1-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to range of SLTs during lunch

hours

1912-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to all SLTs during lunch hours 1912-* -#

Assign default allowed list to a SLT during non-working

hours

1913-1-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to all SLTs during non-working

hours

1913-* -#

Assign default allowed list to a range of SLTs during non-

working hours

1913-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default allowed list to a DKP during working hours 1921-1-DKP-#

Assign default allowed list to a range of DKPs during 1921-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default allowed list to all DKPs during working hours 1921-* -#

Assign default allowed list to a DKP during lunch hours 1922-1-DKP-# Assign default allowed list to a range of DKPs during lunch 1922-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default allowed list to all DKPs during lunch hours 1922-* -#

Assign default allowed list to a DKP during non-working

hours

1923-1-DKP-#

Assign default allowed list to a range of DKPs during non- 1923-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default allowed list to all DKPs during non-working 1923-* -#

Assign default denied list to a SLT during working hours 1961-1-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to a range of SLTs during working 1961-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to all SLTs during working hours 1961-* -#

Assign default denied list to a SLT during lunch hours 1962-1-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to range of SLTs during lunch hours 1962-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to all SLTs during lunch hours 1962-* -#

Assign default denied list to a SLTs during non-working

hours

1963-1-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to all SLTs during non-workinghours

1963-* -#

Assign default denied list to a range of SLTs during non-

working hours

1963-2-SLT-SLT-#

Assign default denied list to a DKP during working hours 1971-1-DKP-#

Assign default denied list to a range of DKPs during working 1971-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default denied list to all DKPs during working hours 1971-* -#



Matrix


Relevant topics:1. Allowed Lists and Denied Lists2. SLT Basic Parameters3. Digital Key Phone - Programming

=X=X=

Assign default denied list to a DKP during lunch hours 1972-1-DKP-#

Assign default denied list to range of DKPs during lunch 1972-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default denied list to all DKPs during lunch hours 1972-* -#

Assign default denied list to a DKPs during non-working

hours

1973-1-DKP-#

Assign default denied list to all DKPs during non-working

hours

1973-* -#

Assign default denied list to a range of DKPs during non-

working hours

1973-2-DKP-DKP-#

Assign default locked allowed list to a SLT. 1931-1-SLT -#

Assign default locked allowed list to a range of SLTs. 1931-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default locked allowed list to all SLTs. 1931-* -#

Assign default locked allowed list to a DKP. 1932-1-DKP -#

Assign default locked allowed list to a range of DKPs. 1932-2-DKP-DKP -#

Assign default locked allowed list to all DKPs. 1932-* -#

Assign default locked denied list to a SLT. 1981-1-SLT -#

Assign default locked denied list to a range of SLTs. 1981-2-SLT-SLT -#

Assign default locked denied list to all SLTs. 1981-* -#.

Assign default locked denied list to a DKP. 1982-1-DKP -#

Assign default locked denied list to a range of DKPs. 1982-2-DKP-DKP -#

Assign default locked denied list to all DKPs. 1982-* -#



Matrix


Trunk Access Groups

What is this?Trunk Access Groups provide efficient allocation of trunks to different stations.· All the trunks connected to the system can be bunched in different groups called trunk access group.Maximum 16 trunks can be put in one trunk access group and 25 such trunks access groups can be formed.

· These trunks access groups can be allotted to each individual station.· A station can be allotted different trunk access groups during different timings of the day.

How it works?System uses two methods while selecting a trunk from the trunk access group viz. Remember last trunk andDon’t Remember last trunk. In Remember last trunk method, the system remembers the last trunk used andallots next trunk in the group to the station. In don’t remember last trunk method, the system searches for afree trunk from the first trunk programmed in the group.

Following flow chart depicts the chronology of events when a station grabs a trunk.



Matrix


Time based LCR Mixed LCR No LCR Number based LCR

Start

Station user dials trunk

group access codes

Which

LCR type is

selected ?

System finds the cheaport

trunk from the group

depending upon the time

on which call is made &

following rotation logic

System allots free trunk

from the trunk access

group as per number

logic & rotation logic

Is the

cheapest

trunk free

Are other

trunk available

in this group

System allots the

trunk to the station

End

No

Select next

cheapest trunk

in this group

Yes

YesSystem gives busy

tone to the station

System waits for next

action from the user

No

System allots free trunk

from the trunk access

group as per number logic

& rotation logic

System waits

for dialing of

entire number

System finds

cheapest trunk for

this number

Is cheapest

trunk free?

System dials out

the number

End

Select next cheap

trunk in this group

No

Yes

Is cheaper

trunk

available ?

YesSystem gives busy

tone to the station

No


action from user

End

A B



Matrix


B

System allots a free trunk from the TAG

depends upon the rotation flag

End

A

System finds the cheaper trunk

from the grabbed TAG

depending upon time, number logic & rotation logic

Is cheaper trunk

with respect to the

LCR logic free ?

System waits for dialing

of entire number

Is the

number dialled

allowed from this

cheapest trunk

System dials out the number

End

Are other trunks available

with TAG

Select next cheaper trunk

within the group

System gives busy

tone to station


action system user

End

Are other

trunks available

within TAG ?

System gives busy

tone to the station


action from user

End

No

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No



Matrix


How to program?Main commandsStep 1: Decide number of Trunk access groups to be formed. Program these groups using command 1802 .Step 2: Program rotation code to select a trunk within the trunk access group using command 1803 .Step 3: Assign trunk access groups to the stations using commands 1811,1812,1813 and 1821,1822,1823 .Step 4: Take a print out of Trunk Access Groups configuration using command 1800 .

Step 5: Assign Flexible access code of our choice to the each trunk access group

Use wild cards for range programmingUse Default commands to program any of the parameters to default values

Step 1Use following command to put trunks in a trunk access group:1802-1-Trunk Access Group-Trunk1-Trunk2 -… -Trunk 16/# Where,Trunk Access Group is from 00 to 24.Trunk1 … Trunk 16 are the software ports numbers of the trunksIf fewer than 16 trunks are needed in a Trunk access group, use ‘#’ to terminate the command.

Step 2Use following command to program rotation code for a group:1803-1-Trunk Access Group-Rotation Code Trunk access group is from 00 to 24.

Step 3

Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during working hours:1811-1-SLT-Trunk Access Group index-Trunk Access Group Number Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,….,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during lunch hours:1812-1-SLT-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk Access Group Number Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,…,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during non- working hours:1813-1-SLT-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk Access Group Number Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 000 to 255Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,….,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Rotation Code Meaning

0Trunk rotation OFF within the group, system

always selects the first trunk of the group

1 Truk rotation ON within the group



Matrix


Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during working hours:1821-1-DKP-Tr unk Access Group Index-Tr unk Access Group Number Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,….,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during lunch hours:1822-1-DKP-Tr unk Access Group Index-Tr unk Access Group Number Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,….,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during non- working hours:1823-1-DKP-Tr unk Access Group Index-Tr unk Access Group Number Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 000 to 127

Trunk Access Group Index is from 0 to 9 (This corresponds to 0,5,61,62,….,68 in default state)Trunk Access Group Number is from 00 to 24

Step 4Use following command to take printouts of trunk access group configuration:1800

Step 5How to assign an access code of your choice to Trunk Access group?There are maximum 10 trunk access codes. These are Flexible access codes. Trunk access codes arecommon for all the users. They cannot be different for different station.A default trunk access codes table is given below

Use following command to program the desirable access code for a Trunk access index:4303-1-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Flexible Code-# Where,Trunk Access Group Index is a three-digit number from 000 to 009.Access Code is of 1,2,3 or 4 digits. (Generally access code for trunk is of two digits.)

Trunk Access Group Index Default Trunk Access Code

000 0

001 5

002 61

003 62

004 63

005 64

006 65

007 66

008 67009 68



Matrix


Use following command to clear the access code for a Trunk access index:4303-1-Trunk Access Group I ndex-#

Use following command to clear the access codes for a range of Trunk access indexes:4303-2-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group I ndex-#

Use following command to clear the access code for all Trunk access indexes:4303-*-#

Use following command to assign default access codes for all Trunk access indexes:4353-*-#It is recommended to use default codes.

How to use it?

• To grab trunk access group 2, the user should dial ‘61’• To grab trunk access group 0, the user should dial ‘0’

Example:Program the system for following constraints given:• 20 trunks: Software ports are 000-019.• Four departments: Marketing, R&D, Accounts and Technical Support.• Marketing department should get access to first 5 trunks: Software ports 000-004.• R&D department should get access to next 5 trunks: Software ports 005-009.• Accounts department should get access to next 5 trunks: Software ports 010-014.• Technical Support department should get access to next 5 trunks: Software port 015-019.• Rotation ON for R&D and Accounts

• Rotation OFF method for Marketing & Technical Support dept.• 2 SLTs of Marketing department (Software ports 000 and 001) should get trunk access group 00 by dialing

0 during break time and should get trunk access group 03 by dialing 61 during working hours.• 2 SLTs of R & D department (Software ports 002 and 003) should get trunk access group 03 by dialing 61

through out the day• 2 DKPs of Accounts department (Software ports 004 and 005) should get trunk access group 02 by dialing

62 through the day• 2 DKPs of Technical support department (Software ports 006 and 007) should get trunk access group 01

by dialing 63 through out the day.

Solution:• Make 4 TAGs viz TAG 0, TAG1, TAG2, and TAG 3.• Program first four trunks (Software port 000-003) in TAG0, next five trunks (Software port 005-009) in

TAG1, and so on.• Program Rotation type• Assign the trunk access groups to individual station.

Use following command to bunch trunks in a trunk access groups:1802-1-00-000-001-002-003-004-# 1802-1-01-005-006-007-008-009-# 1802-1-02-010-011-012-013-014-#


2 Dial 6-Trunk Access Index Dial tone of the trunk

3 Dial desired external number



Matrix


1802-1-03-015-016-017-018-019-#

Use following command for rotation ON/OFF in trunk access groups:1803-1-01-1 1803-1-02-1 1803-1-00-0

1803-1-03-0

1811-1-000-1-03 1811-1-001-1-03 1812-1-000-0-00 1812-1-001-0-00

1811-1-002-1-03 1811-1-003-1-03 1812-1-002-1-03 1812-1-003-1-03

1821-1-004-3-01 1821-1-005-3-01 1822-1-004-3-01 1822-1-005-3-01

1821-1-006-3-01 1821-1-007-3-01 1822-1-006-3-01 1822-1-007-3-01


Program a trunks for a trunk access group 1802-1-Trun k Access Group-Tr unk1-……..Trunk

16/#

Program same trunks for few trunk access groups 1802 -2- Trunk Access Group-Tr unk Access Group-

Trunk1-……..Trunk 16/#

Program same trunks for all trunk access groups 1802 -* - Trunk1-……..Trunk 16/#

Program rotation code for a trunk access group 1803-1-Trunk Access Group-Rotat ion Code

Program same rotation code for few trunk access

groups

1803-2-Trunk Access Group-Trunk Access Group-

Rotati on Code

Program same rotation code for all trunk access

groups

1803-* -Rotati on Code

Program trunk access group to a SLT during working

hours.

1811-1-SLT-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few SLTs during

working hours.

1811-2-SLT-SLT -Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to all SLTs during

working hours.

1811-* -Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access

Group Number



Matrix


Default commands

Defaul t commands are not al lowed in 1802, 1803,1811,1812,1813,1821,1822,1823 ser ies

Program trunk access group to a SLT during lunch

hours.


Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few SLTs during lunch

hours.


Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to all SLTs during lunch

hours.


Group Number

Program trunk access group to all SLTs during non-

working hours.


Group Number

Program trunk access group to a SLT during non-

working hours.


Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few SLTs during non-

working hours.


Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to a DKP during working

hours.

1821-1-DKP-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few DKPs during

working hours.

1821-2-DKP-DKP-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to all DKPs during

working hours.


Group Number

Program trunk access group to a DKP during lunch

hours.

1822-1-DKP-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few DKPs during

lunch hours.

1822-2-DKP-DKP-Trunk Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to all DKPs during lunch

hours.


Group Number

Program trunk access group to a DKP during non-

working hours.

1823-1-DKP-Trunk-Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to few DKPs during non-

working hours.

1823-2-DKP-DKP-Trunk-Access Group I ndex-Trunk

Access Group Number

Program trunk access group to all DKPs during non-

working hours.


Group Number

Default a trunk access group 1801 - 1- Trunk access group-# Default few trunk access groups 1801 - 2- Trunk access group- Trunk access group-#

Default all trunk access groups 1801 - * - #



Matrix


Commands to assign null trunk access groups

Relevant topics:1. Least Cost Routing (LCR)2. Time Tables3. Class of Service (COS)

Assign null trunk access group to a SLT during

working hours.

1811-1-SLT-T runk Access Group Index-#

Assign null trunk access group to few SLTs during

working hours.

1811-2-SLT-SLT-T runk Access Group Index-#

Assign null trunk access group to all SLTs duringworking hours.

1811-* -Trunk Access Group Index-#

Assign null trunk access group to all SLTs during non-

working hours.


Assign null trunk access group to a SLT during non-

working hours.

1813-1-SLT-T runk Access Group Index-#

Assign null trunk access group to few SLTs during

non-working hours.

1813-2-SLT-SLT-T runk Access Group Index-#

Assign null trunk access group to a DKP during

working hours.

1821-1-DKP-Trunk Access Group In dex-#

Assign null trunk access group to few DKPs during

working hours.

1821-2-DKP-DKP-Trunk Access Group I ndex-#

Assign null trunk access group to all DKPs during

working hours.


Assign null trunk access group to a DKP during lunch

hours.



lunch hours.


Assign null trunk access group to all DKPs duringlunch hours.


Assign null trunk access group to all DKPs during non-

working hours.


Assign null trunk access group to a DKP during non-

working hours.



non-working hours.




Matrix


=X=X=

TRUNK ACCESS GROUPS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Group Rotation TRUNKS

No. Flag 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

00 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

01 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

02 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

03 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

04 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

05 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

06 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

07 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

08 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

09 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

10 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

11 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

12 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

13 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

14 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

15 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

16 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

17 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

18 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

19 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

20 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

21 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

22 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

23 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

24 ON 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 - - - - - - - -

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Trunk Landing Group

What’s this?When more number of trunks is interfaced with the system and if all the trunks are programmed to land onoperator then it would become difficult for the operator to answer the calls efficiently. This would result ininefficient call management.

Eternity helps to the condition. It is possible to make groups of stations on which a particular trunk shallland. This group is called trunk-landing group.

How it works?• Maximum 25 trunk landing groups can be formed from 00 to 24.• Maximum 8 stations can be programmed in each trunk-landing group.• Each station can either be a SLT or a DKP.• The time for which each station rings can be programmed.• The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.• The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed.• Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station

continues ringing even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called “Continuous” ringingand can be programmed for each station.

• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from thefirst station once again.

• A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station or from the final station of the previous call. Thismethod is called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the freshcall will land on the destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equaldistribution of incoming calls to all the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled,the fresh call will always land on first station of the trunk-landing group.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of trunk landing groups to be formed, define the station type of each station and

decide the sequence in which the stations should ring. Program these parameters using command2002.

Step 2: Define ring timer for which each station should ring using command 2003.Step 3: Decide whether the station should get continuous ring and program it using command 2004.Step 4: Program the rotation type for the trunk-landing group using command 2005 Step 5: Program a Trunk landing group for each trunk for working hours using command 2011 , for lunch

hours using command 2012 and for non-working hours using command 2013 .Step 6: Take the print out of the Trunk landing group configuration using command 2000 .Step 7: It is possible to default a trunk-landing group using command 2001 .

Each group entry in the hunting group table looks like:

Dest1 Dest2 Dest3 Dest4 Dest5 Dest6 Dest7 Dest8Station Type

Station

Ring Timer

Continuous Ring

Rotation Yes or No



Matrix


Commands:Step 1Use following command to program a trunk-landing group:2002-1-Trunk Landing Group-Destination I ndex-Station Type-Station Where,Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24

Destination Index is from 0 to 7Station Type and Station are

Step 2Use following command to program the time for which each destination in the group should ring:2003-1-Trunk Landing Group-Destination I ndex-Seconds

Where,Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24Destination Index is from 0 to 7Seconds is 000 to 255

Step 3Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring for a destination in the group:2004-1-Trunk L anding Group-Destination I ndex-Continuous Ring Where,Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24Destination Index is from 0 to 7Continuous Ring

Step 4Use following command to program rotation method of a trunk-landing group:2005-1-Trunk L anding Group-Rotation M ethod Where,Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24Rotation method

Step 5Use following command to assign trunk-landing groups to the trunk to land on desired stations duringworking hours:2011-1-Trunk-Tr unk Landing Group Where

Station Type Meaning Station

0 Null port ---

1 SLT port 000-255

2 DKP port 000-127

5 Department group 000-015

Continuous Ring Meaning

0 The station rings for the time set

1 The station rings till the call matures

Rotation Method Meaning0 Fresh call lands on the first station within the group

1 Fresh call lands following the rotation method



Matrix


Trunk is the software port number of the trunk.Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24

Use following command to assign trunk landing groups to the trunk to land on desired stations during lunchhours.2012-1-Trunk-Trunk Landing Group

WhereTrunk is the software port number of the trunk.Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24

Use following command to assign trunk landing groups to the trunk to land on desired stations during non-working hours.2013-1-Trunk-Trunk Landing Group WhereTrunk is the software port number of the trunk.Trunk landing group is from 00 to 24

Step 6

Use following command to take the print out of the Trunk landing group configuration:2000

Step 7Assign default stations to a trunk landing groups2001-1-Trunk Landing Group-#

Example:Program system for following constraints• 4 CO lines (S/w ports 000 to 003) are interfaced with Eternity.• First two CO lines should land on SLT numbers 201,203,205,202,204, (S/w ports 008,010,012,009,011

respectively) during working hours

• Other two CO lines should land on DKP numbers 206,207,208,209,210 (S/w ports 013,014,015,016,017)during working hours

• CO1 and CO2 should ring for 10 seconds on each station• CO3 and CO4 should ring for 20 seconds on each station.• Station should ring in the given sequence only.• “Rotation Method” to be followed.

Use following commands:2002-1-01-1-01-008 2002-1-01-2-01-010 2002-1-01-3-01-012 2002-1-01-4-01-009 2002-1-01-5-01-011

2003-1-01-1-010 2003-1-01-2-010 2003-1-01-3-010 2003-1-01-4-010 2003-1-01-5-010

2005-1-01-1-1



Matrix


2005-1-01-2-1 2005-1-01-3-1 2005-1-01-4-1 2005-1-01-5-1

2002-1-02-1-2-013

2002-1-02-2-2-014 2002-1-02-3-2-015 2002-1-02-4-2-016 2002-1-02-5-2-017

2003-1-02-1-020 2003-1-02-2-020 2003-1-02-3-020 2003-1-02-4-020 2003-1-02-5-020

2005-1-01-1-1

2005-1-02-2-1 2005-1-02-3-1 2005-1-02-4-1 2005-1-02-5-1

2011-1-000-01 2011-1-001-01 2011-1-002-02 2011-1-003-02


Program stations for a trunk landing group 2002-1-Trunk Landing Group-Desti nation I ndex-

Stati on Type-Stat ion

Program stations for a range of trunk landing group 2002-2-Trunk Landi ng Group-Trunk Landing

Group-Desti nati on Index-Stati on Type-Stati on

Program same stations for all trunk landing group 2002-* -Desti nati on I ndex-Stati on Type-Stati on

Program the ring timer for a station in a trunk landing

group

2003-1-Trunk Landing Group-Desti nation I ndex-

Seconds

Program the ring timer for stations with same

destination index in a range of trunk landing group

2003-2-Trunk Landi ng Group-Trunk Landing

Group-Desti nati on Index-Seconds

Program the ring timer for station with samedestination index for all the trunk-landing groups.

2003-* -Desti nati on Index-Seconds



Matrix


Default commands

Defaul t commands are not al lowed in 2002,2003,2004 and 2005 series

Program continuous or non-continuous ring for station with same destination index in all the trunk

landing groups

2004-* -Desti nati on Index-Conti nuous Ring

Program continuous or non-continuous ring for

station in a trunk-landing group.


Continuous Rin g

Program continuous or non-continuous ring for

station with same destination index in a range of trunk

landing group.


Group-Desti nati on I ndex-Conti nuous Ring

Program rotation method for station in a trunk-

landing group.


Rotation

Program rotation method for station with same

destination index in a range of trunk landing group.


Group-Desti nati on I ndex-Rotati on

Program rotation method for station with same

destination index in all the trunk landing groups

2005-* -Desti nati on Index-Rotati on

Assign a trunk-landing group to a trunk to land on

desired stations during working hours.

2011-1-Trunk-Trunk L anding Group

Assign same trunk landing group to range of trunks

to land on desired stations during working hours.

2011-2-Trunk-Trunk-Trunk Landing Group

Assign same trunk landing group to all the trunks to

land on desired stations during working hours.

2011-* -Trunk Landing Group


desired stations during Lunch hours.



to land on desired stations during Lunch hours.



land on desired stations during Lunch hours.



land on desired stations during non-working hours.



desired stations during non-working hours.



to land on desired stations during non-working hours.


Assign default stations to a trunk landing group 2001-1-Trunk l anding group-#

Assign default stations to a range of trunk landing

groups

2001-2-Trunk landing group-Trunk landing group -

#

Assign default stations to all trunk landing groups 2001-* -#



Matrix


Relevant topic:1. Time tables

Assign default trunk landing group to a trunk to land

on desired stations during working hours.

2011-1-Trunk-#

Assign default trunk landing group to range of trunks

to land on desired stations during working hours.

2011-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Assign default trunk landing group to all the trunks to

land on desired stations during working hours.

2011-* -#


on desired stations during Lunch hours.

2012-1-Trunk-#

Assign default trunk landing group to a range of

trunks to land on desired stations during Lunch



land on desired stations during Lunch hours.

2012-* -#


on desired stations during non-working hours.

2013-1-Trunk-#


land on desired stations during non-working hours.

2013-* -#

Assign default trunk landing group to a range of trunks to land on desired stations during non-working

hours




Matrix


TRUNK LANDING GROUPS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Group 00: SLT-000 SLT-001 SLT-002 SLT-003 SLT-004 SLT-005 SLT-006 SLT-007 OFF

Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015


Group 01: SLT-000 SLT-001 SLT-002 SLT-003 SLT-004 SLT-005 SLT-006 SLT-007 OFFRing Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015





Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015





Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Eternity V1R1 Page: 01



Matrix


=X=X=

TRUNK LANDING GROUPS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015





Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015





Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015



Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Eternity V1R1 Page: 02



Matrix


Trunk Parameters

What’s this?Trunks differ in their parameters like pulse type or tone type, hotline or normal line, etc. The Eternity offersFlexible settings for each trunk.

How to program?Trunk parameters can be programmed in following hierarchy:• Enable/disable a trunk using command 1601 • Define dial type of the trunk using command 1602 • Define type of trunk using command 1603 • Define the Trunk First digit wait timer using command 1604 • Define Trunk Interdigit timer using command 1605 • Define speech connection delay timer using command 1606 • Define pause timer using command 1607 • Take print outs of the trunk parameters using command 1600 One can set default configuration of the trunk using command 1608.It is also possible to copy parameters of trunk to other trunk using command 1609.

Trunk Enable/DisableA trunk port can individually be enabled or disabled. This can be useful when a particular trunk goes out of order and should be stopped from being allocated to a user.Use following command to enable/disable a trunk:1601-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk = Trunk Software Port Number from 000 to 127.

Example:Let us disable trunk port 0051601-1-005-0 By defaul t, all tr unks are enabled.

Dial TypeThe Eternity supports pulse and tone (DTMF) dialing on the trunk ports. Depending on a trunk port’s dialtype, the same can be programmed.Use following command to program the dial type of a trunk:1602-1-Trunk-Code

Where,Trunk = Trunk Software Port Number

Example:Let us program trunk port 005 with tone dialing1602-1-005-1

Code Meaning

0 Trunk port disabled

1 Trunk port enabled

Code Meaning

0 Pulse

1 Tone (DTMF)



Matrix


By defau lt, al l tr unks are of tone type.

Trunk TypeA normal dial type trunk, hotline type trunk, mixed type trunk and a special trunk can be interfaced with theEternity. These parameters should be programmed for these lines.

Normal Dial type trunk is the conventional trunk available from the Service Provider.Hotline Dial type trunk is a special trunk available from the Service Provider, which works as normal dialtype for some time after grabbing the trunk and thereafter works as Hotline.Hotline type trunk is the trunk connecting two destinations immediately on grabbing it.Special trunk is a trunk used by big organizations like Gujarat Electricity Board, etc for special purposes.

Use following command to define a trunk type:1603-1-Trunk-Code Where,Trunk = Trunk Software Port Number

Example:Let us program trunk port 001 for hotline1603-1-001-1 By defaul t, all tr unks are normal dial type trunks.

Pulse Dialing parametersIf the trunk lines are of pulse type then pulse-dialing parameters should be defined. The Eternity supports the

six different types of pulse dialing. This is helpful when different service providers use different types of pulse dialing parameters.

Use following command to define the pulse-dialing ratio:1608-1-Trunk-Ratio Type Where,Trunk is the software port from 000 to 127

Use following command to define pulse-dialing ratio for a range of trunks:1608-2-Trunk-Trunk-Ratio Type

Use following command to define pulse-dialing ratio for all trunks:1608-* -Ratio Type

Code Meaning

0 Normal Dial type

1 Hotline Dial type

2 Hotline type

3 Special trunk type

Ratio Type Meaning









Matrix


Example:Let us program trunk port 001 for 10PPS,40:601608-1-001-1 By defaul t, all tr unks have trunk ratio type 0.

Trunk Name

Trunks can be programmed with names. These names are displayed on the LCD of the DKP when anexternal call is received on these trunks. These names make it easy to identify the trunk on which the call ismade. This feature finds its application in facilities like PLCC, E&M, etc.A trunk name can be of maximum 8 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks andspaces.Trunk names can be programmed only from the DKP.

Use following command to program the trunk name:4406-1-Trunk-Name-# Where,Trunk = Software Port Number of the Trunk from 000 to 127 Name = A string of alphanumeric characters to be assigned for the trunk (maximum 8)

Use first 25 keys and the redial key to enter the name.Press hold to complete the command.

Clear commands

Example:Program the number “630555” for a trunk (software port number 000)4406-1-000-630555- press <hold> key of the DKP

The name is pri nted in trunk parameters report.

Trunk First Digit Wait TimerIt is the time before which the station should dial the digits on the trunk line after grabbing the trunk. If theoutside telephone number is not dialed during this time, the system gives error tone. This is a global timer and is applicable to all the trunks. It is recommended to keep this timer slightly more than the first digit waittimer of the trunk line itself.Use following command to program Trunk First Digit Wait Timer:1604-Seconds Default timer is 025 secondsRange of this timer is 000 to 255 seconds

Trunk Digit to Digit Wait TimerIt is the time between dialing of two digits on the trunk. If this timer is too large then the user will have towait for long time to transfer the call to other station. If this timer is too small then it is possible that few lastdigits of the telephone number dialed on the trunk will get skipped in the OG SMDR report. This is a globaltimer and is applicable to all the trunks.Use following command to program Trunk First Digit Wait Timer:1605-Seconds Default timer is 003 secondsRange of this timer is 000 to 255 seconds

Clear the name of the trunk 4405-1-Trunk-#

Clear the name for a range of trunks 4405-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Clear the name for all the trunks 4405-* -#



Matrix


Speech Connection Delay TimerIt is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the station user on grabbing the trunk line. Tounderstand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. A telephone line coming from an oldtelephone exchange is interfaced with the Eternity. Now when the user station not having access to longdistance numbers, grabs a trunk line and dials a number 1022-6305555. The PBX allows this number since itstarts with 1 but since the actual dial tone from the telephone exchange comes after some time, the telephone

exchange interprets this number as 022-6305555 and establishes the speech. This way a station user nothaving access to this number can dial out a long distance number. To avoid this situation, Eternity offers thistimer.This timer can be set for individual trunks.Use following command to program Speech connection delay timer for a trunk:1606-1-Trunk-Speech Connection Delay Timer Where,Trunk = 3-digit software port number from 000 to 127Speech connection delay timer = Timer in seconds from 0 to 9By default, Speech Connection Delay Timer i s 0 second.

Pause Timer

It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside number after grabbing the trunk. Sometimes it is observed that after grabbing the trunk line, the user does not get PSTN dial tone immediately.Instead he gets the dial tone from the PSTN after some time. This is due to old types of PSTNs. When user himself is dialing the number, he inadvertently waits for the dial tone and then dials the number. But this isnot so when PBX dials the number. When Redial or Auto-Redial or Abbreviated Dialing feature is used thePBX grabs the trunk line and dials the number at its own. Now if there is no pause time and if the PSTN is of old type then it is possible that the PBX may dial out the number before getting the dial tone. This may resultin dialing wrong number. To avoid this situation, Eternity offers pause timer, which can be set for individualtrunks. Pause timer is used during Redial, Auto Redial and Memory Dialing.Use following command to program Pause Timer for a trunk:1607-1-Trunk-Pause Timer Where,

Trunk = 3-digit software port number from 000 to 127Pause Timer = Timer in seconds from 000 to 255By defau lt, Pause timer i s 003 seconds.

Trunk parameters reportUse following command to print configuration report of a trunk:1600-1-Trunk A sample printout is attached herewith.


Enable/disable a trunk 1601-1-Trunk-Code Enable/disable a range of trunks 1601-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Enable/disable all the trunks 1601-* -Code

Program the dial type for a trunk 1602-1-Trunk-Code

Program the same dial type of a range of trunks 1602-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Program the same dial type of all trunks 1602-* -Code



Matrix


Default commands

Using these command following parameters will set to default values• Trunk will be enabled• Trunk will set to tone type

• Trunk will get default tenant group i.e. Tenant group 0• Trunk will get default priority i.e. 0• Trunk will get default maturity type i.e. maturity will be off on the trunk • Trunk flash timer will set to default value i.e. 006 seconds• Trunk Pause timer will set to default value i.e. 003 seconds• Trunk will get default PCC count i.e. 0• Trunk Speech connection delay timer will set to default value i.e. 000 seconds• DID will get Off on the trunk • DISA will get Off on the trunk • ECF will get Off on the trunk • Trunk will be assigned default trunk landing group i.e. 00• Trunk will be assigned default timetable i.e. 0• Trunk will get internal hold on music when kept on hold

Copy commands

Program a trunk as hotline 1603-1-Trunk-Code

Program trunks as hotline for a range of trunks 1603-2-Trunk-Trunk-Code

Program trunks as hotline for all trunks 1603-* -Code

Program Speech connection delay timer for a trunk 1606-1-Trunk-Speech Connecti on

Delay Timer

Program same Speech connection delay timer for a range of

trunks

1606-2-Trunk-Trunk-Speech

Connecti on Delay Timer

Program same Speech connection delay timer for all trunks 1606-* -Speech Connecti on Delay

Timer

Program Pause timer for a trunk 1607-1-Trunk-Pause timer

Program same Pause timer for a range of trunks 1607-2-Trunk-Trunk-Pause Timer

Program same Pause timer for all trunks 1607-* -Pause Timer

Print configuration report for a trunk 1600-1-Trunk

Print configuration report of a range of trunks 1600-2-Trunk-Trunk Print configuration report of all trunks 1600-*

Default all the parameters of a trunk. 1621-1-Trunk-#

Default all the parameters of a range of trunks 1621-2-Trunk-Trunk-#

Default all the parameters of all the trunks. 1621-* -#

Copy all the parameters of a trunk to another trunk 1622-1-Source Trunk-Desti nat ion

Trunk

Copy all the parameters of a trunk to a range of trunks 1622-2-Source Trunk-Desti nat ion

Trunk-Destination T runk

Copy all the parameters of a trunk to all the trunks 1622-* -Source Trunk



Matrix


TRUNK PARAMETERS AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:29

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Name :

Trunk Status : Enable

Dialing Type : Tone 10 PPS 33:66

Service Provider : 0Line Type : Normal Line

Maturity Type : Delay

Tenant Number : 0

Pre PSTN Digits : 0

Priority : 0

Flash Timer : 600ms

Pause Timer : 1 seconds

Speech Connection Timer : 0 second

Call Forward Status : OFF

Call Forward Trunk Access Group : -

Call Forward Destination : -

Time Table : 0

Caller Id Storage : ON

Outgoing Call Storage : ON

Incoming Call Storage : ONTime Zone --> Working Hours Break Hours Non-Working Hours

Trunk Landing Groups : 00 00 00

Direct Inward Dialing(DID) : OFF OFF OFF

Direct Inward System Access(DISA) : OFF OFF OFF

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


=X=X=



Matrix


Trunk Reservation

What’s this?• An important user can reserve a particular trunk for him for some time.• He need not share the trunk with others as long as the reservation is in effect.

How to use it?

Important points:• Trunk reservation is used once the user gets busy tone for a trunk access code.• Part of this feature is similar to Auto Call Back.• As soon as a trunk from the requested group is available, he gets ring.• When the user answers the ring, he gets connected with the trunk and hears the dial tone.• Now, this trunk is reserved for him.

• The trunk remains reserved for 3 Minutes.• During this time other users cannot access this trunk even if it is free.• Station which requested trunk reservation can make more than one call during trunk reservation timer.• The trunk becomes available to other users after the timer. This timer is called Trunk Reservation Timer

and is programmable.

Cancel trunk reservationA reserved trunk can be freed manually by a command before its timer expires manually.

• Once your important calls are over, do not forget to cancel the reservation. This will enable others to usethe trunk.

• If more than one station try to reserve the same trunk, the station that is identified first by the system will be given the reservation. All the other stations will get error tone.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow trunk reservation to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Trunk Reservation Timer – Time for which the trunk is reserved for you.Command: 3004-Minutes Default: 10 Minutes

Valid Range: 001 to 255 minutes

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Auto Call Back

=X=X=


2 DialTr unk Access Code Busy tone






Matrix


User Security (User Password)

What’s this?Eternity provides the user security of its station from unauthorized use. It also helps user to use fewimportant features that are password protected.• Each station of Eternity can have a password. This password helps the user in using following features

• Call follow me• Dynamic lock • DISA.• Walk in class of service• User Absent/Present• User password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits.• User password can be changed only from the station. However it can be cleared by SA/SE from any other

station, which is having access to programming feature.• The default User password is 1111 for all the users. Please note that the features requiring password don’t

accept the default password. Thus it is compulsory for the user to change the User password if he wishes touse any of the features that are protected by the password.

• In case the user has forgotten his password, the system engineer (SE) or the system administrator (SA) can

clear the password for any user.

How to program?Use following command to change the User password from the station:114-Old User password-New User password. New password is a number string of 4-digits. (Default password is 1111)User can dial this command just after lifting his handset.

How to use it?User password is used while using following features:• Call follow me• Dynamic lock • DISA.• Walk in class of service• User Absent/PresentPlease refer respective topics for better understanding.

Important point:• In case the user forgets his password then the SA or SE can assign a default password to the user. The user

can be a SLT or a DKP. For more details, please refer System Security.

=X=X=



Matrix


Voice Help

What’s this?• Users may not remember access codes for various features. The Eternity allows recording of voice help for

frequently used features.• With this feature, the users need to remember just once code for accessing the Voice Help. The user is

guide on the access codes for other features in the form of a voice message.• This facility can be used for any other application like remembering important phone numbers and passing

on a small message to colleagues.

How to use it?

Important points:• Voice Help is a programmable feature. Refer Class Of Service (COS) for more details.• A voice module must be spared for this feature. Refer Voice Module Applications for details.

How to program?Refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Voice help to a user.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. Voice Message Applications

=X=X=


2 Dial110 The Eternity plays voice help



Matrix


Voice Message Applications

What’s this?Eternity can store various voice messages. These messages can be played back to the caller/user dependingon the situation. In case DID is activated on few trunk lines then it is possible to guide caller to reach hisdesired person using this facility. A station user having access to personal alarm feature can record a relevant

voice message for him on his own.The Eternity supports 08 voice messages of 16 seconds each. Please note that voice module 00 is reservedfor Music on hold and hence it cannot be used for any other voice message application

This facility can be used for four different features as enumerated below:• DID Greeting message

• During working hours• During lunch hours• During non-working hours

• DID guidance messages• Dial message• Wrong dial message

• Busy message• No reply message• No dial message

• Feature messages• Alarm• Hold on music (recorded)• Auto redial• Help menu

• Personal Alarm Message• For SLT• For DKP

All the eight voice messages can be played back simultaneously

Applications of Voice MessagesVoice Messages for DID• Greeting message for working hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software”• Greeting message for lunch hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software. This is lunchtime. Please call after 2.00 pm”• Greeting message for non working hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software. We are closed for the day. Please call later”

• Dial Message

“Please dial the desired station number”.• Wrong Dial Message“Sorry you have dialed an invalid station number. Please dial a valid station number”.

• Busy dial message“The station you have dialed is busy. Please hold the line or try any other station number”.

• No reply message“The station you have dialed is not responding. Please try another station”.

• No dial message“Sorry you have not dialed any station number. Please wait while your call is transferred to the operator”.



Matrix


Voice Message for Alarm.This feature is very useful in hotels where it is required to wake up guests at odd time. At the same time it isalso required to greet them. When the guest picks up the handset on getting ring, he is greeted with thisrecorded message.Popular greeting message for alarms is:

“Good morning, Sir. This is a wake up call. You may please call room service for any assistance. Thanks.

Have a nice day”

Voice Message for Music on Hold. Normally, when a caller is kept on hold, he gets internal hold on music. This internal music can be replacedwith the external music (Please refer section “music”). But to feed external music, a separate music source isrequired which may not be feasible all the time. However, this same requirement can be fulfilled using thisfeature. Any message like advertisement of your company or any message related to your new plans can berecorded and can be played back to the caller when he is kept on hold. This way, two jobs are done at a time;the operator can attend to other call and the message, which otherwise you had to give to the caller, hasreached him in a much better manner.Messages for Music on hold can be:

“ Welcome to Progressive bearings. We are glad to announce that we are now an ISO 9001 company. Best

and continued efforts of our employees to deliver optimum quality products have made this possible”.

Voice Message for Auto Redial.During auto redial, if the call goes through and the system detects ring back tone, the system gives ring to thestation, which has requested auto redial. At this point of time both, the station as well as the destination areringing. Now if the destination answers the before the station, he gets internal hold on music. It could besurprising for him, why should he get music while answering a fresh call. This event can be avoided byreplacing music with a voice message. An appropriate voice message can be recorded and can be played back in such situation.Messages for Auto Redial can be:

“ This is a call from Progressive Bearings. Please wait! Thanks for holding the line.”

Voice Message for Help menu.Many people believe that features provided by the PBX are good. But they cannot use the features becausewhen they need features, they don’t remember the codes. Eternity helps them by playing back the help menu.Codes of the frequently used features can be recorded. Whenever the user needs to access a feature, he just presses a feature code after lifting the handset. The system plays help menu of the codes. The user need notremember or refer manuals for frequently used feature codes.Help menu messages could be:

“ 17 -For Auto-redial”.“101 – For room monitor”.“108-For personal memory programming”.“118-To retrieve a parked call”.

I f more featur es are used, a message can be recorded with all requi red codes. However, l imitation of the capacity of the voice message must be kept in mind.

How to program the system for voice message?Step 1: Record Voice message in a voice moduleStep 2: Playback the Voice message of a voice module for verificationStep 3: Assign Voice module for DID greeting message during working hoursStep 4: Assign Voice module for DID greeting message during lunch worksStep 5: Assign Voice module for DID greeting message during non-working hoursStep 6: Assign Voice module for DID guidance voice message



Matrix


Step 7: Assign Voice module for system featuresStep 8: Assign Voice module for personal voice message to a SLTStep 9: Assign Voice module for personal voice message to a DKP.Step 10: Take a printout of Voice module assignments

Please note that total 08 voice messages can be recorded of 16 seconds each.

CommandsStep 1Use following command to record a voice message:3501-Voice Module Where,Voice Module is the voice module number from 00 to 07

Lift the handset. Enter programming mode. Issue command 3501-Voice Module Number. You get beeps.Start recording the message after the beeps. Go on-hook on completion of message. It is also possible torecord the voice message from external music port. (AIP)

Step 2Use following command to verify a message:3502-Voice Module Where,Voice Module is the voice module number from 00 to 07If the recorded message is not good then repeat the above procedure.

Step 3Assign the voice module for DID greeting message during working hours3503-Voice Module Where,Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07

Give command 3503-# to de-assign the voice module for DID message during working hours

Step 4Assign the voice module for DID greeting message during break hours3504-Voice Module Where,Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07Give command 3504-# to de-assign the voice module for DID message during lunch hours

Step 5Assign the voice module for DID greeting message during non-working hours3505-Voice Module Where,Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07Give command 3505-# to de-assign the voice module for DID message during non-working hours

Step 6Assign the voice module for different DID phases3506-Message I ndex-Voice Module Where,Message Index is from 0 to 4



Matrix


Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07

Give command 3506-DID Message-# to de-assign the voice module for a DID phase

Step 7Assign the voice module for different system features3507-Feature I ndex-Voice Module Where,Feature Index is from 0 to 2Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07

Give command 3507-Feature Index-# to de-assign the voice module for a feature

Step 8Assign the voice module for personal voice message to SLT3508-1-SLT-Voice Module Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07

Give command 3508-1-SLT-# to de-assign the voice module for a personal voice message to SLT

Step 9Assign the voice module for personal voice message to DKP3509-1-DKP-Voice Module Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user Voice Module is the voice module number from 01 to 07Give command 3509-1-SLT-# to de-assign the voice module for a personal voice message to DKP

Step 10Use following command to take printouts of the voice module assignment:3500

Example:Record a following voice message for following:Greetings for working hoursDial MessageAuto redial

DID Messages Message index

Dial Message 0

Wrong Dial Message 1

Busy Message 2

No Reply Message 3 No Dial Message 4

System feature Feature index

Alarm 0

Auto-Redial 1

Help Menu 2



Matrix


Use following command to record three different voice messages:3501-01 Beeps – “Welcome to Cotton Software Inc” 3501-02 Beeps – “Please dial the desired station number” 3501-03 Beeps – “Th is is a call f rom Cotton Software I nc. Please hold the line”

Assign these voice messages to different features

3503-1 3506-1-2 3507-2-3

How to record the voice message from external music port?• Connect the pre-amplified output of the music source from where the message is to be recorded to the

external music port. Please refer ‘Music on hold’ and ‘Eternity Eternity-Installation Manual’ for moredetails.

• Enter Programming mode.• Use following command to record the voice message:3511-Voice Module Number Where,

Voice Module Number is from 00 to 07• You get confirmation tone.• Press the ‘Play’ button of the music source.• Go on-hook on completion of the voice message. Press ‘Stop’ button of the music source.

How to take backup of the Voice message?It is also possible to take the backup of the voice message stored in the voice modules in the system’smemory and then copy it onto other voice modules, if required.

Use following command to copy voice message from a voice module to a backup file:3514-Voice Module Number-F il e I denti ty Number Where,

Voice Module Number is from 00 to 07.File Identity Number is from 00 to 15

Use following command to copy voice message from a backup file to a voice module:3513-F il e I denti ty Number-Voice Module Number Where,Voice Module Number is from 00 to 07.File Identity Number is from 00 to 15Please note that above commands take approx. 20 minutes to get executed. The station from which thiscommand is given will remain idle during this time. Any activity like dialing or going on-hook will terminatethis process.

How to clear the recorded voice message?Use following command to clear the voice message in the voice module:3515-Voice Module Number Where,Voice Module Number is from 00 to 07

How to define the voice message duration?Use following command to define the voice message duration:3516-Voice Module Number-Voice Message duration



Matrix


Where,Voice Module Number is from 00 to 07Voice Message Duration is from 00 to 16 seconds

Wild CardRange commands

Default commands

Relevant topics:1. DID2. Class Of Service (COS)3. Alarms

Assign a voice module for personal voice message to aSLT

3508-1-SLT-Voice Modul e

Assign a voice module for same personal voice message

to range of SLTs

3508-2-SLT-SLT-Voi ce Module


to all of SLTs

3508-* -Voice Modul e

Assign a voice module for personal voice message to a

DKP

3509-1-DKP-Voice Module


to range of DKPs

3509-2-DKP-DKP-Voice Module


to all of DKPs

3509-* -Voice Modul e

Clear voice module for personal voice message of a SLT 3508-1-SLT-#

Clear voice module for personal voice message for a range of SLTs 3508-2-SLT-SLT-#

Clear voice module for personal voice message for all SLTs 3508-* -#

Clear voice module for personal voice message of a DKP 3509-1-DKP-#

Clear voice module for personal voice message for a range of DKPs 3509-2-DKP-DKP-#

Clear voice module for personal voice message for all DKPs 3509-* -#



Matrix


=X=X=

VOICE MODULE, DID AND DISA PARA AS ON 23-08-2002(Fri) AT 19:31

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

MESSAGES VM No.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Greeting Messages:

Working Hours -

Break Hour -

Non-Working Hours -

System Messages:Alarm Message -

Auto Redial Message -

Help Message -

Music Message -

DID Voice Messages:

Dial Message -

Wrong Dial Message -

Busy Message -

No Reply Message -

No Dial Message -

DID Timers:

Inactivity Timer 015 Seconds

Answer Wait Timer 005 Seconds

Music Timer 005 Seconds

Beep Timer 010 SecondsRing Back Tone Timer 030 Seconds

Busy Tone Timer 015 Seconds

Error Tone Timer 005 Seconds

DISA Timers:

Idle Timer 020 Seconds

Inactivity Timer 090 Seconds

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Matrix


Walk-in Class Of Service

What’s this?• A user can make calls from some other stations according to his Class Of Service (COS) and Toll Control

programming.• A user can make calls from any other station and still put the calls in his account.

• This feature is useful to managers when they move away from their desk. Using this feature, they canmake long distance calls from any other station where such dialing is not allowed.

• This facility is protected with the user password.

How to use it?

Example:A user is having station number 203. His user password is 3535. He is sitting at station number 205. He

needs to make a long distance call from 205 but such facility is not allowed from there.The user can dial Walk-in Class Of Service from 205 and make necessary calls by dialing:111-203-3535 On dialing above command, the system gives confirmation tone. The user can dial the trunk access code toget trunk dial tone during the confirmation tone. Alternately he can wait for the dial tone once theconfirmation tone expires.

Important points:• Only one call is allowed at a time using this feature.• To make two calls one after the other, the user needs to dial the code twice.• Walk in class of service is not allowed with default user password.• Walk in class of service is available to all the stations.

Relevant topics:1. Class Of Service (COS)2. User Password

=X=X=


2 Dial111-Stat i on-U ser Password Dial tone

3 Dial out the desired outside number



Matrix


Wild Card Programming

What’s this?The Eternity supports easy and fast programming. It is possible to program a parameter for a particular port,for a range of ports or for all ports.

Single Port ProgrammingUse the following command format-when setting of only one port is to be changed.Format:Command-1-Port-Parameters

Example:Class of Service (COS) group 01 is to assigned for SLT software port number 002 for working hours

1711-1-002-01

Range of Ports programmingIf all the ports within a range need an identical value, this command can be used. This method saves lots of time because it is possible to program many ports with one, single command. Even if one or two ports needdifferent values, it makes sense to include them in the range and then after exceptions can be programmedseparately with single port commands.FormatCommand-2-Port-Port-Parameters

(Range)

Example 1Class of Service (COS) group 01 is to assigned for SLT software port number 000 to SLT software portnumber 007 for working hours1711-2-000-007-01

All Ports ProgrammingIf most of the ports need the same value, this command type is very useful. Program all the ports with this blanket command. The exception ranges or exception single cases can be programmed separately.Format:Command-* -Parameter 1-Parameter 2……………

Example 1

All the SLT ports need flash timer of 600 ms5601-* -600

Example 2:All the DKP ports need priority of 1. But, DKP port 005 needs priority of 9. And DKP ports from 010 to015 need priority of 3.2902-* -1 2902-1-005-9 2902-2-010-015-3

Command Format Meaning

Command - 1- Port - Parameter Single Port Programming

Command - 2-Port - Port-Parameters Range of Ports Programming

Command - * - Parameters All Ports Programming



Matrix


Copy commandsThe Eternity also supports copying complete settings from one port to another port. Following table lists allthe copy commands:

Example 1:Copy all the programming of SLT port 001 to SLT port 115.1302-1-001-115

Example 2:Copy all the programming of DKP port 018 to DKP port 006.1421-1-018-006

Default commands

The Eternity supports setting default values to a parameter of a port. This is useful if some wrong programming is done by mistake and it is necessary to start with some known, valid value.

Example 1Load default flash timer for SLT port 005.5601-1-005-#

Example 2Load default class of service group for DKP ports from 010 to 016.1721-2-010-016-#

Example 3Load default dial type for all the trunks1602-*-#

=X=X=

Command Meaning

Command-Port A-Port B Copy from SLT-A to SLT-B

Command-Port A-Port B Copy from DKP-A to DKP–B

Command-Port A-Port B Copy from Trunk A to Trunk B

Command Format Meaning

Command-1-Port-# Default for a single port

Command-2-Port-Port-# Default for a range of ports

Command-*-# Default for all ports.



Matrix


INDEX

16KHz line – Please refer Maturity

AAbbreviated Dialing 6Access CodesAccount CodesAdded Security – Please refer System SecurityAlarmsAllowed list and Denied listAnnouncement – Please refer PagingAppointment Reminder – Please refer AlarmsASMDR ASMDR with currency billing – Please refer SMDR Auto Call Back Auto RedialAutomatic Call Disconnector – Please refer Call Duration ControlAutomatic least cost line selection – Please refer Least Cost RoutingAutomatic printing of calls – Please refer SMDR Automatic Route Selection – Please refer Least Cost RoutingAutomatic Station Lock – Please refer Dynamic Lock

BBack Ground Music (BGM)Back to Back PBX – Please refer Behind the PBX ApplicationsBarge-InBehind the PBX ApplicationsBGMBilling– Please refer SMDR Boss RingBudget – Please refer Call BudgetBudget Management – Please refer Call Budget

CCall Billing – Please refer Call Cost CalculationCall BudgetCall Cost Calculation

Call Details Recording – Please refer SMDR Call Disconnector – Please refer Call Duration ControlCall Duration ControlCall Duration DisplayCall Duration Limiter – Please refer Call Duration ControlCall ForwardCall Hold – Please refer HoldCall Maturity – Please refer MaturityCall Park



Matrix


Call Pick UpCall Progress TonesCall SplittingCall Timer – Please refer Call Duration DisplayCall Toggle – Please refer Call SplittingCall Toggle of CO line – Please refer Continued Dialing

Call Transfer Caller ID – Please refer Calling Line IdentificationCaller Name – Please refer Calling Line Identification and Station NameCaller Number–Please refer Calling Line Identification and Station NameCalling a number having DID facility – Please refer Continued DialingCalling a Station – Please refer Internal CallCalling an outside telephone number – Please refer External CallCalling Line Identification (CLI)Cancel Station FeaturesClass of Service (COS)CLICommunication Ports

Computer Connectivity–Please refer Comm. Port & Prog. using a Computer Conference-3 PartyConference-MultipartyConfiguration ReportsConnecting a Hotline to the PBX – Please refer Trunk ParametersConnecting a Lease line to the PBX – Please refer Trunk ParametersConnecting a Router to the PBX – Please refer E&M ConnectivityConsole – Please refer DKP-Operations, Basic Parameters, Soft Key Prog.Consultation Hold – Please refer Call SplittingContinued DialingClass of Service (COS)Customer Name

DDay and Night Mode – Please refer Time TablesDefault Programming password – Please refer System SecurityDefault SE password – Please refer System SecurityDelayed DKP Ring – Please refer DKP-OperationsDepartment CallDesired Codes – Please refer Access CodesDial Block – Please refer DKP-OperationsDialing Ratio – Please refer Trunk Parameters and E&M Connectivity

DIDDID messages – Please refer Voice Message ApplicationsDifferent type of Tones – Please refer Call Progress TonesDifferent types of Rings – Please refer Distinctive RingsDigital Key Phone-Basic ParametersDigital Key Phone-OperationDigital Key Phone-Soft Keys ProgrammingDirect Inward Dialing (DID)Direct Inward Line – Please refer Trunk Landing GroupsDirect Inward System Access (DISA)



Matrix


Direct Outward Dialing – Please refer External CallDirect Outward System Access – Please refer Direct Inward System Access (DISA)Direct Station Selection Console (DSS-64)Direct Trunk Access – Please refer Selective Trunk AccessDISADistinctive Rings

DKP Absent/Present – Please refer DKP-OperationsDKP Keypad lock/open – Please refer DKP-OperationsDKP Ringer Auto Acknowledge – Please refer DKP-OperationsDKP Ringer Volume – Please refer DKP-OperationsDKP Speech Volume Ringer – Please refer DKP-OprationsDNDDo Not Disturb (DND)DOSA – Please refer Direct Inward System Access (DISA)DSS-64 – Please refer DKP-Operations, Basic Parameters, Soft Key Prog.Dynamic Lock

EE&M ConnectivityECFEnter Program Mode – Please refer Programming the SystemEnter System Administrator (SA) Mode – Please refer Programming the SystemEnter System Engineer (SE) Mode – Please refer Programming the SystemEon-45 – Please refer DKP-OperationsExit Program mode – Please refer Programming the SystemExit System Administrator (SA) mode – Please refer Programming the SystemExit System Engineer (SE) mode – Please refer Programming the SystemExternal CallExternal Call Forward (ECF)

External Music

FFlash TimersFlashing on Trunk – Please refer Continued DialingFlexible NumbersFollow Me

G

Group Call – Please refer Department Call

HHelp ReportsHoldHot Line



Matrix


IIncoming Call landing – Please refer Trunk Landing GroupsIndependent Timings – Please refer Time TablesIndividual Memory Dialing – Please refer Abbreviated DialingIntercom – Please refer Internal CallInternal Call

Interrupt RequestInvade Secrecy – Please refer Room Monitor

J

K Key Programming – Please refer DKP-Soft key programming

LLast Caller RecallLast Number RedialLCR Least Cost Routing (LCR)Long Conversation Cut Off – Please Call Duration ControlLong Conversation Cut Off – Please refer Call Duration ControlLong Conversation Warning – Please refer Call Duration Control

M

MaturityMemory Dialing – Please refer Abbreviated DialingMOHMusic on Hold (MOH)

N Name programming – Please refer Station Name and Customer Name Night Service – Please refer Time Tables

OOnline data transfer to the Computer – Please refer SMDR Online printing of calls – Please refer SMDR Operator Operator Console–Please refer DKP-Operation, Basic Para., Soft Key Prog.Override



Matrix

PPagingPBX Compatibility – Please refer Behind the PBX ApplicationsPBX Expansion – Please refer Behind the PBX ApplicationsPersonal Memory Dialing – Please refer Abbreviated DialingPilot Call – Please refer Department Call

Pilot Number – Please refer Department CallPolarity Reversal – Please refer MaturityPrinter PortPrinting Incoming calls received on a particular date – Please refer SMDR Printing Outgoing calls – Please refer SMDR PriorityPrivacyProgramming the SystemProgramming Using a Computer Programming Using the JeevesPulse Rates – Please refer Call Cost Calculation

QQuick Dialing – Please refer Abbreviated Dialing

R RaidReal Time Clock Recall – Please refer Last Caller RecallRedial – Please refer Last Number RedialReminder Call – Please refer AlarmsRemote ProgrammingReports – Please refer SMDR and Configuration ReportsRestricted Dialing – Please refer Toll ControlRing Groups – Please refer Trunk Landing GroupsRings – Please refer Distinctive RingsRoom Monitor

SSecretary – Please refer Operator Selectable Ring Tones – Please refer Distinctive RingsSelective Dialing – Please refer Toll ControlSelective Trunk AccessSharing a PBX – Please refer Tenant ServiceSLT Basic ParametersSoftware Port and Hardware IDSpecial Ring – Please refer Distinctive RingsSpeed Dialing – Please refer Abbreviated DialingStation Message Detail Recording (SMDR)Station NameSTD Codes – Please refer Call Cost Calculation

Eternity1 V1 Software Manual

Documents

Transcript of Eternity1 V1 Software Manual